Home

easyGUI User manual

1. GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Scrolls text box contents to the top Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Text box index 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok Gui Gui Gui Gui Lib TextBox Scroll Lib TextBox Scroll Lib TextBox Scroll To Line Lib TextBox Scroll GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home Pixel Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Down End Up Scrolls text box contents to the top Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home Pixel GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Text box index 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down Pixel 2 Text box scrolled above the top uiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL BELOW END Text box scrolled below the bottom GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL ILLEGAL NDX Illegal text box index GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL INSIDE BLOCK Text box scrolled mid way GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT HOME Text box scrolled to top GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT END Text box scrolled to the bottom G G assSiiaul GuiLib TextBox Scroll End Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll GuiLib TextBox Scroll To PixelLine Up Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll To Line Purpose Scrolls te
2. 259 Guibib GetDOot uite TRO WO TRE EVE TUE TEE 260 GuiLib GetGreenRgbColor eese eese eene nete tn tnnt nn treinta tnnt tntn stata etnia einen enun 260 GuiLib GetRedRgbColor eese eene nn ennt tnt nnne ene tn ttn ennt tetn statini tette tn eterne nn 260 GuiLib GetTextLanguagePrtr seeseseseeseseseeeeeeee entente nennen nennen nennen nennen nnnnt nens 261 G llib Get TextPE 23 ccesssevadeasceadestasevadeasce deedasevades ids dees ise ides idea c eir afr i der ier ag ri d inr aga 261 GuiLib GetTextWidth esee eene nennen nnne nnns tnit en enenatis innen 261 GuiLib Graph AddDataPoint 5 2 eterne tarnen rettet tnra cni rro rs eaa ia esa na ea saab inn 262 GUILIb Graph AddDataSet tree rr en een PH ERN TRETEN RETE ERE TK ERE Tun 262 Guilb Graph Close oeisio e ertet e ene era eee Pep ee a Tee ve er TR 263 GUILIB Graph Big is 263 GuiLib Graph DrawDataPoint seeesseseeeeeeeee nete tnt tnit tn innen enn tn inneren 264 GuiLib Graph DrawDataSet ou cccecssssesseeeceecseeseeseeessesseeseeeceesesseceeeesesaesseeeseeseesseeseeeseees 264 GuiLib Graph HideDataSet essent nn ennt tette tnnt tnt tn etnia statis eines tn sinis enn 264 GuiLib Graph HideXAXIS sire ret eee er eru ee Er RR P Rn 265 GuiLib Graph HideYAxis sessi ennt netten tnter ens tn innen tn tenete 265 GuiLib
3. GuiConst MICRO BIG ENDIAN Purpose Uses Big Endian byte ordering most significant byte in first address for micro controller memory Full declaration define GuiConst MICRO BIG ENDIAN GuiConst MICRO LITTLE ENDIAN Purpose Uses Little Endian byte ordering least significant byte in first address for micro controller memory Full declaration define GuiConst MICRO LITTLE ENDIAN assSiiaul GuiConst MIRRORED HORIZONTALLY Purpose Indicates that the display output is mirrored horizontally Full declaration define GuiConst MIRRORED HORIZONTALLY GuiConst MIRRORED VERTICALLY Purpose Indicates that the display output is mirrored vertically Full declaration define GuiConst MIRRORED VERTICALLY GuiConst PALETTE SIZE Purpose No of entries in the palette Can be 16 or 256 Full declaration define GuiConst PALETTE SIZE XXX GuiConst_PICC_COMPILER_ROM Purpose Special flag for Microchip PicC compilers when handling ROM Full declaration define GuiConst PICC COMPILER ROM GuiConst PIXEL OFF Purpose Color of Pixel OFF pixels Full declaration define GuiConst PIXEL OFF XXX GuiConst PIXEL ON Purpose Color of Pixel ON pixels Full declaration define GuiConst PIXEL ON XXX GuiConst PIXELS PER BYTE Purpose Number of pixels in each display buffer byte Can be from 8 monochrome to 1 pixel per byte For color depths higher than 8 more th
4. GuiLib_Graph_AddDataSet Purpose Adds a data set to a graph The data set must be created in the structure but is not shown before this function is called Memory must be assigned independently for the data set Nothing is drawn in this function Remarks Used only for Graph items Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph AddDataSet GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex uiConst INT8U DataSetIndex uiConst INT8U XAxisIndex uiConst INT8U YAxisIndex uiLib GraphDataPoint DataPtr QQAQQQQDA uiConst INT16U DataSize uiConst INT16U DataCount uiConst INT16U DataFirst Input GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based assSii aul Output Related functions DataSetIndex Index of data set in the graph index is zero based XAxisIndex Index of X axis to use index is zero based YAxisIndex Index of Y axis to use index is zero based DataPtr Pointer to an array of data points where each data point is a 32 bit signed X Y entity of type GuiLib GraphDataPoint DataSize Maximum number of data points possible in the data set DataCount Number of active data points in the data set DataFirst Index of first active data point index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 Lib Graph AddDataPoint Lib Graph DrawDataPoint Lib Graph DrawDataSet Lib Graph HideDataSet Lib Graph Redraw Lib Graph RemoveDataSet Lib Graph ShowDataSet H H H H H pp G G G
5. Allow upside down at runtime Works only for monochrome displays ss EZ Display controller endian mode Li i E Litle Endan LSB MSE Big Endian Number of display controllers horizontally f Number of display controllers vertically f Settings on this page define how display RAM is handled by the target system display controller Furthermore the complete display image can be rotated in all four major directions and mirrored in both directions to facilitate mounting the display otherwise than initially intended by the display manufacturer e Byte orientation Set this setting according to the display controller in use For displays with color depths of 5 bpp or higher the setting is irrelevant e Bit orientation Set this setting according to the display controller in use For displays with color depths of 5 bpp or higher the setting is irrelevant e Color planes Some display controllers operates with several color planes in display RAM effectively treating each plane as a monochrome image One and two color planes are supported e Display orientation The display contents can be oriented in the four primary directions Normal rotated 90 right upside down and rotated 90 left This can be utilized when Iq 6jiBI5 Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 53 assSii aul mounting the display in other orientations than the one intended by the display manufacturer Because easyGUI uses the display in
6. EasvilliGUIi GuiConst_COLOR_DEPTH_24 Purpose Indicates a 24 bpp truecolor color depth Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 24 GuiConst_COLOR_MAX Purpose Defines the highest allowed color index 0 16777216 Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR MAX XXX GuiConst COLOR MODE GRAY Purpose Specifies grayscale color mode Only applicable to 1 bpp 2 bpp 4 bpp and 8 bpp color depths Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR MODE GRAY GuiConst COLOR MODE PALETTE Purpose Specifies palette based color mode Only applicable to 4 bpp and 8 bpp color depths Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR MODE PALETTE GuiConst COLOR MODE RGB Purpose Specifies RGB color mode Only applicable to 8 bpp or higher color depths Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR MODE RGB GuiConst COLOR PLANES 1 Purpose Indicates a normal single bit plane color system Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR PLANES 1 GuiConst COLOR PLANES 2 Purpose Indicates a two bit plane color system with a monochrome image in each plane which combined gives a 2 bpp grayscale system Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR PLANES 2 GuiConst COLOR RGB STANDARD Purpose Indicates that the system uses 24 bit color codes directly or via palette with color bits organized as bits 0 7 red bits 8 15 green and bits 16 23 blue Such a assSiiaul system is directly compatible wi
7. GuiConst CHAR Sl GuiConst MAX TEXT LEN 1 GuiVar ScrollLineNo LineIndex assSii aul Sprintf S1 Scroll line item d LineIndex strcpy GuiVar ScrollLineItem 51 GuiVar ScrollLinePrice 100 LineIndex or if using Unicode character mode instead of ANSI mode void DemoScrollLine GuiConst INT16S LineIndex GuiConst CHAR S1 GuiConst_ MAX TEXT LEN 1 GuiVar ScrollLineNo LineIndex Sprintf S1 Scroll line item Sd LineIndex GuiLib StrAnsiToUnicode GuiVar ScrollLineItem 5S1 GuiVar ScrollLinePrice 100 LineIndex What s going on here The function must have the parameters as shown above It has a single 16bit signed parameter defining the scroll line index with zero as the topmost line in the scroll box the topmost absolute line not the topmost visible line A more realistic call back function than in the above example will presumably retrieve data from some kind of source like e g a string array or a database retrieve call Observe that not all scroll lines in a scroll box need to have the same layout If an indexed structure call item is inserted into the scroll line structure more than one scroll line design can be used in a single scroll box Only limitation is the scroll line height which must be the same for all scroll lines in a scroll box One application for this is a list of items where T headers and dividing lines can be inserted by defining indexed structures
8. Basics Display controller Color Simulated display Compiler Operation Type definitions Constant declarations Buffer sizes Te lian mode Prefixes for constant declarations Max text string length go i Unsigned byte const GuiConst_INT8U p C BigEndan BIMSB i Max numerical variables string length f 2 Unsigned integer const GuiConst_INT16U Max number of paragraph lines fo 8 bit char type char Signed integer const GuiConst_INT16S Maximum number of concurrent dynamic items fio 8 bit signed type signed char Generic pointer const GuiConst_PTR Max No of concurrent background bitmaps fio 8 bit unsigned type unsigned char Font structure const GuiLib_FontRec 16 bit signed type fsigned shot Font structure pointer const GuiLib FontRecPtr 16 bit unsigned type unsigned shot Font pointer its 24 bit signed type Default compiler prefixes QUE ace ES Special compiler settings 32 bit signed type signed int Normal ANSI compiler o b untenedivce unsigned C AVR compiler flash RAM operation Sex 9 Microchip Pic C compiler operation TANE size C Keil compiler reentrant keyword s 16 ai Imagecraft compiler 24 bit CodeVision compiler C 32bit C AVR GCC compiler void C void const Settings on this page determine miscellaneous parameters of the easyGUI library operational mode Text setup panel e Character mode Only
9. Project E m Parameters Esport object D Projekt easyGUI Applic 6 0 046 0 0 002 P Browse Temporary project Be skipped amp e m Font handling Complete font Character range First po Last B5 M Structure handling gt Iv Include called Structures Iv Include variables amp positions in use a8 Import object On the left is the current project In the middle are anumber of controls and settings for the import export process On the right is the external project closed in the above example CURRENT PROJECT PANEL The current project panel is always open and displays all components of the project as a tree e Fonts This branch can be expanded showing each individual font in the project e Parameters Contains all basic project setup like display size compiler settings etc E 6 2 s Solutions Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS assSii aul e Languages Contains all defined languages Only language setup is included not translated texts Texts are part of the structures e Positions This branch can be expanded showing each individual fixed position in the project e Variables This branch can be expanded showing each individual variable in the project e Structures This branch can be expanded showing each individual structure in the project e C code setup All fixed code headers footers and other C code generatio
10. 114 Radio button partiel irent re reet IER a Tee Ire eere eR Tues 115 B tton panel e EE 116 12 13 14 EasvilliGUIi Panelpahel E 118 edel qel M 118 C r Sede 124 Graphics layer and filter panels essseeeseeeseseeeeeeennene nennen nnne nennen nnne 128 DISPIAY PAM Gl ksi c C 131 BECKER tnngeeee 138 1 Touch interface hardware eese eene netten tnt tn tnnt tn tinte treinta tinent etn tnn tene 139 2 Coordinate training rete eee retine e re PR ve eee pe e Eae S 139 B Event handlitig iet rre eee ien reete nee pe Pr re ee ger ge Eri eee 141 C CODE GENERATION WINDOW isiccscssscicssacscsstusisccessisessscisndarsnsstesetissuwevenassenens 142 pI ixilgtputolok i iibjoe T M 142 Code generation mode eiae ire ot Rh ERE XR HR ELE ien a raie en EUR red eR Ree ERROR e Rn 143 Lan Wage Selection cies iste 143 Uncompressed font data oo eeesseesceessessseeseeeesceessesesecsseecsseeesesesecsseesseeesacsesessesesaceesacsesersesesaees 145 External memory storage eee nennen nnnm nennen tne nenne tenete nete nnnm ete nn tenens 145 Compressed bitmaps erre tette diii uteri ie Pe ree Ree PEG Pena e dE ELI EXER HERO 147 C and H file code generation oc eccs
11. GuiLib VAR SIGNED INT Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type signed int 16 bit signed Full declaration define GuiLib VAR SIGNED INT 4 GuiLib VAR STRING Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type string 8 bit unsigned characters in ANSI mode 16 bit unsigned characters in Unicode mode Full declaration define GuiLib VAR STRING 9 GuiLib VAR UNSIGNED CHAR Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type unsigned char 8 bit unsigned Full declaration define GuiLib VAR UNSIGNED CHAR 1 GuiLib VAR UNSIGNED LONG Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type unsigned long 32 bit unsigned Full declaration define GuiLib VAR UNSIGNED LONG 5 assSii aul GuiLib VAR UNSIGNED INT Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type unsigned int 16 bit unsigned Full declaration define GuiLib VAR UNSIGNED INT 3 Variables Variables only relevant internally between the easyGUI units are not mentioned GuiLib ActiveCursorFieldNo Purpose Contains the currently active cursor field number with zero being the first cursor field Do not change it directly but call functions GuiLib Cursor Select GuiLib Cursor Up OrGuiLib Cursor Down instead Full declaration GuiConst INT16S GuiLib ActiveCursorFieldNo GuiLib CurStructureNdx Purpose Contains the inde
12. Input Output Related functions Removes a data set from a graph Memory must be released independently for the data set Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph RemoveDataSet GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U DataSetIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based DataSetIndex Index of data set in the graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 GuiLib Graph AddDataPoint GuiLib Graph AddDataSet GuiLib Graph DrawDataPoint assSiioaul GuiLib Graph DrawDataSet GuiLib Graph HideDataSet GuiLib Graph Redraw GuiLib Graph ShowDataSet GuiLib Graph ResetXAxisOrigin Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Resets the X axis origin to the original origin Useful for resetting dynamic graphs with moving X axis Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph ResetXAxisOrigin GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8S AxisIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based AxisIndex Index of X axis in the graph index is zero based Index 1 will reset all defined X axes Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 iLib Graph DrawAxes iLib Graph HideXAxis iLib Graph HideYAxis iLib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin iLib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin iLib Graph Redraw iLib Graph ResetYAxisOrigin iLib Graph
13. define GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT END 3 GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT HOME Purpose Full declaration Used in GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Pixel and GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos function calls Current vertical scroll position is at top of text first text line just shown GI No define GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT HOMI GuiLib_TEXTBOX_SCROLL_BELOW_END Purpose Full declaration Used in GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Pixel and GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos function calls Current vertical scroll position is below end position some blank space shown below last text line define GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL BELOW END 5 GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL ILLEGAL NDX Purpose Full declaration Used in GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Pixel and GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos function calls The text box scroll index function parameter was illegal define GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL ILLEGAL NDX 0 EasviliGUIi GuiLib_TEXTBOX_SCROLL_INSIDE_BLOCK Purpose Used in GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Pixel and GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos function calls Current vertical scroll position is in the middle of the text some text above and below visible window of text Full declaration define GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL INSIDE BLOCK 1 GuiLib TRANSPARENT OFF Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be written with background painting disabled Full declaration define GuiLib TRANSPARENT
14. e Memory save Saves the current coordinate value in one of the three memory locations The calculated coordinate is a sum of all contributions previous coordinate relative coordinate etc the calculation can be viewed at the bottom of the panel EasvilliGUIi Secondary position panel Item types Clear area Paragraph Line Framed rectangle Filled rectangle Framed rounded rectangle Filled rounded rectangle Variable paragraph Button Panel Graph Active area Clipping rectangle Graphics layer Touch area Edits the secondary coordinate pair X2 Y2 It is almost identical to the primary coordinate pair except that relative coordinates are not relative to the previous item but relative to the primary coordinate pair handy for the size of boxes Radius Corner panel Item types Framed rounded rectangle Filled rounded rectangle Circle Ellipse Quarter Circle Quarter Ellipse Button Panel Set the Radius for circle and ellipse drawing or set the Radius for the rounded corners of rounded rectangles buttons and panels Each corner of a rounded rectangle button or panel can be considered as a quarter of a circle with radius R The principles of editing and the parameters set are equal to the above described in Primary position panel A number of parameters displayed at the panel depend on the selected item a single set for a circle corner radius R and a double set for ellipse axes Rx Ry The coordinates have 0
15. Angle in radians 4096 1 rad 4096 Cosine of angle in 1 4096 units GuiLib DegToRad assSii aul GuiLib RadToDeg GuiLib CosDeg GuiLib SinDeg GuiLib SinRad GuiLib Cursor Down Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Makes next cursor field active redrawing both current and new cursor field Removed if cursor support is disabled GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Cursor Down void None 0 Cursor at end of range 1 Cursor moved GuiLib Cursor End GuiLib Cursor Hide GuiLib Cursor Home GuiLib Cursor Select GuiLib Cursor Up GuiLib IsCursorFieldInUse GuiLib Cursor End Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Makes last cursor field active redrawing both current and new cursor field Removed if cursor support is disabled GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Cursor End void None 0 Cursor at end of range 1 Cursor moved GuiLib Cursor Down GuiLib Cursor Hide GuiLib Cursor Home GuiLib Cursor Select GuiLib Cursor Up GuiLib IsCursorFieldInUse GuiLib Cursor Hide Purpose Remarks Full declaration Hides cursor field Removed if cursor support is disabled void GuiLib Cursor Hide void assSii aul Input None Output None Related functions GuiLib Cursor Down GuiLib Cursor End GuiLib Cursor Select GuiLib Cursor Up GuiLib IsCursorFieldInUse GuiLib Cursor Home Purpose Makes firs
16. Output None GuiLib InvertBoxStart Purpose Sets parameters for inverted box function Full declaration void GuiLib InvertBoxStart GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst INT16S X2 GuiConst INT16S Y2 Input Rectangle coordinates Output None Related functions GuiLib InvertBoxStop GuiLib InvertBoxStop Purpose Stops inverted box function Full declaration void GuiLib InvertBoxStop void Input None Output None Related functions GuiLib InvertBoxStart GuiLib IsCursorFieldInUse Purpose Stops inverted box function Full declaration void GuiLib IsCursorFieldInUse GuiConst INT16S AskCursorFieldNo assSii aul Input Cursor field No Output True 1 if cursor field exists else false 0 Related functions GuiLib Cursor Down GuiLib Cursor End GuiLib Cursor Hide GuiLib Cursor Home GuiLib Cursor Select GuiLib Cursor Up GuiLib Line Purpose Draws a line Lines with any slant are handled Full declaration void GuiLib Line GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst INT16S X2 GuiConst_INT16S Y2 GuiConst INTCOLOR Color Input Coordinates Color Output None Related functions GuiLib HLine GuiLib LinePattern GuiLib VLine GuiLib LinePattern Purpose Draws a stippled line Lines with any slant are handled Full declaration void GuiLib Line GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst_INT16S X2 GuiConst INT16S Y2 GuiConst IN
17. Purpose Full declaration Input Output Selects current language Index zero is the reference language void GuiLib SetLanguage GuiConst INT16S NewLanguage Language index None GuiLib SetRedRgbColor Purpose Full declaration Sets red component from RGB color GuiConst INT32U GuiLib SetRedRgbColor GuiConst INT32U RgbColor assSiioaGul GuiConst INT8U RedColor Input 24 bit RGB color 8 bit red color component Output 24 bit RGB color Related functions Gui Gui Gui Gui Gui Lib GetBlueRgbColor Lib GetGreenRgbColor Lib GetRedRgbColor Lib SetBlueRgbColor Lib SetGreenRgbColor GuiLib ShowBitmap Purpose Displays a stored bitmap Remarks Removed if bitmap support is disabled Full declaration void GuiLib ShowBitmap GuiConst INT8U BitmapIndex GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT32S TranspColor Input Bitmap index in GuiStruct_BitmapPtrList Coordinates for upper left corner Transparent background color 1 means no transparency Output None Related functions Gui Gui Gui Lib ShowBitmapArea Lib ShowBitmapAreaAt Lib ShowBitmapAt GuiLib ShowBitmapArea Purpose Displays part of a stored bitmap Remarks Removed if bitmap support is disabled Full declaration void GuiLib ShowBitmapArea GuiConst INT8U BitmapIndex GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT16S AXI GuiConst INT16S AYI1 GuiConst
18. Purpose Used in variables that control the state of a Button item to indicate the Button should be displayed in the Up state Full declaration define GuiLib BUTTON STATE UP 0 GuiLib BUTTON STATE DOWN Purpose Used in variables that control the state of a Button item to indicate the Button should be displayed in the Down state Full declaration define GuiLib BUTTON STATE DOWN 1 assSii aul GuiLib BUTTON STATE DISABLED Purpose Used in variables that control the state of a Button item to indicate the Button should be displayed in the Disabled state Full declaration define GuiLib BUTTON STATE DISABLED 2 GuiLib CHECKBOX OFF Purpose Used in variables that control the state of a Check box item to indicate the Check box should be displayed in the Unchecked state Full declaration define GuiLib CHECKBOX OFF 0 GuiLib CHECKBOX ON Purpose Used in variables that control the state of a Check box item to indicate the Check box should be displayed in the Checked state Full declaration define GuiLib CHECKBOX ON 1 GuiLib_DECIMAL_COMMA Purpose Indicates comma character usage in variable formatting routines for decimal part Eventual thousands separator will use period character Full declaration define GuiLib DECIMAL COMMA 1 GuiLib_DECIMAL_PERIOD Purpose Indicates period character usage in variable formatting routines for decimal part Eventual thousands separator will use com
19. assSiiaGuIl Font name Size in Description pixels Unicode 9 15 17x19 Monochrome compressed Unicode font Asian characters are held within a 15x15 box causing a few characters to lose details Unicode 11 16 18x20 Monochrome standard Unicode font Asian characters are held within a 16x16 box ensuring reasonably good readability Icon 16x16 16x16 Icon font Icon 32x32 32x32 Icon font Icon 48x48 48x48 Icon font Icon 72x72 72x72 Icon font Icon 225x50 225x50 Icon font Text fonts starting with ANSI contains only ANSI characters character codes 32 255 Text fonts starting with Unicode contain both ANSI and Unicode The number after ANSI designates the height in pixels of normal Latin capital letters like e g an E For Unicode fonts there are two numbers in the font name The first number is the same as for ANSI fonts i e pixel height of capital letters while the second is the height of Asian characters Icon fonts simply state the font size in pixels after the Icon name The icon fonts shown should merely be regarded as examples icon fonts can be created in all sizes needed up to the maximum possible 255x255 pixels and named as desired 4 eaSSiIQGUI 3 5 FONT LIST WINDOW Name Size Type Cobrmode Enabled Inuse No ofchaactes io 5 SI 7 o Mc 7 bold Monochrome 7 condensed Monochrome Monochrome 11 Monochrome 11 condensed Monochrome 11 light Monochrome 114A Anti a
20. Destination path Browse Insert project file path C easy GUN Tutorial GuiFont c f Fixed code LQ View source Paths relative to project file folder are allowed Empty path means project file folder GuiFont h m Fixed cade amp View source C file extension fe Keep old files if unchanged PS Makefonts source Generates fonts and language setup code M Code generation M Structure amp Variable files Fa pem normal 4 GuiStruct c Fixed code View source miesie m GuiStructh Pf Fixed code View source m Language selection GuiVar c gm Fixed code amp View source Select language set fan languages A ii GuiVarh f Feedcode A Vien source A Language set setup GuiConst h m Fixed code R View source Uncompressed fonts rau Generates basic setup structures External memory storage C3 Make structures source EA Font Structures 7 with separate text file p Make all source e ERES Bitmaps Compressed bitmaps Requires RGB color mode with at least 8 bit color depth i GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 304 Solutions EasvilliGUi This setting overrides some of the compiler setup settings in order to easily produce code suited for PC usage To make sure C code generating is not left in this setting when intending to generate C code for the target system a small warning AY is shown HIN
21. E ES 191 Better looking menu items eese nennen tnnt nennen tnit tnt tn iter tn einen enne tnn enne 191 Playing with cursor indices eeesesssessseseeeseee eene ene nennen tnn nnne tette en atn ai eainiie aie 192 dEIEinpegcvee K 194 Mixing structures and plain graphics sese nnne nnne nennen 194 Graphical CGMS E 195 CASYCOMP COMPONENTS 196 Advanced Configuration aine ette iere rete i Wished viens hui eer adds 196 Displaying data in charts sees entente nennen nenne nnnn ener tne nntne nennen nnns 199 Buckle 200 THE Scroll Dox qiii ttententes 200 Example variants 0 eessecessecesceeeceseeeesceesscseseeseseesceesscseeeeseeecseeeeasaeacseessseesaseeeaeseeetseeesaseeeees 202 Function calls in the target system sss entente nnn nn nnne nne nn enne 205 EasviliGUi IIB Feary PUNCO S 206 16 easyGUI LIBRARY FUNCTION REFERENCE eee ee eene eene nee nnne 210 GuiConst unit e 211 elastic EE 211 GuiConst ADV FONTS ON essere nne nnne usri S rDS NEn NN inanis En ET EST SARINE 211 GuiConst_ALLOW_UPSIDEDOWN_AT_RUNTIME eeeeeeeeennnenennennennnn nnne
22. GuiConst SCROLL MODE WRAP AROUND eren nnne nnne nnns 231 GUICONSt_SCROLL_SUPPORT_ON cccccsssecsssscesssecessecsssecessecessscessaeceeecesseesesesesssesssaeseseeeess 231 GuiConst_SCROLLITEM_BAR_NONE cscccsscsssesscsssccssesseesseesseesseeseesseeseeseeseeseeseesseeesees 231 GuiConst_SCROLLITEM_BOXES_MAX cccccsscssscesscesscesscessceecesscesecessceseceseeesscesseeseeeseeeseeesees 231 GuiConst_SCROLLITEM_INDICATOR_NONE siisii nenne nnne 232 GuiConst SCROLLITEM MARKERS MAX esses eene S 232 GUICONS TEX oonan res usu oe itFEvareR 2 08a Certe F Ye gaude Sc FE e EET dona CE ia aspe a ruf CELL Toa ER CREE Fr dd Those oo die e 232 GuiConst TEXTBOX FIELDS MAX a inann nennen nnne 232 GuiConst TEXTBOX FIELDS ON esee nanna nnan AnA a a 232 GuiConst TOUCHAREA CNT 3 rera cae ker eroe acd ED ERE RU ER NUR cate ER YS URS Y CERO VERSER RSV RU aeei 232 ETIE RU Th orc EN 233 elrilgc e R Rataa 233 GullEib AWGN CENTER 5 irte aere aee per acreage atte a are oer in arie 233 GUlbib ALIGNUCEEET 5 i eer rte tefie ete m D ef PB ERE 233 GuiLib ALIGN NOCHANGSE ccccsscssscssscssscesscesecesscesscesscesscesecesecesecesscesscesscesscesscesseesseeseeenees 233 GUILIb ALIGN RIGHT e E a EE ERE REESE REP RERO REGRESO 233 emissione E 234 G llib BBPPERES erit ctcovsce vetuit A tuc eI 234 GU iLib BBP NONE icti rete Ter REST iE Tv
23. GuiLib UnicodeStrCmp Purpose Compares two U mode strcmp fun nicode strings This function is equivalent to the ANSI character ction Remarks Only accessible in Unicode character mode Full declaration GuiConst_INT16S GuiLib UnicodeStrCmp GuiConst TEXT S1 GuiConst TEXT S2 Input Unicode string references Output 0 S1 is less than S2 0 S1 and S2 are equal 20 S1 is greater than S2 Related functions GuiLib StrAnsiToUnicode GuiLib UnicodeStrCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrNCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrLen GuiLib UnicodeStrNCmp GuiLib UnicodeStrCpy Purpose Copies from one Unicode string to another This function is equivalent to the ANSI character mode strcpy function Remarks Only accessible in Unicode character mode Full declaration void GuiLib UnicodeStrCpy GuiConst T GuiConst T EXT S2 EXT S1 Input S1 Unicode source string reference S2 Unicode desti Unicode destinat Output None nation string reference ion string must have sufficient space Related functions GuiLib StrAnsiToUnicode GuiLib UnicodeStrNCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrCmp GuiLib UnicodeStrLen GuiLib UnicodeStrNCmp GuiLib UnicodeStrLen Purpose Calculates length of Unicode string This function is equivalent to the ANSI character mode strlen function Remarks Only accessible in Unicode character mode EasvilliGUIi Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiConst INT16U GuiLi
24. Prev struct Next suet m History Origin Bi ceses xpo si Y 20 E IBIS Solutions 1 Screen Basic Graphics Screen Advanced Config Screen Graph Demo 1 Screen Scroll demo 1 t Graphics tem q Text T UC 123 123 E K Parent structure T Child structure Top Pos Vates Color Misc Item Info Primary position Io SINIT si Mode absoute v absoute gt Pos table E Variable Screen Config 1 Screen Splash 1 e Screen PreparationSimp Called by Screen PreparationCom Mar value ues lelak Ed EIE Memory a Generate structure C code a Generate all C code rT E eer j Show options Select style Outlines Highlight options Backgr box Curr item Cursor field Auto redraw Spacing Graphics Proportional spacin Underline Horizontal alignment Texts sica GuiGuiGui Gui A nochange it Result Left d 3 Bitmaps Ta Icons Graphics A No of characters intext 8 Mariables FF Char sei Translation Colors i Text direction Controlled by language Result Leftto Right Font ANSI 7 A Result ANSI 7 Style No change J Underlining Result Proportional zl Touch area Zoom 4 X X 114 2 3 4 al gt IV Show coordinates at crosshair The window is rather complex as it contains a lot of functionality but breaking the window
25. The program code size varies depending on which feature are in use With all optional code disabled it is around 45KB With all features included it will be up to 100KB These sizes are by no means definitive they are only meant as a rough guideline When developing a project the CobE SIZE button in the C code generation window can be used to get a more accurate figure OPERATING SYSTEM easyGUI places only limited demands on the core of your target system It can function with systems not having an operating kernel at all up to systems employing a full blown operating system Its only demand is some kind of systematic calling based on a timer to let easyGUI process the various kinds of dynamic operations e Low level drawing EasvilliGUIi e High level structure drawing e Auto updating of fields e Cursor drawing e Blinking items e Scrolling Your target system only needs to call a single easyGUI function regularly GuiLib Refresh This routine handles all the activities mentioned above in easyGUI Calling the refresh function more often leads to a more responsive system but above a certain point there is no further advantage in increasing the frequency of calling In most systems it will suffice to call the refresh function 5 times a second i e every 200ms Do not call it more often than every 10ms and only so often on powerful systems with lots of available resources 5 times a second may sound slow but this is ofte
26. in this case linking the GraphicsFilter call back function to Graphics layer index number 0 The Graphics filter call back function has the following parameters DestAddress Address of first byte of the output layer canvas DestLineSize Size of each scan line in bytes of the output layer canvas SourceAddress Address of first byte of the input layer canvas SourceLineSize Size of each scan line in bytes of the input layer canvas Width Width of canvas in pixels Height Height of canvas in pixels FilterPars Array of 10 parameter values The very basic function of a Graphics filter call back function is to copy data from the source layer canvas to the destination layer canvas void GraphicsFilterl GuiConst INT8U DestAddress GuiConst INT16U DestLineSize GuiConst INT8U SourceAddress GuiConst INT16U SourceLineSize GuiConst INT16U Width GuiConst INT16U Height GuiConst INT32S FilterPars 10 GuiConst INT16S X Y assSiioaul Y Height while Y O0 memmove DestAddress SourceAddress GuiConst COLOR BYTE SIZE Width SourceAddress SourceLineSize DestAddress DestLineSize Y This example is of course not of much use but it can be used as a skeleton for a more practical filter function The example correctly traverses through all pixels in the Graphics layer C If the Output layer does not fully cover the area of the Input layer it is considered an error and
27. look carefully the differences are there The boxes overlap because the texts have been placed rather close to each other In fact without transparent writing the g at the end of the middle text is partly cut off by the last text Highlight options panel contains the following settings e Background box Draws grey boxes around all background boxes showing their extends assSii aul MAIN MENU Single Samples Preparation MAIN MENU Single Samples Preparation Sample Holder Preparation Manual preparation Configuration Sample Holder Preparation Manual preparation Configuration Off On Current item The current item or items is highlighted by a yellow box Maybe difficult to see in the example it is the top of the three middle texts FLASH PROGRAMMING Uer MER flash programming Progress FLASH PROGRAMMING power during flash programming Progress Off On Cursor field Every cursor field is highlighted by a purple box and shading and a little number at the top left indicating the cursor number MAIN MENU Single Samples Preparation Sample Holder Preparation Manual preparation Configuration MAIN MENU eT Ape oie paran ric e wy 7 e NANA AS LT spe Holder Preparation Off On Auto redraw Every auto redraw item is highlighted by a green box and shading SINGLE SAMPLES Speed 150 rpm Time 29m S95 ForceDir 30H
28. two are shown one with a single pixel in border thickness and one with two pixels Filled rectangle Draws a filled box Text Draws a text several different text fonts are shown e Icon Draws items just like texts several different icons are shown e Formatter A non visible item that instructs following variables on how to format them A formatter is valid until another formatter is stated so one formatter can be common to a series of variables EasvilliGUIi e Variable Draws a string or numerical value using the format set by the last formatter Besides these item types there are many more which are not shown A complete list is covered in the Structure window section of this manual Most of the additional items are covered in this Tutorial in the following sections VIEWING THE STRUCTURE To the left of the display are a number of settings controlling how the display is viewed in easyGUI Let s investigate a few of them e Atthe bottom is a zoom setting enabling enlargement of the display e Next is a Show display border setting that determines if the active drawing area of the display shall be indicated The active area is all addressable pixels while the inactive area is the border around the edges of the display The size and color of this border area can be set in the Parameters window The border area has no effect on anything drawn by easyGUI it is shown purely to make the display representation look more real
29. 1 23 German Left to Right From project setup 1 23 French Left to Right From project setup 1 23 Spanish Left to Right From project setup 1 23 Chinese Left to Right From project setup 1 23 Japanese Left to Right From project setup 1 23 Move down Individual languages can be added removed edited and moved up and down the list The topmost language index zero is the primary language which is automatically active at target code startup time another language can be selected at run time before anything is written on the display The TEXT DIRECTION column selects the writing direction for the language left to right or right to left The DECIMAL POINT CHARACTER column selects the decimal point character for the language period comma or the same selection as in project setup see Parameters window Operation tab page A project must always contain at least one language Two buttons controls export import operations for use with the easyTRANS utility e Export Exports all text with associated fonts and structure information to a special file with egt filename extension This file is used by the translate utility easyTRANS used by exterior persons assigned to the task of translation This utility can accomplish the same as the translation part of the Language window in easyGUI e Import Imports data back from easyTRANS Texts that were changed externally in easyTRANS are marked with a lit
30. 2 tinere permets ente teen eva edendo ted rato Fee Eee ek elec E EATER ai 173 Clearing the screen ou ee essessecesseceseessseseeessecenseanseseeensseesussanseasescsecensseasnesenenseeessseasnesensesesenseeetseeans 173 Finding this and that item 0 ceseescsessesseeeseseesceeeseseseeseeessseeseseeecsseessceesaesesecsesesaceesacseserseeesaees 173 eiua 173 A centered relative text ette pred ere i ber pete i ture 175 PS s nice texts etenim ente ah iieri ien i dei ie his iate ed 175 Big texts small texts 5 ien rete rra rete FRE E e IR EUER E XU eet xor ONTE eds 178 Showing variables eterne re dee en deae tte Rene stia Pra ENE Ie Free nee ch pea ra dee en ONNEA 178 e nuiliiqlmeee o 179 Str ct re Noll e a 180 Don t forget the coordinates eeees sisse sieeeesese seen tn teinte tnn tetra tetn eterne nenne 181 Using an indexed structure eesessseeseesiee seen entente tet tn atn en atenta tetra testate tn nenne 182 Utilizing a disappearing indexed structure sessi enne nnne enne nnne nnns 184 AIT On Off TEXT aia rei pe menie pepe Hp err ep ern Rn 185 Backgrounds are important eene tnt nnt tnter tnt nn inneren etnies innen 186 The fine art of cursor fields eene tne nn tnn tn ennt tn tinte tinis tinte tren sint tn enne 188 Main Menu Structure
31. 4 Target system display Shows the end result for the currently selected structure The panels are explained in the following chapters STRUCTURE MANAGEMENT PANEL Inside this panel are a number of various commands controlling complete structures At the top is a drop down box containing all of the structures in the project Right next to it is an index number box showing the index number of the currently selected structure The drop down box and index number box are not editable Below these boxes are four buttons allowing quick selection of previous and following structures both based on name and index number At the left are a number of buttons for managing structures Ig IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 97 Solutions assSiiaGul CLASSES Shows a window for managing structure classes NEW Creates a new structure with no items in it Copy Copies the current structure The new structure can be given a new name and index number or just a new index number making it a sister to the current structure DELETE Deletes the current structure RENAME Renames the current structure either by just changing the Index number or by altering the name or both C Copies the structure name to the Windows clipboard with the text GuiStruct added before it This ensures easy pasting into target system C code CLIPBOARD SETUP Determines how structures exported to the clipboard shall look Border thickness white space above
32. EasvilliGUIi GuiLib_GrayScaleToPixelColor Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Translates from 0 255 gray scale value to display controller color setup GuiConst INTCOLOR GuiLib GrayScaleToPixelColor GuiConst INT8U GrayValue Gray scale value 0 255 Encoded pixel color value GuiLib PixelColorToGrayScale GuiLib GrayScaleToRgbColor Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiLib HLine Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiLib Init Purpose Full declaration Translates from 0 255 gray scale value to RGB color GuiConst INT32U GuiLib GrayScaleToRgbColor GuiConst INT8U GrayValue Gray scale value 0 255 RGB color value 32 bit 24 bits used low byte Red middle byte Green high byte Blue GuiLib RgbColorToGrayScale Draws a horizontal line void GuiLib HLine GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT168 X2 GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INTCOLOR Color Coordinates Color None Gui ib iine GuiLib LinePattern GuiLib VLine Initializes the easyGUI modules Shall only be called once at application startup void GuiLib Init void assSii aul Input None Output None GuiLib InvertBox Purpose Inverts a block Full declaration void GuiLib InvertBox GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst INT16S X2 GuiConst INT16S Y2 Input Coordinates
33. Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin eseeeseseeeseeeeeeee nennen trennen tnnt nntne tnter nne nn tnn 266 GuiLib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin esee eee tnter tnnt netten nnne eterni nnne nnn 266 GUILIb Graph Redraw uie trente tien x reise pee e P AY ripe OE EES 267 GuiLib Graph RemovebDataSet eese eee neee nnne ennt tnt tn innere inita tinte ernst tn enne 267 GuiLib Graph ResetXAxisOrigin eese eene teen ennt nennen tette nne tn nnne 268 GuiLib Graph ResetYAxisOrigin esee enint netten tnter tnt tn tnnt nn tnn tn senten 268 GUILIb_Graph_ShHOwDataSet cccscscecsssseeseecceecseeseeeeeessecsecseeeeeecsecseeaeeeseesecseeeeeessesseeaeeeseees 269 GuUiLib_GraPph_SetXAXiSRANZEC ccsccccecssssceseecceecseeseeeeeeseesseeseeeeeessesaeeeceeeeesaesseeeseesesaeeaeeeseres 269 GuiLib Graph SetYAxisRange sse eene ennt tette ennt tn tnnt netten sentent tn senten 270 Guibib Graph ShowXAXIS ierit tret erbe i eei e rre o rn 270 GuiLib Graph ShowYAxis esses eene nennen nne nn ennt tnt tn tnnt enitn innen innen innen enn 271 GuiLib GraphicsFilter Init eene nennen enne nn nnne nnne nete en innen nnn 271 GuiLib GrayScaleToPixelColor mni aaan a a en innen enn 272 GuiLib GrayScaleToRgbColor eese eesie ese tn eate enata entren anni n eterne 272 GM LBM E eret ter ETE a E TEES TUETUNTe PER UTC TU PERSEUETWO ETE PERI EORR Te EIER ed 272 CN
34. Gu G G G GuiLib_Graph_Close Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Closes a graph so that no further actions can be accomplished with it Memory assigned to datasets must be freed independently Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph Close GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 Related functions GuiLib Graph Redraw GuiLib Graph DrawAxes Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Redraws the graph including background and axes but excluding data sets Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph DrawAxes GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 GuiLib Graph HideXAxis GuiLib Graph HideYAxis GuiLib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin GuiLib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin GuiLib Graph Redraw GuiLib Graph SetXAxisRange assSiioaul GuiLib Graph SetYAxisRange GuiLib Graph ShowXAxis GuiLib Graph ShowYAxis GuiLib Graph DrawDataPoint Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Draws a single data point in a data set Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph DrawDataPoint GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U DataSetIndex GuiConst INT16U DataIndex GraphIndex Index of graph
35. GuiLib SetBlueRgbColor Purpose Sets blue component from RGB color Full declaration GuiConst INT32U GuiLib SetBlueRgbColor GuiConst INT32U RgbColor GuiConst INT8U BlueColor Input 24 bit RGB color 8 bit blue color component Output 24 bit RGB color Related functions GuiLib GetBlueRgbColor GuiLib GetGreenRgbColor GuiLib GetRedRgbColor GuiLib SetGreenRgbColor GuiLib SetRedRgbColor GuiLib SetClipping Purpose Sets clipping Drawing can be limited to a rectangular portion of the screen this routine sets the clipping limits expressed as two corner coordinates Eventual assSii aul Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions drawing falling outside the clipping rectangle is ignored Default for the clipping rectangle is the entire screen Removed if clipping support is disabled void GuiLib SetClipping GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst_INT16S X2 GuiConst INT16S Y2 Rectangle coordinates None GuiLib ResetClipping GuiLib SetGreenRgbColor Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Sets green component from RGB color GuiConst INT32U GuiLib SetGreenRgbColor GuiConst INT32U RgbColor GuiConst INT8U GreenColor 24 bit RGB color 8 bit green color component 24 bit RGB color GuiLib GetBlueRgbColor GuiLib GetGreenRgbColor GuiLib GetRedRgbColor GuiLib SetBlueRgbColor GuiLib SetRedRgbColor GuiLib SetLanguage
36. Mater OFF Doser Ha Level elio Speed 150 rpm Time 29m S95 Force Dir SON SR Mater OFF Doser Ma Level elio Off On Translation Every text selected for translation is highlighted by a brown box and shading SINGLE SAMPLES Speed 150 rpm Time 29m S95 Force Dir BON Mater OFF Doser No tLevel elio Off Touch area Every touch area is highlighted by an amber box and shading assSii Gui Off e Blink field Every item marked as a blinking item is highlighted by a cyan box and shading Off SINGLE SAMPLES Speed 150 rpm Time 99m 59s Force Dir BON Water FF Doser Ma Level 21e MESSAGE Everything is functioning J Ok On On SINGLE SAMPLES Speed 150 rpm Time 99m 59s ForceDir SON Water FF Doser Ma Level 2e is functioning J Ok Test tab presents itself a number of the display testing parameters This tab is subdivided into Test cursor fields and Test scroll box e Test cursor fields One or all cursor fields can be shown inversed as on the target system with the help of the following buttons MAIN MENU Single Samples Preparation Sample Holder Preparation Manual preparation Configuration None No cursor field is selected Prev Next buttons allow moving up and down the list selecting the required field MAIN MENU Single Samples Preparation Sample Holder Preparation Manual preparation Configuration Ex
37. NeasyGUI Tutorial Tutorial gu Basics Display controller Color Simulated display Compiler Operation Display controller c C Vertical byt eco BitO at left C Bit at right ARTSA ATS Number of color planes 1 Display oriented normally Display rotated 90 right Display oriented upside down C Display rotated 90 left G i Mirror horizontally Mirror vertically Allow upside down at runtime Works only for monochrome displays Little Endian LS Display controller endian mode E Big Endian Number of display controllers horizontally fi Number of display controllers vertically fi GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS Solutions 4 eaSSiiIGUI 3 Enter proper values in the various parameter fields The parameters are explained in detail in the Project parameters chapter Observe that there are multiple tabs with parameters After setting the values go into C code generation m Setup M Font files Destination path Browse Insert project file path 5 5 CAeasyGUI Tutorial GuiFont c Bf Fiedcode View source Paths relative to project file folder are allowed Empty path means project file folder GuiFont h gm Fixed code amp View source C file extension fe Keep old files if unchanged p Make fonts source Generates fonts and language setup code M Code generation M Structure amp Variable fil
38. Solutions So eaSSilIiQGUI 3 g Top Pos Color Comp Misc Primary position iri 3r Made Pos table FlashProgress1 w FlashProgress v Variable x ve I caf leef Menag zi zi Save Transf Transf X1 pos 0 Y1 pos 0 Table 116 Table 98 Variable Variable Mem load Mer load 116 Sum 98 Sum Alignment Alignment z X1 result 116 Y1 result 38 Secondary position Variable nr I Var value cs E dit dl es E dit dl Memory jf Transf Transf X2 pos 0 2 pos 0 Table 155 Table 108 Variable ariable Mem load her load 55 09 Sum 1 Sum 1 Alignment Alignment X2 result 155 Y2resut 108 Horizontal alignment necem lt Xt 116 X2 155 When the structure has been shown on the target system the positions can be reused in the code because they are exported as constants in the GuiVar n file The graphical primitives in the GuiLib unit can then be used for manual drawing i e pixels lines boxes etc The advantage of the above procedure is that the position and size of the box can be adjusted in easyGUI by tweaking the values in the position tables without touching anything on the target system and it will still work GRAPHICAL ITEMS Some graphics have already been touched in this tutorial but to see all the graphical drawing capabilities of easyGUI it is us
39. Variat Var v It indicates that a cursor field has been defined for this item cursor field No zero The definition is done in the Misc part of the property panel at the bottom EasyiliGUi Miscellaneous M Cursorfield No 0 Renumber Auto redraw field Variable for updates on changes Ic No variable Type none Variable not used updates on changes not activated in Parameters window Along with the checkbox for cursor field activation is an edit box where the cursor field index number can be selected Cursor fields are normally indexed from zero and upwards but this is not a requirement Negative field indices however are not allowed In the easyGUI library is a number of routines for handling cursor fields which can be called from the embedded code when the user does something that shall change the active cursor field normally a keyboard event of some kind easyGUI then takes care of drawing the new active cursor field using inverted colors and drawing the previous cursor field in normal appearance This can be tested in easyGUI by using the Show cursor field box at the lower left corner select the Test tab page Meter mit CONFIGURATION Allcursors C In this struct Test scroll box Language English None z Force Reduction OFF Display contrast 25 0 EE Try clicking the NEXT button and see two things 1 l cee CONFIGURATION Allcursors In this str
40. and to show if items drawn on the display collides with the border in an unpleasant way The Item demo 1 shows the difference clearly Show display border on Fixed spacing Graphics IN Proportional spacing Underline G Texts 4 ge Bitmaps cons Variables 1 56 Coors AN ue Show display border off Graphics i Lied oL dL HR Underline Texts Wy poe Bitmaps Icons Variables 1 56 e Next setting is Show undrawn area which indicates with a special color the areas of the display not touched by the current structure This is handy when checking where backgrounds are drawn This setting should in most instances be left on Again the Item demo 1 shows the difference Show undrawn area on assSii auti Graphics al scs ae a Me Texts T L Icons Variables E 56 Show undrawn area off Graphics eio iar iu TR Underline Texts Wy ge Bitmaps Icons Variables 1 56 Observe that the white rectangle in the Colors line is only visible when Show undrawn area is on i e itis then possible to view where this structure actually draws something The other settings will be explained later when a relevant situation arises Another handy feature is the crosshair which is shown when the mouse enters the display area Besides the crosshair itself the position in pixels is shown The coordinate system has 0 0 at the
41. inserts PROGMEM qualifiers where needed in the easyGUI library e Zilog compiler operation Use this setting if a Zilog compiler is used e Renesas far Use this setting if a Renesas compiler is used and far memory calls are employed Buffer sizes panel e Max text string length Determines buffer size in the target code for text writing Enlarging the buffer permits longer text to be handled by easyGUI but consumes more memory e Max numerical variables string length Determines buffer size in the target code for writing variables on screen Enlarging the buffer permits longer variables text representation to be handled by easyGUI but consumes more memory e Max No of paragraph lines Determines how many text lines a Paragraph item multi line text item can handle A higher number consumes more memory e Maximum number of concurrent dynamic items Cursor items and auto redraw items can change their appearance upon a call to GuiLib Refresh These items are considered to by dynamic and information about their state must be maintained in an intermediate buffer in the easyGUI library This value determines how many dynamic items can be maintained on any particular screen A higher number consumes more memory e Max No of concurrent background bitmaps Determines how many background bitmaps easyGUI can handle simultaneously A higher number consumes slightly more memory So eaSSiIiQGUI OPERATION
42. structure names a part of the individual structure name can be ignored Several texts can be entered separated by semicolons lanore these texts after structure name prefix pee tase es fer sce namen 0 Seperate texts with semicolons Only include texts marked for translation Filters away all texts not marked for translation String format Selects between exporting strings as ordinary string values or as arrays of character codes Above the text columns are two settings boxes and a number of buttons TEXTS IN LISTS Switches between showing all texts or only show texts selected for translation Translation is elected for each text individually in the structure editor Texts not marked for translation are omitted in the right text column and replaced by a green box stating No translation FONTS IN DISPLAYS Switches between only allowing display of characters currently active in the project or allowing display of all characters Character and font selection is handled in the Font editor window SEARCH A search window is shown allowing search parameters to be set A text search can be for either one or both text columns and can be limited to case sensitive search and search for words FIND NEXT A previously started search operation is repeated showing the next occurrence of the search text if found assSii aul e COPY FROM LEFT TO RIGHT This action can be used to reset the translation When pressed easyGUI
43. 228 GuiConst REL COORD ORIGO INUS Essien siiani enne enne 229 GuiConst REMOTE BITMAP BUF SIZE esee nennen nennen 229 GuiConst REMOTE BITMAP DATA sesseeseeeeeeenennennenne nennen ener nnne nn enne enne iaaa 229 GuiConst REMOTE DATA irent trentaine te etnia ede inui rk bo devo edd obe oreet ebbe Era Fato 229 GuiConst REMOTE DATA BUF SIZE nennen nennen netten tna treo tn tenen atteint 229 GuiCorist REMOTE FONT BUF SIZE eicere eren uo ttn tnus nt ponte n tuetur 229 auiConst REMOTE FONT DATA ient brine AEE E ree PEE ERU 229 auiConst REMOTE ID 2 eee eee neo rectae e eet nitet e trn in eene eene eines 230 GuiConst REMOTE STRUCT BUF SIZE ennennnn 230 GuiConst REMOTE STRUCT DATA crossers reir eer n eR tinet rente eene eto verde 230 GuiConst REMOTE TEXT BUE SIZE eei itte rtr entere rae aeta rer ente nep nan 230 GuiConst REMOTE TEXT DATA conuentui eeu eene aene redonner enean na epe nena 230 GUIGONST ROTATED 9 DEGREE erret tenere eter enter enint en ren oiia NaS 230 GuiConst ROTATED 90DEGREE LEFT eese nennen nnnennenn enne ener enne 230 GuiConst ROTATED 90DEGREE RIGHT eese eee tnn tnnt tn E NN AVi 231 GuiConst ROTATED OFF hit iet enter eerie rir e tetro eie E sitet 231 GuiConst ROTATED UPSIDEDONWN ceeeene eene nnt tnt tnno nnt tnttnttnsa tatis ttn stn atteint 231 auiConst SCROLL MODE STOP TOP darraren eter tti reti Peer NON NNAS 231 EasvilliGUIi
44. COO REL Purpose Indicates that the coordinate system origin is moved from the usual upper left corner of the display to the upper left corner of the general active area Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA COO REL GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA X1 Purpose X1 coordinate of the general active area Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA X1 XXX GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA Y1 Purpose Y1 coordinate of the general active area Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA Y1 XXX GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA X2 Purpose X2 coordinate of the general active area Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA X2 XXX GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA Y2 Purpose Y2 coordinate of the general active area Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA Y2 XXX GuiConst DISPLAY BIG ENDIAN Purpose Uses Big Endian byte ordering most significant byte in first address for display memory Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY BIG ENDIAN GuiConst DISPLAY BYTES Purpose No of bytes for a full display image assSiiaul Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY BYTES XXX GuiConst DISPLAY HEIGHT Purpose Virtual height of display in pixels This is the height seen by easyGUI when handling the display Differs from the physical display height only if the display is rotated 90 Full declarati
45. Defaultis unsigned short 24 bit signed type The 24 bit variables are only used for compilers using a 24 bit addressing space e g 8086 family processors For other compilers the two 24 bit fields should just be left empty Default is empty 24 bit unsigned type Default is empty 32 bit signed type Default is signed long 32 bit unsigned type Default is unsigned long Pointer size Can be set to 16 bit 24 bit and 32 bit pointers Two additional choices are void and void const Most compilers work best with the void setting It is however very important that this setting is correct Constant declarations panel The prefix strings are inserted into the GuiStruct and GuiFont c amp h files The default values are Unsigned byte const GuiConst INT8U Unsigned integer const GuiConst INT16U Generic pointer const GuiConst PTR Font structure const GuiLib FontRec Font structure pointer const GuiLib FontRecPtr Font pointer lists Reasons for changing them can be e g special code for Flash RAM systems The last setting is empty by default but by setting it to const when using Keil compilers will force the placement of the font pointer list into Flash instead of RAM memory All the settings can be reset to the default by pressing the DEFAULT COMPILER PREFIXES button Special compiler settings panel Normal ANSI compiler This is the default setting which shall be used for X3 159 1989 Standard C complian
46. Ese F SN NM SN EN HN 20mm ENA D 1 LEITET TI LIE ET E LLL LIT LIT BEST LI EET TJ PL DETAN C N LELTETLEG LILI PLT Eee LTT 1 4 eaSSiiIQGUI 3 creating an almost perfect bitmap e 8 bpp RGB 256 colors This bitmap was created using 3 bits for red 3 bits for green and 2 bits for blue intensity The actual assignment of bits depends on the display controller e 12 bpp RGB 4096 colors This bitmap was created using 4 bits for each of the RGB color intensities e 15 bpp RGB 32K colors This bitmap was created using 5 bits for each of the RGB color intensities pg GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 63 Solutions 0 aSSil aUi e 16 bpp RGB 64K colors This bitmap was created using 5 bits for red 6 bits for green and 5 bits for blue intensity Generally the green color should receive the most bits if an even split between the three primary colors is not possible because the human eye is most sensitive to yellow and green colors One bit extra for green compared with the 15 bpp example above might not seem like much but it is visible in the example at the upper right corner where the 16 bpp bitmap produces a more smooth transition than the 15 bpp bitmap e 18 bpp RGB 256K colors This bitmap was created using 6 bits for each of the RGB color intensities The quality is now really good but can still be improved e 2
47. GuiConst DISPLAY BlG ENDIAN 5 tree teure teneor idinon ani titer iN 220 GUICONSE DISPLAY BYTES rn eno eae rout rit earn riu rn tarnen rte tua paa n ruote nta 220 G iCornist DISPLAY HEIGHT niano tnter tutior begun rennen nets su einen 221 GUICONSE DISPLAY HEIGHT EIN sieur ette eere tete teret ineo EENS 221 GUICONST DISPLAY LITTLE ENDDAN s eter their ertt nre retro aE rire trea 221 GUICONSE DISPLAY WID TET coercet e eerte e eoa eer NER eee er eae ete e Eh rri Tete 221 GuiConstoDISPIEAY WID TEL EINMS e cve ege ent tee eoe Deren ee er EE Eee eere De te teo TERES ETE 221 GUICONSE_ FLOAT SUPPORT OIN cocer eere teneo eaten teen iaaii 221 GUIGONST FONT UNCOMIDBRESSED 5 iter tnmen tr enirn rentre 222 GuiConst GRAPH AXES MAX eese eene tnnt tne tnt th stunt ie iini th setatis iint tts tinens sens aas 222 GuiConst GRAPH DATASETS MAX csssseseeeeeenenenennen nennen nennen nnne nne nnne nennen nnn 222 GUICONST GRAPEL MAX nri ien tote ti eee tee i ies ie berti ri etse ees 222 GuiConst GRAPHICS FILTER MAX essere neenon tnt tnnonnt tnt tn tits tn eint inasai 222 uiConst GRAPHICS LAYER BUF BYTES teeth rtr tret rt retten enu 222 GuiConst GRAPHICS LAYER MAX iieri tere rtr eterne eno retento hone rae n eee a 222 GuiConst ICC COMPILER rettet tertie tti orare eee Phe Fas ea oae ratae sea Pan Rena 222 GuiConst IINTBS rere tto T ER RERO E TEE DENT EXIST HEUTE ee NT EDEN Sese Ivo 223 GUICONSE INTESU iiron aene en n
48. IN 297 CI TPTETS ATTI LR 297 FUNCUONS TE ery 297 GuibDisplay Init erre rre e ee erbe a i eti ie rire P en 297 GuiDisplay Lock nennen nennen nenne nnnm tenete tn tne tn nne tenete tnter nne nennen 298 GuiDisplay Refresh ais irre TERRIER e ER REIHE PNEU AS ER EAR NENONEN 298 GUIDIS Play Unlock DRUSI SAI EIER ERU 298 CASY TRANS fr 299 Installati n gm Y 299 dahidhlleeee e P C e 299 DORT M 300 Working on the project while translating eeeeeeee ee eeeee esee ee eee ee eene enne eee nnne enn 301 easySIM PC SIMULATION TOOLSET ee eeee eene en eene nennen nennen nennen nnn 302 d ilpphIiige 302 MITMILCLIAAIJ IM ssie 302 COM PHAtiON meme n 304 PALIN GS se c 305 Bibl rec REO 305 FURTHER READING AND SUPPORT e eese eese ee eene eene eene tenete sten eeu 306 CASYGUI SUPPOSE e 306 Language support appendices eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeee ee eee eene nene en nnne nn entente sees nn nest nennen 306 EasviliGUi 1 PREFACE Welcome to the easyGUI
49. INT32S MinValue GuiConst INT32S MaxValue GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based AxisIndex Index of Y axis in the graph index is zero based MinValue Minimum limit of Y axis range MaxValue Maximum limit of Y axis range Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 Lib Graph DrawAxes Lib Graph HideXAxis Lib Graph HideYAxis Lib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin Lib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin Lib Graph SetXAxisRange Lib Graph ShowXAxis Lib Graph ShowYAxis QQANAAA A H H H H H H p bp GuiLib_Graph_ShowXAxis Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Marks an X axis as visible Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph ShowXAxis GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U AxisIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based AxisIndex Index of X axis in the graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 Lib Graph DrawAxes Lib Graph HideXAxis Lib Graph HideYAxis Lib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin Lib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin Lib Graph SetXAxisRange Lib Graph SetYAxisRange Lib Graph ShowYAxis He H H H H H H H AQNAQNQQAQAQAQQ assSii aul GuiLib Graph ShowYAxis Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Marks a Y axis as visible Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph it
50. Indexed structure call and Variable items to be controlled conditionally by a variable A suitable variable is selected and the Auto redraw item will then be updated each time the GuiLib Refresh function detects that the variable value has changed The selection of Auto redraw method should be determined based on the resource constraints of the target system and the type of items being redrawn e Continuous updating requires more CPU resource as even items that do not need to be redrawn are redrawn edSSiliQUI e Update on changes requires more memory as the value of each variable needs to be stored with each item that is marked for auto redraw The memory required can be calculated by multiplying the Max text string length by the Max No of auto redraw items These parameters are set in the Parameters window Compiler tab IN IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 113 Solutions EasvilliGUIi easyCOMP item panels The following panels are only seen with the items included with the OK add on module cm yt aSScoMpP Check box panel Item types Check box OK cm y aSScoMpP Defines the parameters of a Check box item This panel determines the appearance of the check box itself and the appearance of the check mark that will inidicate the the item is selected The panel contains the following items Check box style Determi
51. Lib VA Lib VA Lib VA Lib VA Lib VA Lib VA R UNSIGN EJ R SIGNE R UNSIGN R FLOAT R UNSIGNI R BOOL boolean variable 8 bit signed unsigned zero value as false all else is regarded as true ED CHAR 8 bit unsigned variable D CHAR 8 bit unsigned variable ED INT 16 bit unsigned variable ED INT 16 bit unsigned variable R UNSIGNI R UNSIGNI h D LONG 32 bit unsigned variable ONG 32 bit unsigned variable float variable R DOUBLE double variable R STRING string variable 8 bits per character in ANSI mode 16 bits per character in Unicode mode Variable format Can be Gui ud i i Lib FO Lib FO Lib FO Lib FO seconds style RMAT D RMAT Eri RMAT HI RMAT TIMI GI EC decimal output format XP exponential output format EX hexadecimal output format MMSS time output format MM SS minutes and GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 24 24 hour time output format HH MM hours and minutes style GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 24 24 hour time output format HH MM SS hours minutes and seconds style GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 12 ampm 12 hour am pm time output format HH MM hours and minutes style GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 12 ampm 12 hour am pm time output format HH MM SS hours minutes and seconds style GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 12 AMPM 12 hour AM PM time output format HH MM hours and minutes
52. Monochrome sans serif font Used as a normal font for most text on systems with moderate display resolution The character sizes are approximately the same as in old displays run in character mode with 8x8 matrices allowing more text horizontally if proportional writing is selected and a little less vertically because the characters occupy more than 8 pixels in height ANSI 7 bold 7x11 Monochrome sans serif bold font Same height as ANSI 7 but with bolder characters ANSI 7 condensed 5x11 Monochrome sans serif compressed font Same height as ANSI 7 but with reduced character width Should only be used if forced to do so because it is a little hard to read and does not have an appealing look ANSI 9 9x14 Monochrome sans serif font ANSI 11 9x17 Monochrome sans serif font ANSI 11 condensed 8x17 Monochrome sans serif condensed font Same height as ANSI 11 but narrower ANSI 11 light 6x17 Monochrome sans serif compressed font Same height as ANSI 11 but much narrower ANSI 11AA 18x20 Anti aliased sans serif font ANSI 13 11x21 Monochrome sans serif font ANSI 17AA 24x29 Anti aliased sans serif font ANSI 19 17x31 Monochrome sans serif font ANSI 23AA 28x37 Anti aliased sans serif font ANSI 24 19x39 Monochrome sans serif font ANSI 30 21x47 Monochrome sans serif font Unicode 7 14 bold 15x16 Monochrome compressed Unicode font Asian characters are held within a 14x14 box causing some characters to lose details
53. Open Save Save as and select the Item demo 1 structure using the drop down arrow in the top left combobox EasyiliGUi Bmctuename Index No terms Screen Main j New No jitem type c pe P Cony Filed rectangle IBIS Solutions tose Item demo _ltem type Screen Advanced Config ae ae Screen Basic Graphics HI s py Screen Config HIE a Screen Flash 1 aa Screen Graph Demo H1 Screen Main o e Screen Main 1 heat Screen PreparationComplex H Screen PreparationSimple H code Screen Scroll demo HM Screen Splash M e m i MAIN MENU Popup CleaningBox 0 The structure can now be viewed in the display panel Graphics IN U Ol Ales i ani ae Underline e Texts wicucubuGuiGuiGui G uia L A Bitmaps Icons Variables 1 56 f H E Emm lt a Observe that the bitmap with girl and bird is by external reference and the corresponding Birdy nam nam bmp file must be present along with the Tutorial gui file but in a standard installation this should be the case This structure is used in the following sections and is just a collection of various items made for demonstration purposes It demonstrates the following item types Pixel Draw a single pixel e Line Draws a line Three different types of lines are shown horizontal vertical and angled Framed rectangle Draws a rectangle frame
54. SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO No Item 1 1 1 Pricej 1 Scroll line item 12 34 amp Scroll line item 12 34 The icon is the letter S from font ANSI 4 Not very pretty surely a better icon can be found Changing to Block fixed size looks like Iq IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 203 Solutions 4 eaSSilIQGUI 3 SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO INo Item i 1 Scroll line item 1 Soroll line item 12 34 amp Scroll line item 12 34 The size of the vertical scroll bar marker now reflects the ratio between visible and total scroll lines 7 20 in this case Raising the total number of scroll lines changes the vertical scroll bar marker size 50 lines gives SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO No Item Price Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item 500 lines No Item 1 1 1 Price Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item There is a minimum size of the scroll bar marker to ensure it doesn t disappear all together at high line counts The scroll indicator can also be turned off pg ejiBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 204 Solutions assSii aul SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item
55. START Purpose First bit with green color information in palette RGB entries Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING G START XXX GuiConst COLORCODING MASK Purpose Bit mask for all bits in color values Indicated in hexadecimal value Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING MASK XXX GuiConst_COLORCODING_R_MASK Purpose Bit mask for red bits in color values Indicated in hexadecimal value Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING R MASK XXX GuiConst COLORCODING R MAX Purpose Defines the highest allowed red color index 1 255 Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING R MAX XXX GuiConst COLORCODING R SIZE Purpose No of bits with red color information in palette RGB entries Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING R SIZE XXX GuiConst COLORCODING R START Purpose First bit with red color information in palette RGB entries Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING R START XXX GuiConst CONTROLLER COUNT HORZ Purpose Indicates number of display controllers used horizontally usually 1 Full declaration define GuiConst CONTROLLER COUNT HORZ XXX EasviliGUIi GuiConst_CONTROLLER_COUNT_VERT Purpose Indicates number of display controllers used vertically usually 1 Full declaration define GuiConst CONTROLLER COUNT VERT XXX GuiConst_CURSOR_FIELDS_OFF Purpose No cursor fields in use If no items are marked as cursor field this directive will not be present eit
56. Solutions ApS 34 Solutions edSSiliQUI A along the vertical axis The table shows which fonts contain which characters Observe that the function might take some time to show as all fonts must be scanned completely IN IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 35 Solutions So eaSSiliIQGUI 3 6 FONT EDITING WINDOW A single font is edited in this window Ef changetort FBG H s IE Bes mem ete ae ANSI 7 0x0041 Jaya Width 5 Height 7 Size 6 x 11 Color mode Monochrome Type Text Setup Selection Exiting Import M Selection mode JT All characters in font IV Characters in use in structures IV Numerical characters Manually selected characters JIS X 0208 characters shiftJIS characters Joyo Arabic characters M Manual selection Current character Allc cters Selec eselec From list 7 Edit list M Character view filter All characters no state indicators All characters with state indicators Currently selected characters All characters in use in structures Manually selected characters M Statistics 287 characters in the font 93 characters in use in structures No characters manually selected 101 characters currently selected 287 characters shown by filter e Structures using this font There is a fair amount of controls which will be explained in detai
57. The logo is represented as the A character in the font Icon5 so Icon5 is selected as font and A as text Press the CHARACTER SET button just below the text field to view the icons in font Icon5 There is only one More t han one character can of course be entered in the text field but for logos it is almost never practical to enter more than one character IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 174 Solutions EasviliGUIi A centered relative text Items 3 4 and 5 are simple texts They are placed centered horizontally just like the logo so it would seen natural to use the same technique i e absolute X coordinate 63 and centered alignment But here another very useful feature of coordinate technique can be demonstrated Relative coordinates Both X and Y coordinates are selected as relative for the three text items with X set to zero keeping all items centered and Y set to various values to ensure a nice separation between texts J aphical Top Pos Var text Color Misc Embed 7 Primary position S aking d sion X1 0 1 10 Mode Relative Relative rsionNg Pos table v l X Variable EJ Var value Load Save f f Transf 119 Transf 62 Mem load Sum if Alignment YA result 72 X2 196 Y2 74 Result Center i Text Graphical User Interface Tool The effect of this is that the icon now determines X and Y coor
58. Up Moves the current scroll line marker one up i e swaps it with the preceding marker Is not allowed for scroll line marker 0 Down Moves the current scroll line marker one down i e swaps it with the succeeding marker Is not allowed for the last scroll line marker For each scroll line marker there are the following parameters Scroll line marker structure Defines the layout of a single scroll line when selected by a scroll line marker Use relative coordinates for the scroll line marker structure just as for the scroll line structure see above Scroll line marker block background color As an alternative to a structure call a simple color can be specified which is used for a filled background rectangle As the structure call and background color are mutually exclusive the background color parameter is only enabled if No call is selected in the structure call box Scroll line marker drawing order Selects between three modes of drawing deciding the drawing order of the scroll line and its scroll line marker structure or block as decided above Scroll line structure first The scroll line structure designated in the Basic parameters section above is rendered before the marker structure block Marker structure block first The marker structure block is rendered before the scroll line structure designated in the Basic parameters section above assSii aul Only scroll line structure Only the scroll l
59. a purely graphical way this can be done without penalties except for a very small speed penalty when selecting orientations differing from normal Before deciding to use a display in abnormal orientations make sure that viewing of the display is satisfactory at the desired orientation LCD displays can have very different contrasts when viewed from different directions This can sometimes be used to advantage by rotating the display 180 if the display is view from a direction not anticipated by the manufacturer Conversely this may prohibit e g 90 rotation of the display Mirroring The display contents may be mirrored both horizontally and vertically Selecting both mirroring options results in an upside down image Allow upside down at run time This feature permits turning the complete display image up side down at run time There is some speed penalty when enabling the feature as font data can only be optimized for one of the orientations The feature only work for monochrome 1 bpp display color depth At run time the GuiLib DisplayUpsideDown variable determine the drawing direction If set to zero the display is drawn in the direction determined by the Display orientation selection see above If set to one the display is drawn 180 rotated from the selected orientation Observe that a redraw of the display is necessary the existing display contents is not rotated Display controller endian mode Some color displays works in little
60. a test area for checking proportional spacing in detail 3 Single character Show the currently selected character FONT SETUP The basic properties of the font are handled on the Setup tab page in the Commands panel The following parameters can be edited e Name Changes the font name References to the font from structures in the project are not affected by a change of name as the references are by internal pointers Only deleting a font and creating it again will break the references e Info A description which will be included in the target system c h files Ig ejiBI5 Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS DT Solutions assSii aul Color mode A font can be one of two modes Monochrome for simple pixel on off fonts Anti aliased for fonts with 16 shades of gray for each pixel Type A font can be one of two types Text for normal character fonts Icon for fonts containing icons Internally the two font types are treated the same the distinction is purely for convenience when presenting font lists Width of character cell Characters can be indeed normally is smaller than this width and the value merely sets the maximum character width possible Value can be 1 255 Height of character cell Characters can be indeed normally is smaller than this height and the value merely sets the maximum character height possible Value can be 1 255 Box right limit Value can be between 1 and width of
61. and Mid Line Lower case letters with hanging parts extends below the base line EasvilliGUIi A character does not need to fill the area between the left border of the character cell and Box Right fully and if not doing so it can be centered horizontally or kept left adjusted When easyGUI writes text in proportional mode the horizontal character placement inside the character cell doesn t matter Only if writing with fixed spacing will the horizontal character placement be visible in the finished text A character may go beyond Box Right but should not touch the right border of the character cell unless it is intentional that the character shall be a continuous part of a following character the character only will be used on its own e g icons or the font will only be used for proportional writing The various reference lines are only intended as guides developing the font with the exception of the Base Line position which is the Y coordinates reference point used by easyGUI when rendering text 6 assSii auti
62. arranged in a horizontal manner Full declaration define GuiConst BYTE HORIZONTAL GuiConst BYTE LINES Purpose No of byte lines in the display vertical or horizontal Full declaration define GuiConst BYTE LINES XXX GuiConst BYTE VERTICAL Purpose Defines that display bytes in the display controller are arranged in a vertical manner Full declaration define GuiConst BYTE VERTICAL GuiConst BYTES PR LINE Purpose Bytes per display line horizontal or vertical assSiiaul Full declaration define GuiConst BYTES PR LINE XXX GuiConst BYTES PR SECTION Purpose Bytes per display line for each display controller Only used if more than one display controller horizontally is used Full declaration define GuiConst BYTES PR SECTION XXX GuiConst CHAR Purpose Character definition 8 bit unsigned Default char Full declaration define GuiConst CHAR XXX GuiConst CHARMODE ANSI Purpose Character coding is ANSI using 8 bit character size Full declaration define GuiConst CHARMODE ANSI GuiConst CHARMODE UNICODE Purpose Character coding is Unicode using 16 bit character size Full declaration define GuiConst CHARMODE UNICODE GuiConst CLIPPING SUPPORT ON Purpose Clipping module enabled Full declaration define GuiConst CLIPPING SUPPORT ON GuiConst_CODEVISION_COMPILER Purpose Special flag for CodeVision compilers Inserts flash keywords wh
63. aul Font functions Font list manages complete fonts The F3 key activates this window E Font editing edits a single font selected in the font list Manages font selection for the target system The F4 key activates this window Project functions Project parameters Basic settings for the project defining e g display size and display controller memory layout The F5 key activates this window Language translation allows definition of languages in the project and translation of texts The F7 activates this window Positions manages fixed positions for screen structures The F8 key activates this window Variables manages variables for dynamic screen structure control The F9 key activates this window Structures the core function in easyGUI Manages screen structures The F10 key activates this window E s li La C code generation HE C code generation converts easyGUI data to c and h files for inclusion in the target El system code The F11 key activates this window Import export ER Import export moves data between easyGUI projects The F12 key activates this window assSiiaGuIl 4 FONTS FONT TYPES All characters and icons are organized into fonts Fonts are divided into text fonts containing normal characters and icon fonts containing graphical elements A text font contains one set of characters in one size covering one or more languages e g both Western style and Asian st
64. characters no state indicators Essentially a clean representation of all characters in the font Best used when making basic font editing like adding and editing individual characters e All characters with state indicators Shows all characters in the font like the above setting but with indicators showing the selection state of individual characters in the target system data F White background character The character is selected and will be included Gray background character The character is not selected and will therefore be skipped when generating the target system data assSiioaul Character with red cross The character has been manually deselected and will only be included in the target system data if selected by other means F The example shows a white character background which shows that the character will in fact be included in the target system data The opposite grayed character with a red cross is also possible Character with green cross The character is not used by any structures The example shows a white character background which shows that the character will in fact be included in the target system data The opposite grayed character with a green cross is also possible This view filter is best used when changing character selection e Currently selected characters Shows only the characters that will be included in the target system data e All characters in use in structures Shows only the
65. characters that are used in at least one text in the structures e Manually selected characters Shows only the characters that have been manually selected At the bottom of the font selection panel is a statistics box showing character counts using various criteria FONT EDITING Creation deletion and editing of characters take place both on the Editing tab page in the Commands panel and in the single character panel to the right Pixel editing Pixels can be edited directly in the single character panel For monochrome fonts clicking on a pixel toggles its color white to black or vice versa Dragging with the mouse paints pixels as the mouse is moved using the toggled color of the starting pixel For anti aliased fonts the paint color can be selected to the right of the character 16 shades of gray from purely white to purely black The currently selected color can be seen above the palette PS mark editing PS marks are set by right clicking in the left or right halves of a pixel The PS marks can be moved by dragging horizontally The vertical positions of PS marks are fixed and defined as explained in the section on proportional writing above EasvilliGUi By using the Str PS MARKS RESET PS and HALF PS buttons all PS marks for a character can be moved at once see command explanations below Editing many characters at once Many of the commands can work on a range of characters This is controlled in the Character ran
66. check mark is displayed as the selected bitmap image One color in the bitmap can be selected as transparent Options to select the bitmap file only appear when the Bitmap check mark style is selected Check mark color The color of the check mark is selected from one of seven options See the foreground color panel description for details of what the color selections mean This control is only displayed when the check mark style selected is Checked Crossed Filled or Icon Radio button panel Item types Radio button cmn 4 t aSScoMpP OK Defines the parameters of a Radio button item This panel determines the number of and the appearance of the Radio buttons The panel contains the following items Radio button style Determines the style of the radio buttons from one of four options Flat The radio buttons are simple circles The size of each circle is determined by the Radio button diameter selection box below the Radio button style selection options 3D The radio buttons will be circles with a slightly thicker top left border to present a 3 dimensional appearance The sizes of the circles are determined by the Radio button diameter selection box below the Radio button style selection options Icon The radio buttons are displayed as the selected font character Options to select the font character only appear when the Icon Radio button style is selected Bitmap The radio buttons are displayed as the sel
67. color index Initially all colors are black Each palette can be given a name which is only for informational purposes assSiioaul The DEFAULT PALETTE button replaces all colors with the standard easyGUI palette colors for the palette in question for the user defined palettes all colors will be reset to black Color handling Each color in easyGUI can be edited by double clicking it A single color editing window appears Color mixer Color before editing New edited color 60 Red Green Blue Sat Bright Table of user defined colors Red Green Blue Explanation 103 103 103 25 117 179 Double click a color to select it for editing Drag inside table to copy color r Drag from New edited color panel to set it or double click it Drag while pressing Ctrl inside table to swap colors x Cancel The color can be edited in a number of ways e Color mixer Works by setting color based on hue saturation and brightness Use the slider to select color saturation and the T field to select hue horizontal direction and brightness vertical direction e RGB values The red green and blue intensities 0 255 are entered directly as numerical values e HSB values The hue 0 360 saturation 0 100 and brightness 0 100 are entered directly as numerical values e Existing color Shows the color as it was before editing started e Edited color Shows the current state of the c
68. controller Only used if more than one display controller vertically is used Full declaration define GuiConst LINES PR SECTION XXX EasvilliGUIi GuiConst_MAX_BACKGROUND_BITMAPS Purpose Max number of concurrent background bitmaps in use Smaller values will conserve RAM space on the target system Full declaration define GuiConst_MAX BACKGROUND BITMAPS XXX GuiConst_MAX_DYNAMIC_ITEMS Purpose Max number of concurrent dynamic auto redraw and cursor items A large number will consume more RAM space on the target system Each auto redraw item consumes approximately 60 bytes Full declaration define GuiConst MAX DYNAMIC ITEMS XXX GuiConst MAX PARAGRAPH LINE CNT Purpose Max number of scrollable paragraph lines when displaying Paragraph items with scrolling enabled Smaller values will conserve RAM space on the target system Full declaration define GuiConst MAX PARAGRAPH LINE CNT XXX GuiConst MAX TEXT LEN Purpose Max length of single text string when displaying structures Can be up to 255 characters Smaller values will conserve RAM space on the target system Full declaration define GuiConst MAX TEXT LEN XXX GuiConst MAX VARNUM TEXT LEN Purpose Max length of numerical variable text representations when displaying structures Can be up to 255 characters Smaller values will conserve RAM space on the target system Full declaration define GuiConst MAX VARNUM TEXT LEN XXX
69. development system for fast and efficient creation of embedded graphical user interfaces easyGUl is an application for defining user interfaces on embedded displays using graphical primitives This manual covers all versions of the easyGUI package Sections specific to one or the other are marked with I MONOCHROME for the easyGUI Monochrome version lll COLOR for the easyGUI Color version y 488 UNICODE for the easyGUI Unicode version ill ok 1 M t ASYCOMP for the easyCOMP advanced components add on module The easyGUI Color version contains all functionality of the easyGUI Monochrome version plus support for more than one bit per display pixel i e color depths of more than two colors Grayscale displays are handled just as color displays by easyGUI The easyGUI Unicode version contains all functionality of the easyGUI Color version plus support for 16 bit Unicode character codes The easyCOMP add on module includes a number of advanced components e Check box component type e Radio button component type e Button component type e Scroll box component type e Panel component type e Graph component type e Graphics layer Graphics filter component types Furthermore the various easyGUI add ons and utilities are covered in this manual For users with an old easyGUI version 5 license the use of the Scroll box component type is allowed even if easyCOMP hasn t been purchased This is to allo
70. e Se 87 IIMPOME SOTUD pte 87 luere 88 Making the impoOFrt voie eer e re dee eee te per te Dr nee i eere rei eed etate 90 STRUCTURES WINDOW cidiex kk Pep rRLkRR R TE ERER S ERRETRRKR ERR RRREPRRERE NER PEEIERR CHER UR oru RR ER EE PE ERE 91 jini edi i is 91 SELCIDI 91 lvdurpe e 93 WINKOW TAY OUE m E 96 Structure management panel eee ee eeeeee eese eene eese enne teen eese e sense eese ne sees teens sees enneeee 97 Item list PANE E 99 ihrem M 100 Structure hierarchy panel sees nete nenn tne nenne nenne tete tnetrnne nennen tete 100 Navigation SHOFtCUES iu n nor ERE EET A P EFIE TA PH UH NU Ere te EE EMERES 100 Item information panel eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee entente tnn nntnntns tnt tn trees tn tinte tieni tnt tn enne inen nnne 101 Primary position pariel 2 rer eere a E EDU ERE Rc ERR RE Renee 101 Secondary positiori pariel 2 tre ei c ES bh a eren vun e ed OR koe REOR Ue 102 Radius Corner panel eee seisieeeseesesn esee eaten ate tn stein tnatntn e teinte tn en attt aestate tnnt tnnt 102 Alignment panel eeeeeseeessesee esses eee te ene tn tne teinte tnnt nter tet tn ate tt etes en a tette tne tetra tnn 103 Quarter circle El
71. e g a box containing texts and other components In fact this is often the case The reasons are 1 Many display controllers are very slow to write to either because of the display controller itself or because of the way it is hooked to the micro controller like e g port access So to speed up the system the minimum amount of actual display writing is sought 2 Writing overlapping parts directly to the display controller RAM can potentially result in flickering because partial display images will be visible albeit for very short times The first reason is not that relevant with the newer color based relatively high resolution display controllers which are far more efficient in moving around display data than older designs Light and contrast control These topics are beyond easyGUI s control but it is logical to put the routines for light and contrast regulation if applicable into the GuiDisplay unit 4 Compiling the project The next step is to compile you re the easyGUI project without errors and preferable without warnings Make sure to include the GuiLib GuiDisplay GuiFont GuiVar and GuiStruct units into your project setup OBS Do not make the Guiltems c GuiComponents c GuiGraph c and GuiGraphXX c include files part of your project setup These files are automatically included into GuiLib c Trying to compile them as separate C units will result in multiple compiler error messages Compile and link
72. excluded Full declaration define GuiConst ADV FONTS ON GuiConst ALLOW UPSIDEDOWN AT RUNTIME Purpose Defines that the display can be used in both normal orientation and 180 rotated upside down at run time Full declaration define GuiConst ALLOW UPSIDEDOWN AT RUNTIME GuiConst ARAB CHARS INUSE Purpose At least one Arabic character is included in one or more fonts If no Arabic characters are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to Arabic character handling will be excluded Full declaration define GuiConst ARAB CHARS INUSE assSii aul GuiConst AUTOREDRAW MAX VAR SIZE Purpose Size of biggest Auto redraw variable of all structures Full declaration define GuiConst AUTOREDRAW MAX VAR SIZE XXX GuiConst AUTOREDRAW ON CHANGE Purpose Auto redraw items are updated only if the controlling variable has changed or if the item does not have a controlling variable If this directive is not present Auto redraw items will be continuously updated each time the GuiLib Refresh function is called Full declaration define GuiConst AUTOREDRAW ON CHANGE GuiConst AVR COMPILER FLASH RAM Purpose Special flag for AVR compilers when using flash RAM Full declaration define GuiConst AVR COMPILER FLASH RAM GuiConst AVRGCC COMPILER Purpose Special flag for AVR GCC compilers Replaces the keyword const with the keyword PROGMEM in all easyGUI generated c
73. for each type of scroll line The call back function must set the controlling structure index variable in order to select the correct line type and of course populate data as usual if needed some scroll line types could be e g a dividing line or other graphical component with no data showing More complicated scroll boxes using secondary line markers and or an indicator will require additional function calls at initialization An example is GuiLib ShowScreen GuiStruct ScreenScrollDemo Def GuiLib NO CURSOR GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW GuiLib ScrollBox Init 0 amp DemoScrollLine 20 0 GuiLib ScrollBox SetLineMarker 0 1 2 4 GuiLib ScrollBox SetIndicator 0 5 GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw 0 GuiLib Refresh which will set scroll line marker 1 to line 2 with four lines marked and set the scroll indicator to line 5 like in some of the editor examples above Observe that we also call GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw 0 to ensure the scroll box is redrawn using the specified line marker and indicator settings Calling GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw 0 is not necessary when only using GuiLib ScrollBox Init Library functions The scroll box functions are prefixed by GuiLib ScrollBox The functions are assSii aul GuiLib ScrollBox Init Initializes a scroll box Input parameters Scroll box index DataFuncPtr Address of scroll line call back function of type void F GuiConst INT16S LineIndex NoOfLines To
74. index is zero based DataSetIndex Index of data set in the graph index is zero based DataIndex Index of point in the data set index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 iLib Graph AddDataPoint iLib Graph AddDataSet iLib Graph DrawDataSet iLib Graph HideDataSet iLib Graph Redraw iLib Graph RemoveDataSet iLib Graph ShowDataSet QQAANAANAAADA H H H H H H H GuiLib_Graph_DrawDataSet Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Redraws a data set Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph DrawDataSet GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U DataSetIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based DataSetIndex Index of data set in the graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 iLib Graph AddDataPoint iLib Graph AddDataSet iLib Graph DrawDataPoint iLib Graph HideDataSet iLib Graph Redraw iLib Graph RemoveDataSet iLib Graph ShowDataSet QAQAQQQQDA H H H H H H H GuiLib_Graph_HideDataSet Purpose Marks a data set as invisible Nothing is drawn in this function assSii aul Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph HideDataSet GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U DataSetIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based DataSetInd
75. into its major panels shows the organization more clearly Ig ejiBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 96 Solutions E 3 icv easyGUI project Tutorial file C easyGUI Tutorial Tutorial gui Soe Structure name 1 d tem 4 Text Item demo TL Tee Structure hierarchy Structure class Primary Info B Delete Top Pos Vactest Color Misc Item Prev name Nest nai f Prev struct M Next str ii i E ltem type History Origin Primary position X p zY1 2 B Delete Screen Scroll demo 1 7 oe Absolute Absolute x Screen Config 1 x Rename C Screen Splash F1 e Clipboard Set Screen PreparationSimp Called py e Screen PreparationCom E af Generate structure C code a Generate all C coq Show options Fixed spacing Displ border Undrawn Graphics i Proportional spacing je aroz Select style Underline Ouline 1 i Ten exts wicuiew Gui GuiGuiGui G L i Backar box Curr item Bitmaps Font ANSI 7 Result ANSI 7 Zoom 4 X X 11 23 4 4 gt Show coordinates at crosshair Each panel handles a part of the editing process 1 Structure management Creates deletes copies navigates etc complete structures 2 Item list Shows all items of the currently selected structure 3 Item Shows all parameters for the currently selected item
76. is controlled by a variable it is not recalculated each time the GuiLib Refresh function redraws the item However this fact can be circumvented by making the Auto redraw item a structure call which calls another structure containing e g variable controlled coordinates This is because complete structures that are to be redrawn do get recalculated It all stems from the fact that only the Auto redraw item is saved in the list of Auto redraw items not its eventual underlying structures which in principle could be a big construction of multi level structures in structures There are two fundamentally different ways of using the Auto redraw feature Continuous updating All Auto redraw items are continuously updated each time the GuiLib Refresh function is called This is the default setting Update on changes Auto redraw items are updated only if the controlling variable variable to be displayed has changed or if the item does not involve a variable The selection between these two methods is done in the Parameter window under the Operations tab If Update on changes has been selected as the Auto redraw controlling method there is an additional way of controlling Auto redraw items NECI Size 12U x 54 angle Thickness 1 Misc Cursor field y v Autoredraw Variable for updates on changes StepTimeSS x Type 16 bit unsigned This variable reference allows items not inherently using variables all visible items except
77. is to utilize the coordinate memory system There are three coordinate registers for each of the X and Y coordinates which are maintained across structures At any time can a coordinate be saved in a coordinate register or retrieved for use REGRESO a 3Ut ge Top Pos Var text Color Misc 9 Primary position a X1 53 zi Yi 32 t Mode Absolute v Relative Y Pos table EE z Variable F E Var value S 55 ess EE More fat oad soe 1 Transf Transf X1 pos 59 Y1 pos 3 Table Table Variable Variable hler load pen Joad Sum 59 um 45 Alignment Alignment F X1 result 59 Y1 result 45 Horizontal alignment o 1 eft actin tet lXt 59 2 98 m This is utilized here by saving the X coordinate for the left column in X coordinate register 1 and the X coordinate for the right column in X coordinate register 2 The following items retrieve the X coordinates again To aid in controlling coordinate register usage it can be surveyed at a glance by looking at the item list tem 3 Te Structure E Delete t CONFIGU t Language Top Pe Item type s Langu Primary po nat Clipboard ConfigFor x Cut t Display co x1 ai Copy C2 v DiCon ec Ab s Pos table E Variable Ej Var value The small indicators show when a coordinate value is saved and retrieved assSiioaul Using an indexed structure Items 3 and 4 constitute the langua
78. later Structure details The Screen Config 1 structure uses eight items Screen Config 0 1 Filled rectangle Clears the screen 2 Text Headline 3 Text Language explanation 4 Indexed structure Language parameter text 5 Indexed structure Force reduction line 6 Text Display contrast explanation 7 Formatter Formatting of display contrast number 8 Variable Display contrast number Like in the Splash structure the first item filled rectangle is used to clear the screen by drawing a white block with the same dimensions as the display EasyiliGUi Don t forget the coordinates The explanatory texts and the parameters in the Screen Config 1 structure are aligned in two columns a left aligned for the explanatory texts and a right aligned for the parameters It would be simple to just enter all X coordinates as absolute values and tweak the whole thing until everything is nicely lined up Fair enough if you never plan to alter anything but real life is seldom that simple so it would be nice if the leftmost and rightmost items were linked so that moving the top item in a column horizontally moved the other two with it Then use relative coordinates what s the problem Well the problem is that we can t maintain two sets of relative coordinates one for the left column and one for the right column when the items for the two columns are interspersed The solution of course there is a solution
79. nnne nennen enter nnn 290 Guilib TextBox Scroll Get Psn eterne erret eet rere eret tre E PUE inten Eee E YER 290 GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Pixel sees eene nennen nnn 291 GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home esee en nnn nn nnne tns enne intent 291 GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home Pixel essen nnne nnne nnne nennen nnns 291 GuiLib TextBox Scroll To Line sesseseeseeseeeeeeenrnen nennen nnne nnne nnn nne nennen enne 292 GuiLib TextBox Scroll To PixelLine eere nennen 292 Guilib TextBox Scroll UJp is riter reet xir cente y rue ea rae Y Ere NE ENE 292 17 18 19 assSii aul GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up Pixel essere ennt nnne enne nnne nennen nne 293 GuiLib TouchAdjustReset essent ennt nette ennt tn innen enn tns thinner tns tninn enn 293 Guibib TouchAdJUStSet erit rere e eei a n PR evi epu dr ee LEE 293 GULD TOUCHONECK C rr rn Nr Re Pe NO eraa ee 294 ET Hl onan Foe kel ak eon ote OD A e AL A Ifi EI 294 Guibib UnicodeStrCmbp eerie Maridiviadninledlaninaaianauina Mamaia 295 GuiLib UnicodeStrCpy essent nnne nennen ttem nennen nennen nnne 295 GUILD UrilcodesStr Lien rti eder tie Er er e RP RESTER ERR ERETS 295 GuiLib UnicodeStrN Cmp sesseeseeeeeeeeenee enne netten nnne tnnt tn stein tnnt tnter tns en tenen 296 GUILID UnicodeStrNCDy ert entren te nent Re EXC SER EET EARS NEAR RE Ran ERES 296 GSO
80. no filter action will be taken DISPLAY PANEL The display panel shows a representation of the target system display lacking only certain dynamic features e g scroll box operation All pixels drawn correspond 1 1 with the real display Show Test S SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO Highlight options Scroll line item cursor fief to reda Scroll line item 13855 Touch ar a 5 ase croll line item Blink field Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Zoom 11272 3 4 138 56 4 b V Show coordinates at crosshair A cursor cross is shown whenever the mouse is over the display area The coordinates of the cross are displayed at the bottom of the panel 138 56 in the example They can also be displayed next to the cross itself by activating the option Show coordinates at crosshair at the bottom of the panel right under the coordinates By default the option is enabled The panel zoom slider displayed at the bottom to the left of the coordinates can be set to 4x 15x 34x 1x 1 x 2x 3x 4x The 1x setting map PC screen pixels directly as target system pixels but in many instances will create a rather small display because of the high resolution of modern PC systems compared to the target system display To the left of the target system display are a number of controls allowing different views and help systems to be employed They are divided into two tabs Show and Te
81. of memory in the target because a copy of the complete item with all parameters must be made Cursor numbers do not need to be contiguous or start at zero thereby allowing dynamic parts of the display containing cursor fields to be invisible without corrupting the cursor system Multiple cursor fields may also have a single cursor number so multiple items can be easily selected at once Cursor field visibility can be checked in the left part of the display panel assSii aul Active cursors are drawn on the target system by reversing foreground and background colors It is therefore essential not to make cursor fields transparent i e without background e Auto redraw If checked instructs the target system to automatically refresh the item periodically The timing is controlled by the target system easyGUI keeps a copy of each Auto redraw item and inserts it in a list Each time the target system GuiLib Refresh function is called the Auto redraw items are checked and maybe redrawn depending on the setup described below An Auto redraw item can be a single variable or e g a structure call consisting of perhaps a variable and its associated unit text Another important thing to consider when designing structures with Auto redraw features is the fact that the Auto redraw item never gets recalculated it is merely redrawn with the coordinates colors etc calculated when its parent structure was initially displayed So if e g a coordinate
82. s edid Te dE 234 G llib BBP RIGHT ccsissccsstvssciedes cte cat crea coe te cet aea cett eet rales cer te oet rte e DUE Te Y Era de Yd tete 234 GuiEib BBP TOP iiie vette o ORO RARE WEIT ITE 234 GuiLib BUTTON STATE UP ennemi nn ennt nne Ee IR ESE SENE TETEP NNSS 234 GuiLib BUTTON STATE DOWN cccccsscssscssscesscesscesscesscesscesecesecesscesseesecesscesecesscesseesseeseeenees 234 GuiLib BUTTON STATE DISABLED ccccsccsscssssssesscsscssesssssecsseesesseseesesessesseseeseassasssreesenses 235 GuiLib CHECKBOX OFF ccscssccsscssscesscesscesscescesscesscesscesscesecesscesecesscesscesseesscesseesseeseeeseeenees 235 GUILID_CHECKBOX_ON ccccsesscssscssscesscesscesecesscesecesscesscesscesecessecsecesscesscesseesscesseesseeseeeseeenees 235 GUILID_DECIMAL_COMMA ccccccsssssesscsscsseesscsscssessesseceeessessessecsessaesseseeseesssesseseeeeasensseresesenses 235 GUILIB IDECIMAILIPERIO Dit cs esvte citt vie POE En dave e Pee rite iri cite IE ie vier der 235 GuiLib FORMAT ALIGNMENT CENTER c ccssccsscesseesscesscesscesscesecesscesscesscesecessecsecesseesseesees 235 GuiLib FORMAT ALIGNMENT LEFT cccccscsscssssssssscsscsscsssssecsecsssssessecesessesseseseassassareesenses 235 GuiLib FORMAT ALIGNMENT RIGHT ccccssccsscssscesscesscesscescesecesscesecessceseceseeesscessceseeenees 236 GuiLib FORMAT DEG eti rei ROO CER ER WRTH NEN 236 GuiLib FORMAT EXP titre err PEE ERE E Ee EE PEE ETUR 236 CULO
83. structure class must be defined at any time It is thus not possible to delete the last structure class Structures with the same name but differing index numbers can only belong to one structure class The structure name drop down box in the upper left corner of the main structure editing window shows the classes in use i e classes not containing any structures are not shown When creating a structure the class can be assigned When renaming a structure the class can be changed When generating C code all structures are created in class order with structures inside each class arranged alphabetically Classes are managed through the Casses button just below the structure name No Structure class name Ccodeidentiier O Primary same 1 Pop ups same 2 Sub assemblies same M Move down In this window classes can be created edited and deleted e Add Creates a new class e Delete Destroys a class Observe that structures belonging to the class are not deleted but moved to another class of choice e Edit Each class has a number of associated parameters Class name The name appearing in the Structure editor window IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 92 Solutions EasvilliGUIi C code identifier An optional alternative C code class name used when generating C code for the target system This field might be left empty the class name is then used instead C co
84. style GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 12 AMPM 12 hour AM PM time output format HH MM SS hours minutes and seconds style Variable format field width Variable format alignment can be Gui Lib FO space Gui Lib FO space Gui Lib FO RMAT A IGNM h NT LEFT text is left aligned in the allocated RMAT A IGNM F ENTER text is centered in the allocated NT C RMAT A IGNMI is in the allocated space Variable format decimals ENT RIGHT text right aligned assSii aul Variable format show sign true or false Variable format zero padding true or false Variable format trailing zeros true or false Variable format thousands separator true or false Alignment Can be e GuiLib ALIGN LEFT starts text writing from the X coordinate e GuiLib ALIGN CENTER centers text writing around the X coordinate e GuiLib ALIGN RIGHT positions the text so that it ends on the X coordinate Proportional writing Can be e GuiLib PS OFF turns off proportional writing e GuiLib PS ON turns on proportional writing e GuiLib PS NUM uses numerical proportional writing Transparent Can be e GuiLib TRANSPARENT OFF turns transparent writing off i e the background is painted e GuiLib TRANSPARENT ON turns transparent writing on i e only the text is painted Underlining Can be e GuiLib
85. the Structure window for correct appearance Things to look for are texts that take up too much space texts that overflow eventual background boxes misunderstandings by the Translator texts that were not marked for translation or shouldn t have been marked for translation etc Create C files for the target system and check for correct function WORKING ON THE PROJECT WHILE TRANSLATING When easyGUI imports a translate file coming back from a Translator all texts are checked one by one If the text item exists in the project the text is updated with the translated string If the text no longer exists item has been deleted after the translate file was created it is merely skipped New items added after the translate file was created are of course missing translation so typically it is normal procedure for the project to run through at least two sequences of translation a main translation effort and a follow up for the few things which are typically added or altered when wrapping up the project One thing to avoid is to update easyGUI to a new version while translate files are out of house this can lead to problems when importing the translate files which would obviously still be of the old version If this situation arises easyGUI support should be contacted EasyilliGUl 18 easySIM PC SIMULATION TOOLSET The easySIM PC simulation toolset is a special display driver that allows your target system code to run on a PC under the Windows
86. the graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 Lib Graph DrawAxes Lib Graph HideXAxis Lib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin Lib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin Lib Graph Redraw Lib Graph SetXAxisRange Lib Graph SetYAxisRange Lib Graph ShowXAxis Lib Graph ShowYAxis H H H H p H p p p G G G G Gu G G G G GuiLib_Graph_OffsetXAxisOrigin Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Adjusts the X axis origin Useful for dynamic graphs with moving X axis Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8S AxisIndex GuiConst INT32S Offset GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based AxisIndex Index of X axis in the graph index is zero based Index 1 will offset all defined X axes This only makes sense if all X axes have identical scaling Offset Amount of movement of the X axis origin Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 iLib Graph DrawAxes iLib Graph HideXAxis iLib Graph HideYAxis iLib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin iLib Graph Redraw iLib Graph ResetXAxisOrigin iLib Graph ResetYAxisOrigin iLib Graph SetXAxisRange iLib Graph SetYAxisRange iLib Graph ShowXAxis iLib Graph ShowYAxis QAANQADAAAAAAAA H H p H H H H H H pP GuiLib_Graph_OffsetYAxisOrigin Purpose Remarks Full
87. the numbering sequence or duplicated cursor indices It is legal to have gaps in the numbering sequence and this situation is handled correctly by easyGUI An example is the second cursor field in our test structure Force Reduction ON OFF If the line containing it is not shown ForceReductFlag 0 the remaining cursor fields are 0 and 2 Show Test Show options Bien borde i CONF IGURATION Active area Highlight options L anguage o Efalish Backar box Curr item Ciir or flete Display contrast eoi assSiiaul easyGUI still handles selecting the next and previous cursor field correctly because it searches for the next previous field instead of just incrementing decrementing the cursor index On the target system the two remaining cursor fields still have the same indices making code writing specific to a certain cursor field easy Duplicated cursor indices are not very useful but maybe a situation can be constructed where it could be advantageous Anyway duplicate indices are handled by ignoring all duplicates except the last one MAIN MENU STRUCTURE The Screen Main 0 structure is included here to show an ordinary menu page with in this case three menu items MAIN MENU Preparation Manual preparation Configuration A couple of tricks have been used to enhance the look of the menu items Better looking menu items Look carefully at the Preparat
88. this area When drawing it the area is clipped Scroll bar structure Defines the layout of the scroll bar If no scroll bar structure is defined a framed filled rectangle will be drawn instead Use relative coordinates for the scroll bar structure just as for the scroll line structure see above Scroll bar framed rectangle border color Selects border color for a scroll bar The alternatives and the principles are the same as above described see Background color panel Shown only if scroll bar structure is not used Scroll bar framed rectangle fill color Selects fill color for a scroll bar Shown only if scroll bar structure is not used Scroll bar framed rectangle border thickness Defines thickness of border for a scroll bar Shown only if scroll bar structure is not used assSii aul Scroll bar marker icon The icon character font and offset can be specified Shown only if the scroll bar marker is an icon Scroll bar marker icon foreground color Selects foreground color for a scroll bar marker icon Shown only if the scroll bar marker is an icon Scroll bar marker icon background color Selects background color for a scroll bar marker icon Shown only if the scroll bar marker is an icon Scroll bar marker bitmap A bitmap file location should be defined in the File field with the help of BROWSE button Shown only if the scroll bar marker is a bitmap Parts of the bitmap can be made transparent using the same method
89. upper left corner SPLASH STRUCTURE We won t go through the details of how the Item demo 1 structure is build but instead move on to a more practical example a splash screen or welcome screen Select the Screen Splash 1 structure eaae eu Graphical User Interface Tool for Embedded Systems making graphical user interfaces has never been easier Version 1 23 This structure shows a logo some texts and a version number which is dynamic i e its value is controlled directly from the embedded code thereby avoiding the need to edit the structure each time the version number changes assSiioaul Structure details Because this is the first real structure we will dissect it in details It consists of eight items Screen Splash 1 1 Filled rectangle Clears the screen 2 Text Actually an icon showing the easyGUI logo 3 Text Graphical User Interface Tool 4 Text for Embedded Systems 5 Text making graphical user interfaces has never been easier 6 Text Version 7 Formatter Determines the format for the next item 8 Variable Version number for the application Clearing the screen The first item filled rectangle is used to clear the screen so it simply draws a white block with the same dimensions as the display 240x128 pixels in this case Finding this and that item Next is the logo item 2 Click on item 2 in the item list so its properties are
90. used in structure editing ensuring that related items are placed at the same position in different structures e g the vertical position of headlines easyGUI can be used without utilizing the position list it is meant as an option For each position an X a Y and an Alignment can be set Additionally an explanation can be made for information purposes only Ig GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 84 Solutions 4 eaSSiliIQGUI 3 10 VARIABLES WINDOW Displays a list of variables Name Type DiMessageBosErrorNo DiMessageBosKeys DiMessageBoxNo DiMessageBoxT ype DiSoloUserDefSpeed DiSoloUserDefwaterO nO ft Doser SwitchPos EditTimeMM EditTime5S EditUnsignedint ForceReductFlag ForceReduction GroupName GroupNo PrepDirSelect PrepDosingOn PrepForce PrepForceSelect PrepSimpleSelect PrepTimeSelect ProcessMode RadioControl ScrollLineltem ScrollLineNo ScrollLinePrice ScrollLineS elect ScrollLineTimeOn StepGritGrain 16 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned f 8 bit unsigned 18 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 16 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned string 16 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned Group name test TEST Controls the state of the OK button 8 bit unsigned string 16 bit unsigned 16 b
91. using four methods e All characters in font An easy way of selecting all characters at once or none Unicode character sets use a lot of memory this option is not recommended if using Unicode on the target system e Characters in use in structures Only characters used in structures are selected Characters used in structures refers only to fixed strings used in Text and Paragraph items and their translations if available Variable fields show strings in the same manner in the easyGUI preview window but as they are variable items easyGUI will not include these characters as it cannot predict which characters the variables will need on the target system e Numerical characters Selects characters 0 9 and space e Manually selected characters The selection state of each character can be set either by double clicking on a character in the character set which toggles its selection state or by using the five manual selection buttons SELECT DESELECT CURRENT CHARACTER Corresponds to double clicking the current character in the character set SELECT RANGE OF CHARACTERS A small window allows setting the first and last character code to select SELECT ALL CHARACTERS A quick way of selecting everything before possibly deselecting some characters assSii aul DESELECT RANGE OF CHARACTERS A small window allows setting the first and last character code to deselect DESELECT ALL CHA
92. weaknesses when used for ordinary text simple bitmaps icons with few colors and continuous tone bitmaps E asvilliGUIi Qualit Text Simple Continuous tone y bitmaps icons bitmaps 1 bpp grayscale 2 shades Medium Low Not suitable 2 bpp grayscale 4 shades Medium Medium Low 4 bpp grayscale 16 shades High High Medium 5 bpp grayscale 32 shades High High Medium 8 bpp grayscale 256 shades Excellent Excellent High 4 bpp palette 16 colors Excellent Excellent Low 8 bpp palette 256 colors Excellent Excellent Medium 8 bpp RGB 256 colors Excellent Excellent Low 12 bpp RGB 4096 colors Excellent Excellent Medium 15 bpp RGB 32K colors Excellent Excellent Medium 16 bpp RGB 64K colors Excellent Excellent Medium 18 bpp RGB 64K colors Excellent Excellent High 24 bpp RGB 16M colors Excellent Excellent Excellent 32 bpp RGB 16M colors Excellent Excellent Excellent As an example on continuous tone bitmap quality the following bitmap 150x95 pixels is shown in the various color modes depths e 1bpp grayscale 2 shades EasyiliGUi All colors are converted to either black lt 50 gray or white Another approach is to use an error diffusion raster However this technique is outside the scope of easyGUI and must be handles by a dedicated graphical editing application e 2 bpp grayscale 4 shades With only four shades of gray and the t
93. will be present and some library code related to Scroll box item scroll bar handling is excluded Full declaration define GuiConst SCROLLITEM BAR NONE GuiConst SCROLLITEM BOXES MAX Purpose Max index of all Scroll box items automatically calculated by easyGUI assSiiaul Full declaration define GuiConst SCROLLIT EM BOXES MAX XXX GuiConst SCROLLITEM INDICATOR NONE Purpose Full declaration No Scroll box item scroll indicators defined at all If no Scroll box items contains scroll indicators this directive will be present and some library code related to Scroll box item scroll indicator handling is excluded define GuiConst SCROLLITI GuiConst SCROLLITEM MARKERS MAX Purpose Full declaration GuiConst TEXT Purpose Full declaration EM INDICATOR NONE Max number of markers in a single Scroll box item automatically calculated by easyGUI define GuiConst SCROLLITI EM MARKERS MAX XXX Character definition Will be equal to GuiConst CHAR or GuiConst INT16U depending on the use of ANSI or Unicode character coding define GuiConst T GuiConst TEXTBOX FIELDS MAX Purpose Full declaration EXT XXX Max number of scrollable Paragraph items automatically calculated by easyGUI define GuiConst T GuiConst TEXTBOX FIELDS ON Purpose Full declaration EXTBOX FII ELDS MAX XXX At least one scrollable Paragraph item detected I
94. 0 at the top left corner of the display For an ellipse Rx runs to the right and Ry runs down For a circle or corner R runs in both directions simultaneously The following parameters can be specified for each coordinate e Ror RX Ry 16 bit radius value can be negative e Mode Can be Absolute The radius value is used directly Relative The radius value is added to the calculated coordinate of the previous item For item zero it is added to the origin coordinate value Relative to start The radius value is added to the starting coordinate of the previous item This is e g the left edge of a text or top in case of Y coordinate This is not the same as the calculated coordinate of the previous item if that item e g contains a centered text the calculated radius would then be at the center of this text Relative to end The radius value is added to the starting coordinate of the previous item This is e g the right edge of a text or bottom in case of Y coordinate e Table Fetches a radius value as coordinate from the Position window e Variable Fetches a radius from a variable value The variable must be of an integer type The value can be edited using the small buttons below the variable box e Memory load Fetches a radius from a coordinate memory location e Memory save Saves the current radius value in one of the three memory locations EasvilliGUIi The calculated radius is a sum of all contributions previou
95. 0 yellow background e Scroll lines 2 5 are marked scroll line marker 1 cyan background e Indicator is on line 5 Scrolling down increasing scroll line marker 0 position moves the yellow bar down and then starts scrolling SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO No Item Prive 12 Soroll line item 2 34 1 Scroll line item 12 34 6 Scroll line item 12 34 line 1 line 2 SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO Scroll line item 1234 Scroll line item 12 34 1 Scroll line item 12 34 1 Scroll line item 12 34 6 Scroll line item 12 34 6 Scroll line item 12 34 line 3 line 4 I GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 202 Solutions 4 eaSSiiIGUI 3 SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO No Item 1 1 Price Scroll line item 12 1 Soroll line item 12 34 No Item Soroll line item 1 Soroll line item line 5 line 6 SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO amp Scroll line item 12 34 amp Seroll line item 12 34 7 Soroll line item 12 34 line 7 line 8 and so on This can be tested in the Structures window using the controls in the lower left corner on the Test tab page The scroll bar can be disabled completely by selecting None as the scroll bar marker type SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO No Item Price 1 Scroll line item 12 34 6 Scroll line item 12 34 The scroll bar marker can be of several types Changing to Icon will give
96. 3 Name Type Boolean 8 bit unsigned 8 bit signed 18 bit unsigned 16 bit signed 32 bit unsigned 32 bit signed Float Double C Sting String length o excluding terminating zero Color Value m Decr of Incr Explanation X Cancel The same new edit window is shown when clicking the Edit button or double clicking on a row in the variable table IMPORTING DEFINITIONS Variable definitions can be imported from various file formats using the IMPoRT SETUP button to specify the import format and the IMPORT VARIABLE DEFINITIONS button to execute the actual import Import setup The import setup window contains a lot of settings Ig ejibBI5 Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 87 Solutions So eaSSiliIQGUI 3 Delimited Delimiter B Columns Keywords Variable identifier name fi Ex Data type f zi Integral integral Column 0 indicates no Integral Enumeration Entaneratect Enumerated column Enumerations starts at fi i Enumerated variables are imported as 8 bit unsigned Variable type boolean f Ex Boolean boot Variable types integer f l 8 bit char 16 bit int 32bit fong Variable types floating point s Float fin Double double Variable type string s String fsting String length fo si When sting length is suffix to var
97. 4 amp 32 bpp 16M colors RGB This bitmap was created using 8 bits for each of the RGB color intensities This is the highest quality handled by easyGUI Palette handling Only lll COLOR and UNICODE versions Permits editing of the 4 bpp and 8 bpp palettes 4 bpp palette shown as example Iq GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 64 Solutions EasvilliGUIi fat 4 bit 16 color palette Index Factory 1 Windows palette ie Name Ibo eoooe eo oe amp Oe v Ok X Cancel The Index drop down box allows selecting between several palettes For 4 bpp palettes they are Factory 1 Windows palette L T e 5358 Factory 2 RGB 4 2 2 levels i e all combinations of 4 red levels 2 green and 2 blue L ee Factory 3 RGB 2 4 2 levels i e all combinations of 2 red levels 4 green and 2 blue o E eS ee Factory 4 RGB 2 2 4 levels i e all combinations of 2 red levels 2 green and 4 blue EEA EAn ENT ENT User defined 1 Any color can be assigned to any color index Initially all colors are black User defined 2 Any color can be assigned to any color index Initially all colors are black User defined 3 Any color can be assigned to any color index Initially all colors are black For 8 bpp palettes they are EasyiliGUi e Factory 1 RGB 6 6 6 levels grayscale spare i e all combinations of 6 red levels 6 green and 6 blue a 32 shade gray scale section and finally 24 spare col
98. 8U FormatterThousandsSeparator GuiConst INT8U Alignment GuiConst INT8U PsWriting GuiConst INT8U Transparent GuiConst INT8U Underlining GuiConst INT16S BackBoxSizex GuiConst INT16S BackBoxSizeYl GuiConst INT16S BackBoxSizeY2 GuiConst INT8U BackBorderPixels GuiConst INTCOLOR ForeColor GuiConst INTCOLOR BackColor Unicode character mode void GuiLib DrawVar GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT16U FontNo void VarPtr GuiConst INT8U VarType GuiConst INT8U FormatterFormat GuiConst INT8U FormatterFieldWidth GuiConst INT8U FormatterAlignment GuiConst INT8U FormatterDecimals GuiConst INT8U FormatterShowSign GuiConst INT8U FormatterZeroPadding GuiConst INT8U FormatterTrailingZeros GuiConst INT8U FormatterThousandsSeparator GuiConst INT8U Alignment GuiConst INT8U PsWriting GuiConst INT8U Transparent GuiConst INT8U Underlining GuiConst INT16S BackBoxSizex GuiConst INT16S BackBoxSizeYl GuiConst INT16S BackBoxSizeY2 GuiConst INT8U BackBorderPixels GuiConst INTCOLOR ForeColor GuiConst INTCOLOR BackColor Input Coordinates Font index Character set selection 1 selects the default character set O selects the standard ANSI character set gt 0 selects special national character sets Only used in ANSI character mode Variable pointer reference Variable type Can be assSiiaul i Gui Gui Lib VA garded Lib VA Lib VA Lib VA
99. At the end of the axis display an arrow pointing up If selected the size of the arrow can be customized using the Length and Width controls provided Show major ticks on Y axis Show a small line tick to the left of the Y axis at the intervals determined by the Major step setting above If selected the size of the tick can be customized using the Length and Width controls provided assSii aul Show minor ticks on Y axis Show a small line tick to the left of the X axis at the intervals determined by the Minor step setting above If selected the size of the tick can be customized using the Length and Width controls provided The Minor tick mark would typically be smaller than the Major tick marks Show numbers on Y axis Show the value of the Y axis at the Major tick marks The distance of the values from the Y axis is determined by the left edge of the Major tick marks and the Offset from Y axis setting Show ticks number at origin Turn on or off the tick mark and or number at the start of the Y axis Omit ticks numbers at end of Y axis The setting here allows axis marks to be removed from the end of the axis e Graph data sets The easyGUI graph item supports multiple data set definitions which allow the graph to show multiple results at once A graph must have at least 1 data set Four buttons are provided to control the data set definitions New DELETE UP and Down Data set index Identifies the data set on the target syst
100. Color GuiConst INTCOLOR FillColor Input Coordinates Fill and border colors Output None Related functions GuiLib Box GuiLib FillBox GuiLib Box Purpose Draws a single pixel wide rectangle Full declaration void GuiLib Box GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst INT16S X2 GuiConst INT16S Y2 GuiConst INTCOLOR Color Input Coordinates Color Output None Related functions GuiLib BorderBox GuiLib FillBox GuiLib BrightenPixelColor Purpose Brightens color in display controller color setup 0 100096o 1000960 results in pure white Full declaration GuiConst INTCOLOR GuiLib BrightenPixelColor GuiConst INTCOLOR PixelColor GuiConst INT16U Amount assSiioaul Input Output Related functions Encoded pixel color value Brighten value 0 100096o Encoded pixel color value GuiLib AccentuatePixelColor GuiLib AccentuateRgbColor GuiLib BrightenRgbColor GuiLib DarkenPixelColor GuiLib DarkenRgbColor GuiLib BrightenRgbColor Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiLib Circle Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Brightens RGB color 0 100096 1000960 results in pure white GuiConst INT32U GuiLib BrightenRgbColor GuiConst INT32U RgbColor GuiConst INT16U Amount 24 bit RGB color value Brighten value 0 1000960 24 bit RGB color value GuiLib AccentuatePixelColor GuiLib Accent
101. DEGREE GuiConst ROTATED 90DEGREE LEFT Purpose Defines that the display is used in a 90 rotated left mode Full declaration define GuiConst ROTATED 90DEGREE LEFT assSii aul GuiConst ROTATED 90DEGREE RIGHT Purpose Defines that the display is used in a 90 rotated right mode Full declaration define GuiConst ROTATED 90DEGREE RIGHT GuiConst ROTATED OFF Purpose Defines that the display is used in a normal 0 rotation mode Full declaration define GuiConst ROTATED OFF GuiConst ROTATED UPSIDEDOWN Purpose Defines that the display is used in a 180 rotated upside down mode Full declaration define GuiConst ROTATED UPSIDEDOWN GuiConst SCROLL MODE STOP TOP Purpose Indicates that scroll box navigation stops at the top bottom scroll line i e no wrap around to the other end of the scroll list Full declaration define GuiConst SCROLL MODE STOP TOP GuiConst SCROLL MODE WRAP AROUND Purpose Indicates that scroll box navigation wraps around at the top bottom scroll line going from top line to the bottom line and vice versa Full declaration define GuiConst SCROLL MODE WRAP AROUND GuiConst SCROLL SUPPORT ON Purpose Scroll module enabled Full declaration define GuiConst SCROLL SUPPORT ON GuiConst SCROLLITEM BAR NONE Purpose No Scroll box item scroll bars defined at all If no Scroll box items contains scroll bars this directive
102. DiConfigLanguage This means that when easyGUI draws item 4 it first reads the variable value Zero right now look at the small blue text below the variable box and then calls structure LanguageText with the index corresponding to the variable value So the result here is that easyGUI displays structure LanguageText 0 if it exists it does If the structure did not exist easyGUI would merely go on to the next item without drawing anything And what does LanguageText 0 contain Easy to see just press the JUMP TO STRUCTURE button Pressing the CHILD STRUCTURE button at the top of the properties panel does the same Now easyGUI displays the LanguageText 0 structure which is very simple just a single text item Note that the X and Y coordinates are merely set to relative and 0 0 This means that the position of the text is solely determined by the calling structure which sets it to 176 45 The attentive reader has perhaps now noted that the text is not shown at 0 0 but rather some distance down and to the right If it was displayed at 0 0 it would look like assSii auti because Y 0 refers to the base line of the text placing almost all of the text outside the display area But instead it is shown as English Much more readable but how Well easyGUI checks if the first item in a structure has relative coordinates If so as is the case here both for X and Y it sets the starting coordinate value to the
103. E EE E EEE AE E Ee 223 GUICOMSEMINT 16S e 223 GUICOnSt INT TOU ure etm rer EEE EAER 223 CiU ee P c PH 223 G iConst INT24U ne eren eem ette nde ep ei 223 GUICOnSt IINT32S iuter perte ete ap ORI PR ER 223 CIO Eo p ES Dc 223 GUICONSINTCOLOR qe 224 assSii aul GuiConst ITEM BUTTON INUSE 2t cenae ten tetur ento enean enint 224 GuiConst ITEM CHECKBOX INUSE ccena euet renean eurn eu etant rne nnn 224 GuiConst ITEM GRAPHICS LAYER FILTER INUSE eene 224 GuiConst ITEM 4GRAPH INUSE einn cette tnr inor berita esnias iaioak Ends 224 GuiConst ITEM PANEL INUSE 2 eret een eterno terae iaaeaie bnt Pens 224 GuiConst ITEM RADIOBUTTON INUSE esee nennen enne nennen 225 GuiCornist ITEM SCROLELBOX IINUSE 2 etuer tp etant antur rta rb retenta 225 GUICONST ITEM STRUCTCOND INUS E nosene titer tette terr in eren rtr Pert AS 225 auiConst ITEM TEXTBEOCK INUSE itae Ene orto reete Peer ree tria 225 GuiConst ITEM TOUCHAREA INUSE eren ener aoise nsen sasesana 225 GuiConst KEIL COMPILER REENTRANT ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeenennen nennen nenne nnne nnne nennen enne 225 GuiConst LANGUAGE ACTIVE QCNT uo sccccsssscssssessscssssescesssecsssseceessecsesscesseesessessenssesseees 226 GuiConst LANGUAGE ALL ACTIVE eeeeeeeeeeeeee neenon tnn rnt tnihi tnnt tn iint tn sen
104. E version e Color via palette index Can be used with 4 bpp 16 colors and 8 bpp 256 colors color depths Each pixel on the display contains an index value used by the display controller to look up the color in a palette table easyGUI constructs the palette table based on the settings in this window when generating c files for the target The easyGUI palette table must be transferred to the display controller at target system startup e Direct RGB color Can be used with from 8 bpp 256 colors to 24 bpp 16 million colors color depths Each pixel on the display contains a direct color value with RGB values Red Green and Blue for the color Color depth panel Only lll COLOR and UNICODE versions Defines the number of colors on the display Can be e 1 bit B W Monochrome display mode with only Pixel ON and Pixel OFF capability This is the native mode of easyGUI MONOCHROMIE version e 2bit 4 gray levels Can show white light gray dark gray and black pixels e 4bit 16 palette entries gray levels Can show 16 shades of gray ranging from white to black or 16 colors via a palette with each color freely selectable e 5 bit 32 palette entries gray levels Can show 32 shades of gray ranging from white to black This mode is special to the ST7529 display controller e 8 bit 256 palette entries colors gray levels Can show 256 shades of gray ranging from white to black or 256 colors via a palette with ea
105. EROR AUN 216 GuiConst COLOR MODE PALETTE ritiro HERE PE ERREUR ede 216 GuiConst COLOR MODE RGB essere nennen ether etnies enint nennen 216 GuiConst COLOR PLANES 1 47th trs etre v ee RE ERE REA settee 216 GuiConst COLOR PLANES 2 essere enne nnne nn NE ONTE enne ninth innen ETETE nnns 216 GuiConst COLOR RGB STANDARD cccsssssessessssssssscsscssessessecsesessssecseceeessessesessaesaesareesenses 216 GuiConst COLOR SIZE Ei iem i ia HE RE WEE Gea HERES HET ia E 217 GuiConst COLORCODING B_MASK ccscscsccssssssssecescssessessscseesssssecseceeessesseseesesssasseresesenses 217 GuiConst COLORCODING B MAX cseseeeeeeeenen nennen nennen nnne rnit snnt nn inns tnt nn inns 217 assSii aul GuiConst COEORCODING B SIZE enitn tnter aine ia nii 217 GuiConst COLORCODING B START eeeeeeeeeeeeee neenon tne tnsetnt tni tn tts ania inis 217 GuiConst COLORCODING G MASK eseeseeseeeeeeenenennennen eene nn enne 217 GuiConst COLORCODING G MAX nennen nne nn nennen innen nennen innen 217 GuiConst COLORCODING G SIZE iini er etuer caute tr tetur heater in Enden 218 GuiConst COLORCODING G START seissecssecsessesvievecssasessescctedossveiceasasesctvsssedcsesossestosssedevses sates 218 GuiConst COLORCODINQG MASK erret rnnt eerta puoi tat ntb arae dt tono ra aea ne tpe prata ann 218 GuiConst COLORCODING R MASK 9 itinere reete tetro rie detener in eie rrr SENS NES 218 G
106. EasyiliGUIl Graphical User Interface Tool for Embedded Systems User Manual Version 6 3 0 Revision A A product from IBIS Solutions IBIS Solutions ApS Torvevangen 24 DK 4550 Asnaes Denmark Phone 45 7022 0495 Fax 45 7023 0495 VAT No DK 27 06 03 07 www easygui com sales ibissolutions com Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS assSiiaGuIl TABLE OF CONTENTS PREFACE eI 16 INSTALLA DIDNL a riscnuysabROREEFERKxENMSCNERREAU ERO RRRKEESURRCNRV SUMMER VERERKRENRSKNREAPAPSRREREMEVKE SERES Y RATS 17 installation vesescsscsesetssessuccevevesessesssusceecevcssesseusseveosesdesssescvbuceessassseensboucuevsassseunsuvesessesstusssbussssesssseuese 17 E CIUBEIe dcl cies doveoades 17 INTRODUCTION ires bor MIDENREECUveE EP M ExIE Ea sien i I NN EU PE c MU I IU tren 19 How does It Work oot rrr bevor eurer vere r nr r err r o ere E b vuvvevP leve P uve e Enen a VF vveveve erra VV s aet 19 IDDIPIIE 20 MENUS CR CERERI TERTII EQ E QE DOTEM 21 BasicatileTbctlobis one a E E e EUR D EC i Ie EN DIEI EE LITE 22 ee ATEN FUNCIONS naeran nana A TE TD T m 23 Project TU CHOTIS onere RERO EET ET EORR ERREUR HEP 23 C code eeperati ls sese et HIR i HUE E DEM ME cere eee cree re 23 Import PexpOFt cr ret pep e PE e PERENNE at E IINE EE ee nes 23 gl gp P M H 24 PONE
107. FORMAT usce ER 236 GuiLib FORMAT TIME MMSS cscsscssssssssscsscsscssessecsscssessssseseeessessecseseesssessesesesssassereeesenees 236 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 12 AMPM ener 236 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 12 amqprm ssseseeeeeeeeenenrnne nnne nennen nnne nnne enn tn nnne 236 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 24 nnne nn ennt en ennt nnn n 237 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 12 _AMPM cccccsccsscssscesscesscesscesscesscescesscescesscesseeseeenees 237 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 12 ampqpm sssseseseeeeeeeeeneenennenne nennen nnne enne enne ennn 237 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 24 ccccsccescssssssesscsscssessessecseesssssecesesessesseseessassnessresesenses 237 GuiLib LANGUAGE TEXTDIR LEFTTORIGHT cccccsscssscssscesscesscesscesscesscesecessceseeeseeeseeesees 237 GuiLib LANGUAGE TEXTDIR RIGHTTOLEFT esee ener nnne nnne nnn 237 enmiiumexsoltole E 237 Guilb INO CURSOR E M 238 GuiLIb_RADIOBUTTON_OFF c cccscsscssssssesscsscssesssessceecssessessecsessssssessesesessesseseesesesnsseresesenses 238 GuiLib_NO_RESET_AUTO_REDRAW cccccsscssscssscesscesscesscesecesscesecesscesscesscesecesseesseeseeeseeenees 238 GuiLib PS NOCHANGE nnne rri per A Pe ERE REESE PURA ONTE 238 GuiLib PS NEUM us REPRE ERE RR RR RHET 238 Else a 238 assSiioaul CNN PSION PR 238 GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW eeeseeeeeee ener nnne nnne a 239 Gui
108. Full declaration Input Output Returns touch area No corresponding to the supplied coordinates If no touch area is found at coordinates 1 is returned Touch coordinates are converted to display coordinates if conversion parameters have been set with the GuiLib_TouchAdjustSet function GuiConst_INT32S GuiLib TouchCheck GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y Touch position in touch interface coordinates 1 No touch area found gt 0 Touch area No GuiLib TouchGet Purpose Full declaration Input Output Performs the same action as GuiLib TouchCheck and additionally returns touch coordinates in display coordinates Returns touch area No corresponding to the supplied coordinates If no touch area is found at coordinates 1 is returned Touch coordinates are converted to display coordinates if conversion parameters have been set with the GuiLib TouchAdjustSet function OBS If no conversion parameters have been set with the GuiLib_TouchAdjustSet function the calculated touch coordinates in display coordinates will be TouchX X and TouchY Y GuiConst_INT32S GuiLib TouchGet GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT16S Touchx GuiConst INT16S TouchY X Y Touch position in touch interface coordinates TouchX TouchY Addresses of the variables where touch coordinates converted to display coordinates will be stored 1 No touch area found gt 0 Touch area No assSii aul
109. Graphics filter items As these two item types are interconnected they are explained here in common A Graphics layer filter pair works by defining a part of the screen for pixel manipulations The Graphics layer defines the screen area and how to prepare it The Graphics filter then defines how to blend pixel data from various layers and where to put the result There can be more than one Graphics layer item before a Graphics filter item but at least one Graphics layer must be defined otherwise the Graphics filter item does not make sense Similarly a Graphics filter item without a Graphics layer item is not meaningful Each Graphics layer has its own drawing canvas in memory separate from normal display buffer memory Graphics layers can thus take up considerable amounts of memory The memory layout of Graphics layer canvases is identical to normal display buffer memory only the size may differ depending on the definition of the Graphics layer areas In the target system the pixel level manipulation is performed through a user defined call back function which must be set up library function GuiLib GraphicsFilter Init before showing the structure containing the Graphics layer filter items The easyGUI library then calls the call back function when executing the Graphics filter item The call back function may do anything to the graphical data in the assigned area of the screen like e g combining data from the input and output layers a
110. GuiGraph32 c Include file with graphical library for 2 bpp grayscale displays with horizontal display bytes Include file with graphical library for 2 bpp grayscale displays with vertical display bytes Include file with graphical library for 2 bpp grayscale displays with horizontal display bytes and two bit planes Include file with graphical library for 2 bpp grayscale displays with vertical display bytes and two bit planes Include file with graphical library for 4 bpp grayscale color displays with horizontal display bytes Include file with graphical library for 4 bpp grayscale color displays with vertical display bytes Include file with graphical library for 5 bpp grayscale displays Include file with graphical library for 8 bpp grayscale color displays Include file with graphical library for 12 15 16 bpp color displays Include file with graphical library for 18 24 bpp color displays Include file with graphical library for 32 bpp color displays I MONOCHROME version Only the monochrome graphical library files GuiGraphlH c and GuiGraph1V c are part of the installation not the 2 bpp and higher GuiGraphxx c files Only the GuiGraphXXx c file actually used in the target system project need to be copied Which file to select depends on the color mode color depth and display controller settings The GuiDisplay unit contains all the display drivers currently available It is advisable to delete all unused drivers in GuiDis
111. IGNED INT eene enne nennen enhn nnne nn nnns 242 E e RET 242 GuiLib_ActiveCursorFieldNO eese nennen enne nennen trinis nnne 242 GUILID lt CUPSEFUCTUFE NOX ERE 242 GuiLib DisplayUpsideDoOwin sese nnnn eene nnenrnne nennen 242 GuiLib Languagelndex eseseeeeeeeeeee eene nee nn ennt tnter tre tn ttn tinte ene tn tinent teen einen ena 242 GuiLib RemoteDataReadBloOCcK eee nnne nnne nennen entren tn sinn 243 GuiLib RemoteTextReadbBloCK eee nnnie nnne n nns 243 FUNCIONS e O 243 GuiLib AccentuatePixelColor eese eene nenne nnne nnne nennen nnn 243 GUILIb AccentuateRgbCOolOE uere r re ere i a EH EXER Te EIE TEE AE IEEE TK TRE TRE 243 GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedltem eese nennen nnne nennen nnne nnne nnn 244 GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedltemsStop eese nne nn ennt tns en enne 244 GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedltemUpdate sessi enne nnne nnne nnne nnn 245 Gulblib BliniKBOXStalt ioter tee eet rer eere tete terreat eret eot p teet e ates pest tel eite 245 Gulilib BlinkBOXStOp s 3 icrne eese crier rr eter tectae terae rae aee neo recae enia eere RR ein 245 GUILID BorderBOX cinis noti ttiv te uf reb i ee 246 GUID BOX 6 MT 246 GuiLib BrightenPixelColor eese eene nennen tnnt nnne tne nn tnnt nntn einen ennt t
112. INDOW This window defines basic parameters in a project relating to display and compiler The parameters are subdivided into six tabbed pages grouping the parameters logically The pages are explained in the following sections A unit used extensively from this point is bpp or Bits Per Pixel This parameter is a measure of the color depth of the display system easyGUI can handle the following color depths 1 bpp 2 bpp 4 bpp 5 bpp 8 bpp 12 bpp 15 bpp 16 bpp 18 bpp 24 bpp 32 bpp Monochrome Grayscale Grayscale color Grayscale Grayscale color Color Color Color Color Color Color Each pixel is either turned on or off 4 shades of gray 16 shades of gray or 16 colors 32 shades of gray A special mode currently only used by the ST7529 display controller 256 shades of gray or 256 colors 4096 colors 32768 colors 65536 colors 262144 colors 16777216 colors Same as TrueColor in Windows 16777216 colors plus 256 levels of transparency Transparency is a future option in easyGUI but the 32 bit color depth is necessary for displays supporting an alpha channel transparency I MONOCHROME version handles only 1 bpp 4 eaSSiiIQGUI 3 BASICS j Display controller Color Simulated display Compiler Operation Project Project name Tutorial File name ENeasyGUINTutorial Tutorial gui Display Display width 240 Display height i28 Ac
113. INT16S AX2 GuiConst INT16S AY2 GuiConst INT32S TranspColor Input Bitmap index in GuiStruct_BitmapPtrList Coordinates for upper left corner assSiiaGul Output Related functions Absolute coordinates for upper left and lower right corner of displayed area Transparent background color 1 means no transparency None GuiLib ShowBitmap GuiLib ShowBitmapAreaAt GuiLib ShowBitmapAt GuiLib ShowBitmapAreaAt Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Displays part of a bitmap located a specific address Removed if bitmap support is disabled void GuiLib ShowBitmapAreaAt GuiConst INT8U BitmapPtr GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT16S AXI GuiConst INT16S AYI1 GuiConst INT16S AX2 GuiConst INT16S AY2 GuiConst INT32S TranspColor Pointer to memory area Coordinates for upper left corner Absolute coordinates for upper left and lower right corner of displayed area Transparent background color 1 means no transparency None GuiLib ShowBitmap GuiLib ShowBitmapArea GuiLib ShowBitmapAt GuiLib ShowBitmapAt Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Displays a bitmap located a specific address Removed if bitmap support is disabled void GuiLib ShowBitmapAt GuiConst INT8U BitmapPtr GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT32S TranspColor Pointer to memory area Coordinates for upper left cor
114. Lib GetTextWidth GuiLib GetTextWidth Purpose Full declaration Input Returns width of text in pixels GuiConst INT16U GuiLib GetTextWidth char String GuiLib FontRecConstPtr Font GuiConst INT8U PsWriting Pointer to text string Pointer to easyGUI font Proportional writing Can be e GuiLib PS OFF turns off proportional writing EasvilliGUIi e GuiLib PS ON turns on proportional writing e GuiLib PS NUM uses numerical proportional writing Output Width of text in pixels returns zero if an error is encountered Related functions GuiLib GetTextLanguagePtr GuiLib GetTextPtr GuiLib Graph AddDataPoint Purpose Adds a data point to a data set The data set must have sufficient space for the new data point Nothing is drawn in this function Remarks Used only for Graph items Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph AddDataPoint GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U DataSetIndex GuiConst INT32S DataPointx GuiConst INT32S DataPointY Input GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based DataSetIndex Index of data set in the graph index is zero based DataPointX DataPointy The data point Output Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 Related functions Lib Graph AddDataSet Lib Graph DrawDataPoint Lib Graph DrawDataSet Lib Graph HideDataSet Lib Graph Redraw Lib Graph RemoveDataSet Lib Graph ShowDataSet H H H H p H H G G G Gu G G G
115. Lib TEXTBOX SCROLL ABOVE HOM EE sseeeeeeennnn nennen enne nnne nnne nnne nnns 239 Guilib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT END 5 5 rore rue Fra etas eros EU ien Ei iai 239 GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT HOM EE eeeeeeeeeenennenennn nennen nenne nnne nnns innen sensn nni nnns 239 GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL BELOW END eeeeeeneenennennnnennnnnnnn nnne nnne nnne 239 GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL ILLEGAL NDX eeeseeeeeeeeeene nennen ene ener nnns 239 GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL INSIDE BLOCK eese nnne nne nnne nnn nnn n 240 GuiLib_TRANSPARENT_OFF s sssssssssssssssssscsssssssssesesessessesssesssssesseseesssessestesnsestsssesteessestsstsss 240 GuiLIb TRANSPARENT ON iiti RE nant re CR ee WES sir iu 240 GUIEIb UNDEREINECOEE cct tier ei tu er eie ette p DTE TO 240 GUILIBLUNDERLINE ON DR 240 CUTE VARY BOO Ls E 240 Guibib VARIDOUBLE ert er Oe TREE REA TUER TITRE 240 eom dor y Ea 241 GuiLib VAR SIGNED CHAR cccscsscscsscsssesscsscsscssssseceecesessssseseessssssesseseesssssseseeseaseassaeeeesenses 241 GuiLib VAR SIGNED LONQG sees nennen nnne nnne nn ennt nne tn ennt s tenete stint s innen 241 GuiLib VAR SIGNED INT esee enne nnne nnne nnne tnihi rnit n tenete stain inne tnn na 241 Guibib VARSTRING itis PERI RR REN REGN IRRINU 241 GuiLib VAR UNSIGNED CHAR enit re ERE RERO CURES 241 GuiLib VAR UNSIGNED LONG esee nnne nnne E AR enenatis nennen 241 GuiLib VAR UNS
116. M EBENEN X This system ensures nice proportional writing with a fast calculation routine without demanding excessive resources from the target system by employing e g kerning tables Fixed character width A special Fixed character width flag can be set individually for each character in the system This can be used for characters with inherent fixed width as used in e g some Asian fonts when writing Western style characters The character width is then defined as the dimension from the leftmost PS mark to the rightmost PS mark A text string starting with a fixed width character includes eventual whitespace in that character cell as opposed to normal proportional writing where eventual white space is disregarded for the initial character in a string ensuring that the text always starts at the initial pixel position Examples The text Inner with two definitions of the I character one with a normal I EasvilliGUIi I character definition Text rendering DX aX and one with a fixed width I I character definition Text rendering P q H gt q E P g q Di lt D q In the latter case the I character starts three pixels into the text field because of the fixed width setting Font st
117. N M 272 GUID IHVErt BOX der O E 273 GuiLib InvertBOXStart esses enne enne nnne nnns nnne etnies isis innen tinere enne 273 Guilib InvertBOXStOD 3 ree ern irent re tenter eicere oen dre Eae eet ed ea Rene ege eva ide Ree e de aiai 273 GuiLib IsCursorFieldInUse esee nnne ene nnns teni Ernis 273 GUILD LIFT acest tet ch bpm eher dime 274 OTT IM opal Bn 127 8 9 9 eeaeee nn OR E ETE 274 GuiLib_MarkDisplayBOxRepaint eese nette ennt nnne nnne nennen ennt nn ene 275 assSii aul GuiLib PixelColorToGrayScale eese nete tnnt nennt tnter trennen enne 275 GuiLib PixelToRgbColor esee nennen nennen nennen nennen enne nene 275 Guilib RadToDeg eh ree e eei n ER evi eR De dr ee LE nen 275 CSUN EIC UD EE 276 G lbib RemoteCheck sosedo enaa ee ae eret eem ono E re Lee re frc LET 276 GuiLib ResetClippihng uu oie enr eR eie err PE ein eren 276 GuiLib ResetDisplayRepaint esee nnne nennen nnne nennen trennen nnne nent 276 GuiLib RgbColorToGrayScale sees nn enne tnter tnn en snnt 277 GuiLib RgbToPixelColor ninine nosini nn n nennen enne Naa N tn tnnt entente enne 277 G lbib ScFollBOXSCIOSeni scie E cM acre tyre events E A ESENS 277 Guibib ScrollBOx DOWULDss niat otii etu ee Ott OT DTE TUE 278 ETT To ScrollBOX Ema eL PES O M a
118. No GuiConst INT16S LastByte GuiConst_INT16S N Lock GUI resources GuiDisplay Lock Walk through all lines 4 eaSSiIiQGUI for LineNo 0 LineNo lt GuiConst BYTE LINES LineNo if GuiLib DisplayRepaint LineNo ByteEnd 0 Something to redraw in this line if GuiLib DisplayRepaint LineNo ByteBegin lt GuiConst BYTES PR SECTION Something to redraw in first section Select controller ControllerSelect 1 Set address Pointer Some display controller specific code Write display data Some display controller specific code Reset repaint parameters if GuiLib DisplayRepaint LineNo ByteEnd GuiConst BYTES PR SECTION Something to redraw in second section GuiLib DisplayRepaint LineNo ByteBegin GuiConst BYTES PR SECTION else Done with this line GuiLib DisplayRepaint LineNo ByteEnd 1 if GuiLib DisplayRepaint LineNo ByteEnd gt 0 Something to redraw in second section Select controller ControllerSelect 2 Set address Pointer Some display controller specific code Write display data Some display controller specific code Reset repaint parameters GuiLib DisplayRepaint LineNo ByteEnd 1 Finished drawing ControllerSelect 0 Free GUI resources GuiDisplay Unlock Iq e6jiBI5 Copyright 1999 2015 IBI
119. No change Undetlining Result Proportional Background box Width et E Height above baseline 0 amp Bii Height below baseline o ei font height I Blinking text field Foreground color Proportional writing is one of the main advantages of using easyGUI it assures a much more modern and professional looking user interface than can be achieved with traditional character based display modes where all characters are placed at fixed coordinates lines and positions The pump must be adjusted WITH TUBE WITH NUMBERS E O5 Solutions select adjust procedure Esc Abo rt Copyright O 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS assSii aul Big texts small texts Our splash example uses two different text fonts A fat one for the Graphical User Interface text and a small compressed one for the making graphical eaae uy Graphical User Interface Tool for Embedded Systems making graphical user interfaces has never been easier Version 1 23 Fonts can be mixed freely in each structure but the memory requirements on the target system will of course rise if many different fonts are employed Don t use too many different fonts because that will only result in a messy user interface It is better to select a specific font for headlines one for normal text and so on Another good reason not to use overly many fonts is ROM memory usage unless your resources are unlimited S
120. OFF 0 GuiLib TRANSPARENT ON Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be written with background painting enabled Full declaration define GuiLib TRANSPARENT ON 1 GuiLib UNDERLINE OFF Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be written without underlining Full declaration define GuiLib UNDERLINE OFF 0 GuiLib_UNDERLINE_ON Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be written with underlining Full declaration define GuiLib UNDERLINE ON 1 GuiLib VAR BOOL Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type boolean 8 bit signed unsigned value zero regarded as false all other values regarded as true Full declaration define GuiLib VAR BOOL 0 GuiLib VAR DOUBLE Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type double Full declaration define GuiLib VAR DOUBLE 8 assSii aul GuiLib VAR FLOAT Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type float Full declaration define GuiLib VAR FLOAT 7 GuiLib VAR SIGNED CHAR Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type signed char 8 bit signed Full declaration define GuiLib VAR SIGNED CHAR 2 GuiLib VAR SIGNED LONG Purpose Used in GuiLib DrawVar function call Variable to show is of type signed long 32 bit signed Full declaration define GuiLib VAR SIGNED LONG 6
121. PixelColor GuiConst INTCOLOR PixelColor GuiConst INT16U Amount Input Encoded pixel color value Darken value 0 100096o Output Encoded pixel color value Related functions GuiLib AccentuatePixelColor GuiLib AccentuateRgbColor GuiLib BrightenPixelColor GuiLib BrightenRgbColor GuiLib DarkenRgbColor GuiLib DarkenRgbColor Purpose Darkens RGB color 0 100096e 100096o results in pure black Full declaration GuiConst INT32U GuiLib DarkenRgbColor GuiConst INT32U RgbColor GuiConst INT16U Amount Input 24 bit RGB color value Darken value 0 100096o Output 24 bit RGB color value Related functions GuiLib AccentuatePixelColor GuiLib AccentuateRgbColor GuiLib BrightenPixelColor GuiLib BrightenRgbColor assSii aul GuiLib DarkenPixelColor GuiLib DegToRad Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiLib Dot Purpose Full declaration Input Output Converts angle from degrees to radians factored GuiConst INT32S GuiLib DegToRad GuiConst INT32S Angle Angle in degrees 10 1 10 Angle in radians 4096 1 rad 4096 GuiLib RadToDeg GuiLib SinRad GuiLib SinDeg GuiLib CosRad GuiLib CosDeg Draws a single pixel void GuiLib Dot GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INTCOLOR Color Coordinates Color None GuiLib DrawChar Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Draws
122. Proportional writing All fonts can be used for proportional writing There are three styles of writing e Fixed spacing All characters are written with the same fixed width equal to the font width Courier style e Proportional spacing All characters are written with a width depending on the character size and how it fits together with the previous character e Numerical proportional spacing As proportional writing except that the characters 0 9 pn ene 7 and space are written with fixed spacing This writing style can be used when writing numerical values especially in columns For each character a number of proportional spacing marks are defined These PS marks are used when calculating horizontal character placements in proportional writing style E g a capital F Pi it ttt ik SRE ERE EE ERE ER um mi q EN PT tt tT Yt 5 gt EE EN EN EN gt lt X There are five horizontal pairs of PS marks one on Top Line one on Mid Line one midway between Mid Line and Base Line one on Base Line and finally one pair 2 3 the way from Base Line to the bottom of the character cell Each PS pair contains a left PS mark and a right PS mark The PS marks can be placed individually horizontally for each character in the font When two characters shall be written next to each other propo
123. RACTERS A quick way of deselecting everything before possibly selecting some characters JIS X 0208 characters Characters included in the JIS X 0208 standard are selected shift JIS characters Characters included in the shift JIS standard are selected Joyo characters Characters included in the Joyo standard are selected Arabic characters Arabic characters are selected Selecting Arabic characters manually is difficult as unlike other character sets Arabic characters are spread over several Unicode character ranges Always use this check box when using Arabic characters For further information see appendix E Arabic character set The methods are additive If one of the methods selects a character the character will be included in the target system data no matter how the other methods threat the character This means that selecting all characters through the All characters in font setting makes the other methods redundant JIS X 0208 shift JIS Joyo and Arabic character sets are listed in the character set appendices in a separate document accompanying this manual If a character specified for writing isn t defined in the font or isn t selected for the target system it is shown as a filled out block with the size of the font character cell View filter In order to get an overview of the selection state the characters shown in the character set can be filtered using the settings in the Character view filter box e All
124. RgbColor 24 bit RGB color 8 bit blue color component GuiLib GetGreenRgbColor GuiLib GetRedRgbColor GuiLib SetBlueRgbColor GuiLib SetGreenRgbColor GuiLib SetRedRgbColor GuiLib GetCharCode Purpose Full declaration Input Returns character code from an item string GuiConst TEXT GuiLib GetCharCode const GuiConst INT16U StructureNdx GuiConst INT16U TextNo GuiConst INT16U CharNo GuiConst INT16U OmitCtrlCode Structure ID Text No O is first text in the structure items other than Text and Paragraph are ignored Character number Index 1 is first character OmitCtrlCode if true hard and soft line breaks will be excluded in the character number count Hard line breaks are OxOA codes Soft line breaks are space and characters if at the end of a line assSii aul Output Related functions GuiLib GetDot Purpose Full declaration Input Output Character code None Returns the color of a single pixel GuiConst INTCOLOR GuiLib GetDot GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y Coodinates Color GuiLib GetGreenRgbColor Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Extracts green component from RGB color GuiConst INT8U GuiLib GetGreenRgbColor GuiConst INT32U RgbColor 24 bit RGB color 8 bit green color component GuiLib GetBlueRgbColor GuiLib GetRedRgbColor GuiLib SetBlueRgbColor GuiLib SetGreenRgbColor GuiLib SetRedRgbCol
125. S Solutions ApS 161 Solutions E asviliGUIi The display data writing is divided into two parts one for each controller and the controller is selected by a ControllerSelect char index function which sets some ports to enable and disable the controllers as required Bypassing the internal RAM display buffer The internal display buffer in RAM can be bypassed if the display controller buffer is directly mapped into microcontroller memory space and a significant amount of RAM thus saved As the easyGUI internal display buffer is organized exactly as the display controller RAM it is possible to edit the easyGUI library so that the declaration for the internal buffer is placed at the display controller buffer RAM location through e g a Pragma directive the exact syntax depends on the compiler in use The easyGUI internal display buffer called GuiLib DisplayBuf is declared at the top of the GuiGraphXX c file xx depends on the color depth and byte orientation The display driver update routine GuiDisplay Refresh in GuiDisplay c is then reduced to nothing as there is no longer any data to transfer from internal buffer to display controller buffer Observe however that the function should not be deleted but merely made empty as it is called from the easyGUI library The reason for the intermediate buffer in easyGUI is two fold Both reasons are rooted in the fact that an easyGUI structure can consist of many parts which more or less overlap
126. Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item The icon is the character from font ANSI 2 Function calls in the target system A number of functions control Scroll box behavior in the easyGUI library After issuing the usual GuiLib ShowScreen GuiStruct ScreenScrollDemo Def GuiLib NO CURSOR GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW GuiLib Refresh function call in order to display the Scroll box item structure it can be observed that nothing is painted This is not an error To paint the scroll box an additional function call must be used GuiLib ShowScreen GuiStruct ScreenScrollDemo Def GuiLib NO CURSOR GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW GuiLib ScrollBox Init 0 amp DemoScrollLine 20 0 GuiLib Refresh in this case initializing scroll box No 0 index defined in the Structure editor with a call back function named DemoScrollLine 20 lines in total and line zero as the initially active line 1 denotes a scroll box with invisible scroll line And the call back function On the target system easyGUI must be told what to display in each individual scroll line This is accomplished by defining a call back function which easyGUI can call each time it needs to render a scroll line The function can be named freely in this example it is called DemoScrollLine void DemoScrollLine GuiConst INT16S LineIndex
127. SetXAxisRange iLib Graph SetYAxisRange iLib Graph ShowXAxis iLib Graph ShowYAxis QAANAAAAAAAAAA H H H H H H H H H H H GuiLib_Graph_ResetYAxisOrigin Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Resets the Y axis origin to the original origin Useful for resetting dynamic graphs with moving Y axis Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph ResetYAxisOrigin GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8S AxisIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based AxisIndex Index of Y axis in the graph index is zero based Index 1 will reset all defined Y axes Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 GuiLib Graph DrawAxes GuiLib Graph HideXAxis GuiLib Graph HideYAxis GuiLib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin assSiioaul iLib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin iLib Graph Redraw iLib Graph ResetXAxisOrigin iLib Graph SetXAxisRange iLib Graph SetYAxisRange iLib Graph ShowXAxis iLib Graph ShowYAxis ANAON QAQA H H H H H H H GuiLib_Graph_ShowDataSet Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Marks a data set as visible Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph ShowDataSet GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U DataSetIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based DataSetIndex Ind
128. T8U LinePattern GuiConst INTCOLOR Color Input Coordinates Line pattern A pattern of 8 pixels can be set This pattern is then repeated as needed in order to draw the line Color Output None Related functions GuiLib HLine GuiLib Line GuiLib VLine EasvilliGUIi GuiLib_MarkDisplayBoxRepaint Purpose Sets the repainting scan line markers indicating that all pixels inside the specified rectangle must be repainted The display bytes covering this rectangle will be sent to the display controller next time the display is refreshed Full declaration void GuiLib MarkDisplayBoxRepaint GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst_INT16S X2 GuiConst INT16S Y2 Input Rectangle coordinates Output None Related functions GuiLib ResetDisplayRepaint GuiLib PixelColorToGrayScale Purpose Translates from pixel value for display controller color setup to 0 255 gray scale value Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib PixelColorToGrayScale GuiConst INTCOLOR PixelColor Input Encoded pixel color value Output Gray scale value 0 255 Related functions GuiLib GrayScaleToPixelColor GuiLib PixelToRgbColor Purpose Translates from pixel value for display controller color setup to RGB color Full declaration GuiConst INT32U GuiLib PixelToRgbColor GuiConst INTCOLOR PixelColor Input Encoded pixel color value Output RGB color value 32 bit 24 bits used low byte Red middle
129. TDIR LEFTTORIGHT Purpose Used for text displaying Text is shown with characters written from left to right Western languages style Full declaration define GuiLib LANGUAGE TEXTDIR LEFTTORIGHT 0 GuiLib LANGUAGE TEXTDIR RIGHTTOLEFT Purpose Used for text displaying Text is shown with characters written from right to left Arabic languages style Full declaration define GuiLib LANGUAGE TEXTDIR RIGHTTOLEFT 1 GuiLib NO COLOR Purpose Used in GuiLib Circle and GuiLib Ellipse function calls For border color Indicates that the border has same color as the interior part of the circle ellipse For interior filling color Indicates that the interior is transparent Full declaration define GuiLib NO COLOR 0x10000000 assSii auti GuiLib NO CURSOR Purpose Used in GuiLib ShowScreen function call No cursor should be displayed Full declaration define GuiLib NO CURSOR 1 GuiLib RADIOBUTTON OFF Purpose Used in variables that control the state of a Radio button item to indicate that none of the radio icons should be selected Full declaration define GuiLib RADIOBUTTON OFF 1 GuiLib NO RESET AUTO REDRAW Purpose Used in GuiLib ShowScreen function call Auto redraw items from previously shown structures shall be maintained Full declaration define GuiLib NO RESET AUTO REDRAW 0 GuiLib PS NOCHANGE Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be wr
130. TS The display area shown in the simulator is a standard Windows image component It can be placed anywhere in the form just like any other visual component How this is done depends on which development system C Builder Visual Studio etc is being using The zoom ration of the simulated display can be changed if desired It is controlled by the DisplayZoom constant defined in GuiDisplay cpp As default it is set to 2 i e each embedded display pixel is shown as a 2x2 square on the PC display because pixels on a typical PC screen are much smaller than typical embedded display pixels LIMITATIONS Simple target system applications can usually be run on the PC environment without major changes However hardware specific operations are of course not possible on the PC If the goal is to run the complete target system on the PC for demonstration and or simulation purposes it will therefore be necessary to mask out or simulate the action of hardware in the normal target system This is most conveniently accomplished by the use of compiler directives in the target system source code A well designed target system application with simulation of hardware specific routines can be a great asset when debugging and testing the target system and for demo evaluation purposes EasyiliGUl 19 FURTHER READING AND SUPPORT If you are unable to find the information that you need in this manual there are some online resources available to help you ge
131. UICONSE COLORCODING R MAX triente e Eee et orant rre aN p Perna o ree N NES 218 GuiConst COLORCODIN QG RSIZE iirtt riter rente tenter rente rne nn 218 GUICONSE_COLORCODING R START cente fe re er tera e e In N nn en reni a a Pede 218 GuiConst CONTROLLER COUNT HORZ seen enne nennen enne enne 218 GuiConst CONTROLLER COUNT VERT eeseeeeeeeeeenenennen enn enint nnennnn 219 amp uiConst CURSOR FIELDS ORE ere terre inttr t re ree re ERE 219 GuiConst CURSOR MODE STOP TOP wee cecccsecsesescesecsecssssesesecessesessesassesseseessseseseeseeses 219 GuiConst CURSOR MODE WRAP AROUND eee nn nnne 219 GuiConst CURSOR SUPPORT ON un ica taut eaten riu ri tuens uei innu n tuetur 219 GUICONSE DECIMAL COM YVIA s ineunda f cete ri t tenore otra reb aen onu reatu eben 219 GUIGONSE DECIMAL PERIOD rris en etre tetra eter er ineo Pee Een 219 GuiConst DISPEAY ACTIVE AREA ictor teet enero ienis asie 219 GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA CLIPPING eeseeeeeeeeeenennnenennennen nennen nennen 220 GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA COO REL eene enne nennen enne 220 GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA X1 netten nnt tnttn tnnt tnt tnt tn senate tinet 220 GUIGONST_DISPEAY ACTIVE AREA Y eerte rr teen teniente eene enn 220 GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA XO2 cisseseeeeeeeeeeene nennen nennen enne ener enne 220 GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA Y2 eese neenon tne tnt tnnt tnt tnt tn senate inet 220
132. UNDERLINE OFF e GuiLib UNDERLINE ON Background box size X Determines the width of a background box Zero means no background box Background box size Y1 Determines the height of a background box measured from the font baseline and up Zero means same height as font height above the baseline Background box size Y2 Determines the height of a background box measured from the font baseline and down Zero means same height as font height below the baseline Border pixels for background box One extra pixel can be added to the background box on each of its edges e GuiLib BBP NONE No extra pixels e GuiLib BBP LEFT One extra pixel on the left edge e GuiLib BBP RIGHT One extra pixel on the right edge e GuiLib BBP TOP One extra pixel on the top edge e GuiLib BBP BOTTOM One extra pixel on the bottom edge The last four settings can be combined like e g GuiLib BBP TOP GuiLib BBP BOTTOM Foreground color Determines the text color assSiiaul Output Related functions GuiLib Ellipse Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiLib FillBox Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Background color Determines the background color if used either for normal background non transparent or background box None GuiLib DrawChar GuiLib DrawStr Draws a filled or framed ellipse with single
133. UNICODE version Selects between ANSI mode 8 bit character codes and Unicode mode 16 bit character codes e Default font All new text items in structures use this font until something else is selected something else than the No change setting e Decimal point character Used when displaying decimal numbers Can be period American style or comma Continental European style Auto redraw panel e Continuous updating All Auto redraw items are continuously updated each time the GuiLib Refresh function is called This is the default setting and the mode used by easyGUI before this Auto redraw mode parameter was implemented IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS Solutions assSii aul e Update on changes Auto redraw items are updated only if the controlling variable variable to be displayed has changed or if the item does not involve a variable not very useful Cursor mode panel e Stops at top bottom When navigating cursor fields on the target system it is not possible to jump from the last cursor field to the first when issuing the cursor down command and vice versa In the Structure editor the selected cursor fields always wrap around when testing the visual behavior e Wraps around The opposite setting when navigating cursor fields on the target system it is possible to jump from the last cursor field to the first when issuing the cursor down command and vice versa Scroll mode panel Se
134. UnitStr and if the value of variable TempUnit is O structure TempUnitStr 0 will be shown if the value is 1 structure TempUnitStr 1 will be shown and if the value is something else nothing will be shown The last situation is not illegal but can be used to great advantage to include or exclude parts of a screen layout based on variables If only a structure named XXX 1 exists but not structure XXX 0 setting the controlling variable to O will show the screen without structure XXX 1 and setting the controlling variable to 1 will show the screen with structure XXX 1 A structure shown dynamically this way can itself contain calls to other dynamic or static structures enabling complex systems to be made in easyGUl controlled by only a few variables in the target system C code The only limits are stack space considerations on the target system and the ability of the programmer to keep a mental picture of the constructs CLASSES Structures can be organized into classes which are simply groups of structures The Class concept is purely for easing the organization of structures and its use is voluntary i e all structures can belong to a single class or any number of classes each containing any number of structures can be created An example could be a class for primary structures a class for sub assembly structures used by primary structures a class for single texts etc 4 eaSSiIQGUI 3 At least one
135. Y Copies the current item or items to the internal easyGUI clipboard allowing it to be pasted into another structure as long as easyGUl is not closed down CLIPBOARD PASTE Pastes the item or items from the internal easyGUI clipboard into the structure before the current item If the current item is the last a selection box is shown offering the item s to be pasted before or after the last item More than one item may be selected by dragging the mouse over the desired items NOT in the grey area to the left of the item list An item or more items may be moved to a new position in the item list by dragging in the grey area to the left of the list The two last columns contain information about saved coordinate positions and special item attributes e g cursor fields making it easier to keep an overview of the situation ITEM PANEL The actual item editing is made in this panel It contains a number of parameter panels organized vertically The number and type of panels depends on the item type but their ordering is fixed Item parameter panels can be displayed in color configurable in the Parameters window Operation tab page Structure editing panel The following parameter panels can be shown Structure hierarchy panel All item types The structure hierarchy panel allows quick movement to connected structures either PARENT STRUCTURE or CHILD STRUCTURE The PARENT STRUCTURE button is active if the current structure was s
136. Y E EE ETUDES EAR FUE Tur DUE 72 Constant declarations pariel recte petet re DD ee PY erento rei en eR ge 73 Special compiler settings panel essent nenne nennen nennen 73 B ultter sizes panel 5 rere nette preme eei pev pie ipe aa Dee iet de Dh t 74 OPEL AtlOM e 75 Text setup panel oo ee eeseeseesescsseeesseceseeseetsnecsnsanseseeeeseassesansesasensseasnesanseaseeasscansesaeacsasessseasneanansseatas 75 Auto redraw panelis ieii eneen a E EA NE EEN E EA A O EN OA EE ESNEA 75 C rs rmo d opp onena ARA EEE EAE T EA 76 Seroll mode panels iet tete ester A R VO E E E RAS 76 Mod le selection panelvan aa E e RE E ANETA 76 Structure editing panel s ssessssssessssssesesrsesrescsceesessesssrsesussencecsessesestessnesestetseoseseststesosescstsessesesestoeese 77 Paragraph patiel epe eee gene re i voe e n REPAS navn E N 77 Bitmaps panel s 77 8 LANGUAGE TRANSLATION WINDOW cccscccssssccsceccccsscecseccsssceccecessesseees 78 9 POSITIONS VU OW a decade cos nd eto neni scniacwenedlictic eciancattdeebsseaensccsisebenusteiecetens 84 10 11 assSii aul VARIABLES WINDOMN iiio eoer a Fea p bao Eno Fe pH Yo EE Ee p PA PREPE Eee o ERE ER OE YEEE GR Cope ES ROPRE Ee ee eiie E oRER EE 85 New Edit Variable esee eese nn ennt tette nntn etnia etnies etate ere insist these entia tantis ere tn sint in ene 86 yore ttes
137. Zero means same height as font height above the baseline Background box size Y2 Determines the height of a background box measured from the font baseline and down Zero means same height as font height below the baseline Border pixels for background box One extra pixel can be added to the background box on each of its edges e GuiLib BBP NONE No extra pixels e GuiLib BBP LEFT One extra pixel on the left edge e GuiLib BBP RIGHT One extra pixel on the right edge e GuiLib BBP TOP One extra pixel on the top edge e GuiLib BBP BOTTOM One extra pixel on the bottom edge The last four settings can be combined like e g GuiLib BBP TOP GuiLib BBP BOTTOM Foreground color Determines the text color Background color Determines the background color if used either for normal background non transparent or background box None GuiLib DrawChar GuiLib DrawVar Draws a formatted variable on the display ANSI character mode void GuiLib DrawVar GuiConst INT16S X assSiioaul GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT16U FontNo GuiConst INT8S CharSetSelector void VarPtr GuiConst INT8U VarType GuiConst INT8U FormatterFormat GuiConst INT8U FormatterFieldWidth GuiConst INT8U FormatterAlignment GuiConst INT8U FormatterDecimals GuiConst INT8U FormatterShowSign GuiConst INT8U FormatterZeroPadding GuiConst INT8U FormatterTrailingZeros GuiConst INT
138. a single character on the display void GuiLib DrawChar GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT16U FontNo GuiConst CHAR Character GuiConst INTCOLOR Color Coordinates Reference point is the leftmost pixel of the font baseline scan line Font index Character Color None GuiLib DrawStr GuiLib DrawVar assSiiaul GuiLib DrawsStr Purpose Full declaration Input Draws a formatted string on the display ANSI character mode void GuiLib DrawStr GuiCons GuiCons QAADQAAANDAAAAAAAAAA uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons Hd Hi Hi Hi Hi HH H HH HH HH a ET opp foe ee CF DE CK DE DE CT DEC CX CE GE NT16S X NT16S Y NT16U FontNo NT8S CharSetSelector EXT String NT8U Alignment NT8U PsWriting NT8U Transparent NT8U Underlining NT16S BackBoxSizex NT16S BackBoxSizeYl NT16S BackBoxSizeY2 _INT8U BackBorderPixels NTCOLOR ForeColor NTCOLOR BackColor Unicode character mode void GuiLib DrawStr GuiCons QAAQAAAAAAAAAA uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons uiCons I Hd Hi Hi Hi Hi HH LH HH HH H bp Cr oe DP CR UE ee oe DEP XA CE DbE Dp r4 NT16S X NT16S Y INT16U FontNo EXT String NT8U Alignment INT8U PsWriting NT8U Transparent NT8U Underlining NT16S BackBoxSizeX NT16S BackBoxSizeY
139. adBlock function pointer is defined as void GuiLib RemoteDataReadBlock GuiConst_INT32U SourceOffset GuiConst INT32U SourceSize GuiConst INT8U TargetAddr with parameters descriptions SourceOffset indicates offset into the binary data block for the first data byte to read SourceSize indicates the number of bytes to retrieve TargetAddr indicates where to put the retrieved data The GuiLib RemoteDataReadBlock function can use any method desired to retrieve data from the binary data block the method used is irrelevant to the easyGUI library The easyGUI library make as few data block retrievals as possible Code in the target system must declare this function and set up the GuiLib RemoteDataReadBlock function pointer An example is void RemoteDataReadBlock GuiConst INT32U SourceOffset GuiConst INT32U SourceSize GuiConst INT8U TargetAddr memmove TargetAddr amp FormMain pszBuffer SourceOffset SourceSize assSii aul ifdef GuiConst REMOTE DATA GuiLib RemoteDataReadBlock RemoteDataReadBlock OpenBinaryData endif This example is a file based data read where the binary remote data is read directly from a RAM buffer pszBuf fer previously filled with data from the binary file openBinaryData function call Any method of data retrieval from the binary data file GuiRemote bin is possible In many cases the file would be uploaded to target system secondary memory in some sui
140. alls to other structures The Screen Scroll demo 1 structure is an example of using a scroll box item The structure consists of only one scroll box item 4 eaSSIIGUI SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO No Item 1 Scroll line item 12 34 amp Scroll line item It consists of a makeup structure Scroll box makeup 0 defining the surroundings SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO No Item Price a scroll line structure Scroll box line 0 determining the contents of individual scroll lines 99 Scroll line item a scroll bar structure Scroll box bar makeup 0 determining the background of the scroll bar r Fe and finally a scroll indicator structure Scroll box indicator makeup 0 determining the background of the scroll indicator EN Eq ejibBI5 Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 201 4 eaSSiiIQGUI 3 The demo scroll box contains all elements but it is completely selectable which elements to include in a scroll box and the design of each element Example variants The example scroll box has been prepared so that various different configurations can be tested The default setup is SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO No Item 1 1 1 Price 1 Scroll line item 12 34 amp Scroll line item 12 34 e 20scroll lines e Scroll indicator type is Bitmap e Scroll bar type is Bitmap e Scroll line O is active scroll line marker
141. ameters Graph X axis Gra e Basicp ph Y axis and Graph data sets arameters Index No Identifies the Graph on the target system Several Graphs can be active simultaneously but they must then have different index numbers If only one Graph is visible at any time all defined scroll boxes can be given index 0 simplifying addressing them in the target system Origin offset X Y The space on the screen occupied by the Graph item is determined by the Primary and Secondary position panel settings The Origin offset determines the position of the point 0 0 within that space i e the point where the X and Y axes cross The offset position is relative to the bottom left corner of the space e Graph X axis The easyGUI graph item supports multiple X axes definitions This provides a powerful instrument to be able to show multiple data representations on a single chart each axis can be displayed or hidden independently of all others A graph must have at least 1 X axis Four buttons are provided to control the X axes definitions NEW DELETE UP and Doww X axis index Identifies the X axis on the target system so that it can be referenced through the GuiLib API This number cannot be set manually and is assigned when a new X axis is added using the NEW button The identifier for an axis can be changed using the UP and Down buttons but only within the range of the number of X axes currently defined An X axis can be deleted using the DELETE bu
142. ample cursor field 0 is selected MAIN MENU Single Samples Preparation Sample Holder Preparation Manual preparation Configuration All All cursor fields are selected The radio button ALL CURSORS IN THIS STRUCTURE allows switching between settings for cursors of all structures displayed on the panel or only of the currently selected structure e Test scroll box These settings are intended for testing of the scroll box item type display for other item types they are disabled The following parameters can be set here edSSiliQUI Scroll box Selects between scroll boxes available in the current structure No of scroll lines Determines the number of scroll lines in the scroll list Example 5 scroll lines are specified 7 scroll lines are specified IN IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 137 assSii aul Marker indicator position Type Selects between the scroll markers indicator Position Determines the position of the currently selected scroll marker indicator The buttons and allow jumping to the top and bottom of the scroll list correspondingly Count Only relevant for marker 1 and higher Determines the number of scroll lines included into the marker Auto increment of numerical variable Only relevant for marker 0 If the scroll line contains a numerical variable it can be automatically incremented for each line in order for the li
143. an one byte per pixel this constant is 1 Full declaration define GuiConst PIXELS PER BYTE XXX GuiConst PTR Purpose Pointer size definition Will be equal to GuiConst INT16U GuiConst INT24U GuiConst INT32U void Or void const assSiiaul Full declaration define GuiConst PTR XXX GuiConst REL COORD ORIGO INUSE Purpose Indicates that either a globally defined active area or at least one Active area item is using relative coordinate system Full declaration define GuiConst REL COORD ORIGO INUSE GuiConst REMOTE BITMAP BUF SIZE Purpose Size of intermediate buffer big enough to contain largest section of remote bitmap data Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE BITMAP BUF SIZE GuiConst REMOTE BITMAP DATA Purpose Bitmap data is placed in external memory Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE BITMAP DATA GuiConst REMOTE DATA Purpose Remote data system placement of font structure and or bitmap data in external memory is in use Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE DATA GuiConst REMOTE DATA BUF SIZE Purpose Size of intermediate buffer big enough to contain largest remote data section Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE DATA BUF SIZE GuiConst REMOTE FONT BUF SIZE Purpose Size of intermediate buffer big enough to contain largest section of remote font data Full declaration define GuiCons
144. and below the structure to make it easier to insert the bitmap in Word colors used and clean easyGUI style appearance can be set CLIPBOARD COPY Copies the current structure to the Windows clipboard as a graphic Can then be inserted directly into another application e g Word or Corel Draw Furthermore the structure is copied into an internal easyGUI clipboard allowing it to be pasted into another project or another easyGUI database as long as easyGUl is not closed down CLIPBOARD PASTE Pastes a structure from the internal easyGUI clipboard CLIPBOARD COPY TO FILE Copies the current structure to a bmp bitmap file In the middle of the panel is a history box showing the most recent structures selected for editing A structure can be made current by clicking it The topmost structure is the current structure and nothing will happen if it is clicked The buttons below the history box controls service functions GENERATE STRUCTURE C CODE Presents itself as a shortcut When pressing it jumps to the C code generation window generates the structure source and returns to the Structure window GENERATE ALL C CODE A shortcut generating the entire target system source including fonts at the C code generation window To the right of the panel is an origin box containing an X and a Y coordinate These coordinates are only used in easyGUI not on the target system They determine where the first item of a structure is placed if this ite
145. and make sure that everything works as intended assSiioaGul Although we have tested easyGUI on a large number of compilers and with many different types of displays it is impossible to test every possible product and combination on the market However it is our experience that if the compiler conforms to ANSI X3 159 1989 Standard C the compiling and linking should proceed without problems In case of problems try setting code optimization to a minimum and then incrementing optimization one step at a time It is especially important to make sure that code optimization is not applied to the GuiFont GuiVar and GuiStruct units because these units only contain constant declarations which cannot be optimized Some compilers misunderstand this and apply various kinds of optimization to the constant declarations with the best intentions making them unusable C is not used in the easyGUI library but C compilers can be used 5 easyGUI interfacing Interfacing easyGUI to your own target code is a fairly simple exercise Three important function calls must be made for easyGUI to work at all e GuiLib Init which initializes easyGUI Only to be called once e GuiLib ShowScreen which renders the easyGUI structure e GuiLib Refresh which executes easyGUI display writing To be called every time a display refresh is desired Furthermore if your operating system uses pre emptive execution i e it interrupts tasks at random ins
146. and show a simple call to the GuiLib library GuiLib c and GuiLib h library These files are identical to the target system library files GuiDisplay c and GuiDisplay h display control unit These files are radically different from the normal GuiDisplay c and GuiDisplay h display control files of 4 eaSSiliIGUI 3 the easyGUI library This is the Windows display driver which is the core of easySIM It uses the data from the GuiLib library in exactly the same way as the normal target system i e GuiLib doesn t know that it is working in a Windows environment QGuiltems c GuiComponents c GuiLibStruct h GuiGraph c GuiGraphlH c and GuiGraph1V c include libraries These files are identical to the target system library files i COLOR and UNICODE versions GuiGraph2H c GuiGraph2V c GuiGraph2H2P c GuiGraph2V2P c GuiGraph4H c GuiGraph4V c GuiGraph5 c GuiGraph8 c GuiGraphl6 c and GuiGraph24 c include libraries These files are identical to the target system library files e And finally of course the normal GuiConst GuiFont GuiStruct and GuiVar files generated by easyGUI COMPILATION Because the PC environment is a 32 bit system easyGUI must be set accordingly when generating C code To make things easier easyGUI can remember the target system settings and still generate C code for easySIM by using the special easySIM setting in the C code generation window m Setup M Font files
147. and some library code related to scroll box drawing is excluded fdefine GuiConst ITEM SCROLLBOX INUSE GuiConst ITEM STRUCTCOND INUSE Purpose Full declaration One or more Conditional structure call items in use If no Conditional structure call items are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to Conditional structure calls will be excluded Gl define GuiConst ITEM STRUCTCOND INUSI GuiConst ITEM TEXTBLOCK INUSE Purpose Full declaration One or more Paragraph items in use If no Paragraph items are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to paragraph text drawing will be excluded Gl define GuiConst ITEM TEXTBLOCK INUSI GuiConst ITEM TOUCHAREA INUSE Purpose Full declaration One or more touch areas in use If no touch areas are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to touch area handling will be excluded fdefine GuiConst ITEM TOUCHAREA INUSE GuiConst KEIL COMPILER REENTRANT Purpose Full declaration Special flag for Keil 8051 compilers when using recursive functions Adds the keyword reentrant to all recursively called functions in the easyGUI library If this setting is not used easyGUI will typically display graphics primitives and simple screen structures correctly but fail to display complex screen structures fdefin
148. anguage selection Gui Var c m Fixed code View source Select language set fan languages GuiVarh cd veu ER UO A Language set setup D GuiConst h m Fixed code View source Uncompressed fonts p Generates basic setup structures External memory storage c3 Make structures source ani valles code Fonts z vidus E e e Code size Compressed bitmaps Requires RGB color mode with at least 8 bit color depth Each of the three main types of data fonts structures and variables is placed in its own set of c and h files called GuiFont c and GuiFont h GuiStruct c and GuiStruct h and finally Guivar c and GuiVar h A further file GuiConst h contains configuration data mostly from the settings made in the Parameters window These files should all be included in the target system C compiler setup An additional file is varInit c which contains variable values for all variables defined in easyGUI This file is optional Using it will ensure the same state for all variables as set in easyGUI It is simply used as an include file It doesn t contain any definitions only variable value assignments Destination setup On the left the destination path can be set A partial path may be entered in which case it is taken as relative to the folder in which the project file gui resides The path box may also be left empty in which case all target system files are placed in the proj
149. aph with two sets of data one shown as a bar chart the other as a line chart N at 1 ill The easyGUI graph item allows data to be displayed graphically very quickly with very little code on the target system Each graph item can support multiple data sets multiple X axes and multiple Y axes In this way it is possible for one chart to show a lot of different data at once but also to quickly hide data and show only the data the user wants to see To use the graph on the target system it is necessary to define a local buffer to hold all the data points that will be in this dataset The easyGUI library must then be told where this buffer is with a call to GuiLib Graph AddDataSet Data can be added to the data set by calling GuiLib Graph AddDataPoint with the X and Y coordinates of each new data point A call to GuiLib Graph Redraw then causes the graph to be declared ready so it is drawn to the screen on the next call to GuiLib Refresh This protects against incomplete data being displayed when GuiLib Refreshis called from a timer A simple example of code to initiate a graph is given below as in the tutorial this example has two data sets assSiioaul GuiLib ShowScreen GuiStruct ScreenGraphDemo Def GuiLib NO CURSOR GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW GuiLib GraphDataPoint GraphDataLine 100 GuiLib GraphDataPoint GraphDataBar 100 Add a dataset to graph item 0 as data set 0 with 100 data point
150. aracter Also see the PREV button above EasviliGUIi FONT IMPORT Windows TTF fonts binary fonts and BDF fonts can be imported on the Import tab page in the Commands panel At the top is selected between the three basic font types which can be imported by easyGUI Parameters for TTF font import are shown below while parameters for binary and BDF font imports are shown in their own windows v Compliance with eventual copyrights of the original font creator should at all times be respected IBIS Solutions ApS is not responsible for violations of such rights TTF font import Several parameters must be selected before TTF font import can start Character range Select the range of characters to import Characters are created if they don t exist already in the font Only characters actually found in the selected TTF font will be created TTF font name Press the SELECT TTF FONT button to display a standard Windows font dialog Select the desired font and size The selected font size is shown below in the white box Black White ratio A Windows TTF font is vector based and will be drawn using the full color depth of the Windows system This results in many shades of gray being used to represent the individual character As fonts in easyGUI are purely monochromatic only two colors or pixel states on and off or anti aliased with 16 shades of gray some sort of conversion must be made reducing the gray scale Windows characters to the
151. arkenRgbColor GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedltem Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Sets parameters for blinking item Removed if blink support is disabled void GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItem GuiConst INT16U BlinkFieldNo GuiConst INT16U CharNo GuiConst INT16S Rate Blink item index number Character number If character zero is selected the entire text will blink If character one or higher is selected only that single character will blink Line feeds will be included in the count if the Include line feeds when counting characters checkbox is checked in Parameters window Operations tab Blinking box Blinking rate in multiples of GuiLib Refresh refresh rate valid range 0 255 Blinking rate 2255 disables blinking but makes an initial marking of the character text None GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItemStop GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItemUpdate GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedltemStop Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Stops blinking of a marked blinking item Removed if blink support is disabled void GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItemStop GuiConst INT16U BlinkFieldNo Blink item index number None assSiiaul Related functions GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItem GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItemUpdate GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedltemUpdate Purpose Updates blinking of a marked blinking item This is necessary if the text contents change dynamically at run time Calling thi
152. as for a Bitmap item see above Scroll bar marker block border color Selects border color for a scroll bar marker block Shown only if the scroll bar marker is a fixed size or dynamic block Scroll bar marker block fill color Selects fill color for a scroll bar marker block Shown only if the scroll bar marker is a fixed size or dynamic block e Scroll indicator The scroll indicator can point out a specific scroll line A number of parameters define this Scroll indicator type Selects the type of marker moving up and down in the scroll indicator None Turns the scroll indicator off Icon Shows a font character Bitmap Shows a bitmap Scroll indicator position X Y Defines the scroll indicator position either relative to the primary coordinates of the Scroll box item or as absolute coordinates Scroll indicator area Defines the scroll indicator area i e the area covered by both passive and active parts of the scroll indicator within which the scroll indicator marker moves Scroll indicator movement area offsets Defines the scroll indicator active area as a subset of the total scroll indicator area The scroll indicator marker moves within this area When drawing it the area is clipped Scroll indicator structure Defines the layout of the scroll indicator If no scroll indicator structure is defined a framed filled rectangle will be drawn instead Use relative coordinates for the scroll indicator structure ju
153. ase of changes to the width and height of the font a couple of special consideration arises Width Changes are made from the rightmost edge assSiiaul Widening the character cell adds blank pixels to the right PS marks are not changed Narrowing the character cell removes pixels from the right potentially truncating characters PS marks are pushed to the left if needed e Height A small dialog window asks if the changes should be made from the top or the bottom The action then commences depending on the circumstances Enlarging the character cell adds blank pixels to the top or bottom as selected If changes are made to the top the Top line Mid line and Base line positions are shifted down accordingly PS marks are not changed Making the character cell smaller removes pixels from the top or bottom as selected potentially truncating characters If changes are made to the top the Top line Mid line and Base line positions are shifted up accordingly PS marks are not changed If the desired operation is to enlarge or shrink the character cell evenly or at some ratio both at the top and bottom it can be accomplished by making two height change operations FONT SELECTION In order to save code space on the target system there is full control over which characters from which fonts will be included in the target system C code This is handled on the Selection tab page in the Commands panel Selection of characters can be done
154. asks if selected texts all texts or only texts for which the corresponding right text column line is empty should be copied Selected texts can be any continuous block of texts selected by using the shift key and clicking Eventual translations in the right text column are overwritten if the line is selected for copying e SHOW ALL TEXT LANGUAGES Pressing the button shows a little window displaying all language texts for the active text line not only the two visible in the left and right columns This can be handy when checking other languages during translation This dialog can also be invoked in the structure editor Above the display representations are a number of settings controlling the visual appearance of the structures display e DisPLAYS OFF disables the structures display This is only necessary if using a slow computer and the structures display takes too long to show up e 00M determines how large the displayed structures are shown e MARK TEXT shows the current text in red highlighting what is being edited e SHOW ACTIVE AREA determines if an additional rectangle shall be drawn around the active pixels in the display marking the boundaries of active pixels inside which text can be written 4 eaSSiIQGUI 33 9 POSITIONS WINDOW Displays a list of coordinates 98 Left adjusted 155 109 Left adjusted 64 6 Centered 52 Left adjusted 182 Right adjusted These coordinates can be
155. ate tinet 226 GUIGONST LANGUAGE CNT iiss nier ttt tre re em e IEEE ERE 226 GuiConst LANGUAGE FIRST certe retenti unen ino rte rint ine aeterna esp Era dad 226 GuiConst LANGUAGE SOME ACTIVE csccsssssscssssesssscsscsessssssecsscsesessssecsesseessnssessessensnesseses 226 GUICONSE LANGUAGE XXX d 226 GUICONSE HINES PR SECTIQIN u s iuo futu tane ri t cnni arenae onu tenete enne 226 GuiConst MAX BACKGROUND BITMABPS cesesseeeeeeeenennennennen nennen 227 GuiConst MAX DYNAMIC ITEMS essen enne enne nnne nennen enne 227 GuiConst MAX PARAGRAPH LINE CNT eere nnno nnne nnne onn tinent tn tenen 227 GS UICORSE IMIAX EXT ICEING rra tt centu es erece aerei te eee ins te cet bhe rece dere etel ume Pe PN SUEE 227 GuiConst MAX VARNUM TEXT LEN seeseeeeeeenenennenennen nennen nennen enne enne 227 GUIGONST MICRO BlG ENDIAN eie eren et teuer intrent rettet enitn ne reete 227 GuiConst MICRO LITTLE ENDIAN eseeeeeeenennennen nennen enne enne enne 227 GuiConst MIRRORED HORIZONTALLY sees enne enne nnn 228 GUICONST_ MIRRORED VERT IGCAJULUY iieri reet eter eit ttt nort tiber rio etienne 228 GUICONSE PALETT E SIZ cp E M 228 GuiConst PICC COMPILER ROM caeteri a cuiua etant nada 228 GUICONSE PIXEL OFF arnie eonenna i Him E aer RU EP E I nU I eI DR AS 228 GUICGONSE PIXEL ON ER 228 GUICONSE PIXELS RER BYTE itte teneret E eee ete EE TEE Te Ee TRE 228 GUICONSE PT E
156. available in the Editing panel e CREATE CHARACTERS A small window appears allowing selection of the range of characters to create Eventual characters already existing in the selected range are not affected New characters are created blank i e with all pixels set to off white e DELETE CHARACTERS A small window appears allowing selection of the range of characters to delete If a range of characters is currently selected they can be deleted instead e CLEAR blanks the current character i e with all pixels set to off white e Undo reloads the character state from last time the project was saved e INVERT toggles all pixels of the current character i e white pixels get black and vice versa e HORIZONTAL MIRROR mirrors the current character horizontally PS marks are not moved assSiioaul VERTICAL MIRROR mirrors the current character vertically PS marks are not moved INSERT BITMAP shows a file box allowing selection of a graphical file The file types must be a Windows bitmap file bmp Pixels in the bitmap are treated as black or non black meaning that all pixels not purely black RGB values 0 0 0 are imported as white pixels The imported bitmap can have any size but easyGUI only uses the top left part matching the character size Clipboard Copy copies the currently selected characters to both the Windows clipboard as a 24 bit color bitmap containing only black and white pixels active character only a
157. ay writihig i crt teer er eee tte erae ree e Par deed e ure ee uere Ee Eve 159 Bypassing the internal RAM display buffer sese 162 Lighit and contrast Control EE AGED ERO Rai Ue EROR Ye RH 162 A compiling the projGCt ui see rite Re etre e n ren eee Re Pen inr iere ree euo Tuin 162 5eegadsyGUlititerfacirig ucciso ren E TRI RN ESTEE Te EIN CH REPE RET FUP AKATERETERE Re TK TE Tun 163 CUN MEER 163 GUILIb Refresh nire nachna E E NR EN E E NTR 164 15 assSii aul TET TU SNOWS TEEN eene aE Ea E RETO TETTE 164 Testing the system seessssoessssoessssoesssssesessseessesocesssoessssoessssseessescessssoeesssoeessssessssseessssoesssseesssee 165 1 Establishing some kind of connection essere enne nne 165 2 Turning ona single pixel rte reete eren er E ER re eet e EE 165 3 Showing the test pattern sesssssseeseeseseeeeeeeeennene nennen nnne nnnne rennes trente tnter nenne 166 A Showing an easyGUI structure eneneenenne nnt tne nne nn ennt tnter nnne enne 168 HOW TO UTILIZE easyGUI A TUTORIAL cesse ener eene eene nnne nnne 169 Efficient Ioue emer eshit 169 Ii2IpBQUg c 169 VIEWING TNE structure 171 Splash Strul Clune sicisissesctscssassiecesatetscciesaecsdadoacieceadeedededeeedonededadsreadeeconeiabeassededeadendedeasdasoussenstoaeoenes 172 Str ctu re detalls 5
158. b UnicodeStrLen GuiConst TEXT S Unicode string reference Length in characters excluding zero termination GuiLib StrAnsiToUnicode GuiLib UnicodeStrCmp GuiLib UnicodeStrCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrNCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrNCmp GuiLib UnicodeStrNCmp Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Compares two Unicode strings until the N th character This function is equivalent to the ANSI character mode strncmp function Only accessible in Unicode character mode GuiConst INT16S GuiLib UnicodeStrNCmp GuiConst TEXT 5S1 GuiConst TEXT S2 GuiConst INT16U StrLen Unicode string references Character count to compare 0 S1 is less than S2 inside the N characters 0 1 and S2 are equal inside the N characters 20 S1 is greater than S2 inside the N characters GuiLib StrAnsiToUnicode GuiLib UnicodeStrCmp GuiLib UnicodeStrCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrNCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrLen GuiLib UnicodeStrNCpy Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Copies from one Unicode string to another No more than source StrLen bytes are copied Bytes following a source null byte are not copied If needed target is padded with null bytes until reaching StrLen This function is equivalent to the ANSI character mode strncpy function Only accessible in Unicode character mode void GuiLib UnicodeStrNCpy GuiConst TEXT S2 GuiConst TEXT 5S1 GuiConst INT16U StrLen S1 Unic
159. byte Green high byte Blue Related functions GuiLib RgbToPixelColor GuiLib RadToDeg Purpose Converts angle from radians to degrees factored Full declaration GuiConst_INT32S GuiLib RadToDeg GuiConst INT32S Angle assSii aul Input Angle in radians 4096 1 rad 4096 Output Angle in degrees 10 1 10 Related functions GuiLib DegToRad GuiLib SinRad GuiLib SinDeg GuiLib CosRad GuiLib CosDeg GuiLib Refresh Purpose Refreshes variables and updates display Full declaration void GuiLib Refresh void Input None Output None GuiLib RemoteCheck Purpose Checks if the binary remote data file GuiRemote bin has correct ID Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib RemoteCheck void Input None Output Check result 0 Illegal ID 1 ID accepted GuiLib ResetClipping Purpose Resets clipping Drawing can be limited to a rectangular portion of the screen this routine resets the clipping limits to the entire screen Remarks Removed if clipping support is disabled Full declaration void GuiLib ResetClipping void Input None Output None Related functions GuiLib SetClipping GuiLib ResetDisplayRepaint Purpose Resets the repainting scan line markers so that no part of the image is marked Therefore next time the display is refreshed nothing is send to the display controller Full declaration void GuiLib ResetDisplayRepaint void assSii aul Input Out
160. ch color freely selectable or 256 colors directly as RGB values e 12 bit 4096 colors Can show 4096 colors directly as RGB values e 15 bit 32K colors Can show 32768 colors directly as RGB values e 16 bit 64K colors Can show 65536 colors directly as RGB values e 18 bit 256K colors Can show 262144 colors directly as RGB values e 24 bit 16M colors Can show 16777216 colors directly as RGB values EasvilliGUIi e 32 bit 16M colors Can show 16777216 colors directly as RGB values and includes 256 level transparency alpha channel The type of display controller used on the target system determines which combinations of color modes and color depths can be used Some controllers support only palette modes some supports only 4 bpp and 8 bpp pixel color depths etc The possible combinations in easyGUI are Support Gray scale Palette 1 bpp 2 colors Ok Not possible Not possible 2 bpp 4 colors Ok Not possible Not possible 4 bpp 16 colors Ok Ok Not possible 5 bpp 32 colors Ok Not possible Not possible 8 bpp 256 colors Ok Ok Ok 12 bpp 4096 colors Not possible Not possible Ok 15 bpp 32K colors Not possible Not possible Ok 16 bpp 64K colors Not possible Not possible Ok 18 bpp 256K colors Not possible Not possible Ok 24 bpp 16M colors Not possible Not possible 32 bpp 16M colors Not possible Not possible Ok The various combinations have different strengths and
161. character cell PS num width Value can be between 1 and width of character cell This width denotes how much horizontal space each numerical character takes up when writing in PS numerical style The specified with is only used for characters not written proportional in the PS numerical style i e characters Oo E 9 Ha mn en pl Wa and mou Space Center X Value can be between 1 and width of character cell Center Y Value can be between 1 and height of character cell Top line Value can be between 1 and height of character cell Mid line Value can be between 1 and height of character cell Base line Value can be between 1 and height of character cell Cursor top Value can be between 1 and height of character cell Not currently used Cursor bottom Value can be between 1 and height of character cell Not currently used Underline top Value can be between 1 and height of character cell Underline bottom Value can be between 1 and height of character cell PS space Number of blank pixels between two adjacent characters when making proportional writing Value can be between 0 and 99 The current values are shown in the first column while the second editable column is for new revised values Only the parameters where changes are wanted needs filling out Actual changes are made by pressing the APPLY button which will check the entered values and apply the changes If the APPLY button is not pressed nothing changes In the c
162. codes Character codes in the binary import file are converted to Unicode If this setting is not checked it is assumed the character codes in the import file are Unicode codes e Big endian byte order in 16 bit values This setting determines how 16 bit values in the import file are interpreted as little endian LSB at first memory address or big endian MSB at first memory address The IMPORT FONT button executes the actual import conversion process EasviliGUIi BDF font import The IMPORT FONT button opens a new window where font file and a few other settings can be selected ii BDF font import Font file none selected Font name amp Load font file The LOAD FONT FILE selects which BDF font to import The font contents are shown in the middle area if the font is accepted The IMPORT FONT button executes the actual import conversion process Common import pa rameters Below the TTF import parameters are a few settings common to both types of font import e Only update existing easyGUI characters This setting ensures that only characters already present in the easyGUI font will be imported i e updated Characters found in the import font but not in the easyGUI font will be ignored e Do not overwrite existing characters This setting ensures that characters already present in the easyGUI font will not be overwritten Only characters found in the import font but not in the easyGUI font will be i
163. colors red green and blue can be placed in the RGB bytes Three bytes are shown but how many bytes are actually in use depends on color depth and display controller type In the example above RGB coding for an 8 bpp display controller mode is shown Three red three green and two blue color bits has been placed in the first RGB byte The setup in this window is remembered for each combination of color mode and color depth where it is applicable not gray scale modes For palette modes the setup is used to define the layout of the palette table colors while for RGB modes it is used for defining the actual pixel bytes in display RAM A bit is set to a color by dragging from the bit legends at lower left to the desired bit with the mouse Alternatively colors can also be dragged from bit to bit in the three display bytes Dragging the same color to a second bit automatically fills out any intermediate bits with the same color i e bits for a particular color are always consecutive Color bits can be erased again by dragging from the Unused bits legend or from a gray bit to the desired bit location 4 eaSSiliQGUI The number of display bytes in use does not necessarily correspond to the selected color depth An example is zepa spp Bt B B G2 G1 Go E Red bits 3 bytes in use Drag colors unused from legend at left to relevant bits above Green bits Or just drag colors unused from bi
164. croll Home GuiLib TextBox Scroll To Line GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up Pixel Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Scrolls text box contents one pixel position up Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up Pixel GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Text box index 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll End Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll To PixelLine GuiLib TouchAdjustReset Purpose Full declaration Input Output Resets touch coordinate conversion void GuiLib TouchAdjustReset void None None GuiLib TouchAdjustSet Purpose Full declaration Sets one coordinate pair for touch coordinate conversion Must be called two times once for each of two diagonally opposed corners or four times once for each of the corners The corner positions should be as close as possible to the physical display corners as precision is lowered when going towards the display center void GuiLib TouchAdjustSet GuiConst_INT16S XTrue assSiioaul Input Output GuiConst_INT16S YTrue GuiConst INT168 XMeasured GuiConst INT16S YMeasured XTrue YTrue Position represented in display coordinates XMeasured YMeasured Position represented in touch interface coordinates None GuiLib TouchCheck Purpose
165. ction calls Text will be left aligned Full declaration define GuiLib ALIGN LEFT 1 GuiLib ALIGN NOCHANGE Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will use same alignment as previously used Full declaration define GuiLib ALIGN NOCHANGE 0 GuiLib ALIGN RIGHT Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be right aligned Full declaration define GuiLib ALIGN RIGHT 3 EasviliGUi GuiLib BBP BOTTOM Purpose Used in text formatting function calls One extra pixel row will be added at the bottom edge of background painting rectangle Full declaration define GuiLib BBP BOTTOM 8 GuiLib BBP LEFT Purpose Used in text formatting function calls One extra pixel column will be added at the left edge of background painting rectangle Full declaration define GuiLib BBP LEFT 1 GuiLib BBP NONE Purpose Used in text formatting function calls No extra pixel columns rows will be added to background painting rectangle Full declaration define GuiLib BBP NONE 0 GuiLib_BBP_RIGHT Purpose Used in text formatting function calls One extra pixel column will be added at the right edge of background painting rectangle Full declaration define GuiLib BBP RIGHT 2 GuiLib_BBP_TOP Purpose Used in text formatting function calls One extra pixel row will be added at the top edge of background painting rectangle Full declaration define GuiLib BBP TOP 4 GuiLib_BUTTON_STATE_UP
166. ctive and scrolls list if needed Input parameters Scroll box index New scroll line Function result 0 No change list already at specified line 1 Active scroll line changed GuiLib ScrollBox SetLineMarker Sets scroll marker position and line count Scroll marker index 0 active scroll line can only cover 0 or 1 scroll line Input parameters Scroll box index Scroll marker index Start line Line count clipped to a maximum of 1 for marker index 0 Function result 0 Parameter error 1 Ok GuiLib ScrollBox_GetActiveLine Returns a scroll marker position Scroll marker index 0 active scroll line can only cover 0 or 1 scroll line Input parameters Scroll box index Scroll marker index Function result Scroll marker position GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLineCount Returns a scroll marker line count Scroll marker index 0 active scroll line can only cover 0 or 1 scroll line Input parameters Scroll box index 4 eaSSiIQGUI 3 Scroll marker index Function result Scroll marker line count GuiLib ScrollBox SetIndicator Sets scroll indicator position Input parameters Scroll box index Indicator line Function result 0 Parameter error 1 Ok GuiLib_ScrollBox_SetTopLine Scrolls so that indicated line is at the top of the visible window Input parameters Scroll box index Top line Function result 0 Parameter error 1 Ok GuiLib_ScrollBox_GetTopLine Reports the top line of the visibl
167. cts a structure for calling either by name and index number direct structure call or by name only indexed structure call The JUMP TO STRUCTURE button does exactly the same as the CHILD STRUCTURE button If a selected structure does not exist deleted after selection or index doesn t exist a small warning A es is shown This may not be an error at least not if the structure call is indexed A direct structure call displaying this warning certainly deserves attention assSii aul Default structure call panel Item types Conditional structure call Selects a structure for calling by name and index number The JUMP TO STRUCTURE button does exactly the same as the CHILD STRUCTURE button If a selected structure does not exist a small warning eene is shown This may not be an error if you do not want a structure to be shown when the conditional variable is not set to a valid value Conditional structure call panel Item types Conditional structure call Contains a table that allows the user to selects structures for calling by name and index number when the variable selected has the value specified in the INDEX VALUES column Additional structure calls are added to the table when pressing the NEW INDEX LINE button structure calls can be removed from the table with the DELETE INDEX LINE button The structure name and index is specified in the STRUCTURE TO CALL column A single clicking a cell in this column allows the u
168. d 1 are used manually not for an indexed structure call but that is of course just as legal The two structures combined defined the menu items 0 1 2 3 4 Preparation Single samples preparation Sample holder preparation Manual preparation Configuration Now because we have used the cursor indices a little intelligent life has become easier on the target system where we now only have to assign some kind of action to the five cursor indices disregarding which of the two structures is active 4 eaSSiiIQGUI 3 3 FLASH STRUCTURE The Screen Flash 1 structure is an example of how to combine easyGUI structures and manual graphics It looks like FLASH PROGRAMMING power during flash programming Progress id Mixing structures and plain graphics The intention is to show a progress bar in the white rectangle at the bottom The rectangle coordinates are defined using the position tables 98 Left adjusted 109 Left adjusted 64 6 Centered 52 Left adjusted 182 Right adjusted Here a number of fixed positions have been defined among others the two positions FlashProgress1 and FlashProgress2 Each of these defines a fixed X and Y coordinate The first is used in the structure look at item 8 for the upper left corner of the rectangle X1 Y1 and the second is used for the lower right corner X2 Y2 Ig GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 194
169. d the font can be cut down in dimensions to the minimum size needed The final pixel dimensions of a font are not particularly important if most text is written in transparent mode with proportional spacing After import the various reference lines must be positioned correctly PS marks must be set and the font data controlled adjusted as required This is the same process as if the font was created from scratch in the font editor The proper sequence for importing TTF font data is 1 Start with an easyGUI font with more than anticipated font size so that there is space for even the biggest characters of the font character range and then some Select import font characteristics name size style Make repeated imports while adjusting the various parameters especially TTF font size black white ratio and sharpening until a satisfactory result is achieved Set all easyGUI reference lines base line top line etc This is important for the easyGUI character generator and text writing routines in the easyGUI library otherwise they will not function correctly Move characters up down and or adjust the font baseline so they are properly placed on the base line This can be done en masse i e use the character range panel on the Editing tab page 4 eaSSiiIQGUI 6 Control each imported character and turn pixels on and off as necessary to improve the result 7 Set PS marks en masse 8 Contro
170. d in GuiStruct h and have IDs that begin with GuiStructCOMP These structure IDs must never be used directly in calls to GuiLib ShowScreen doing so will cause undesirable results For further information on the various easyGUI function calls see the reference section assSiioaul TESTING THE SYSTEM When the display controller specific code has been written and the target system can be turned on without emitting smoke it is time to verify that the display functions as intended And it most certainly doesn t at the first try So how to test the display setup in the most efficient way Do not start with a fine complex easyGUI structure containing lots of text and icons because probably nothing at all will be shown Instead use the following guidelines as an inspiration They are not universally applicable because of the diversity of target systems but the guidelines are a result of considerable experience in the field and could therefore spare you of some of your precious development time The guidelines are intended to be used in the order stated 1 Establishing some kind of connection 2 Turning on a single pixel 3 Showing the test pattern 4 Showing an easyGUI structure 1 Establishing some kind of connection First item on the agenda is to verify that the contrast regulation is working properly This of course only applies to LCD displays but these are by far the most used in industry today A common mistake is to save th
171. de structure identifier mode Specifies how the structure name is treated when generating C code for the target system Can be Standard GuiStruct_ is added as a prefix to the structure name Insert GuiStruct_ is added as a prefix to the structure name followed by the class name or C code identifier if defined and then the structure name An underscore is also added between the class name and the structure name Replace The class name or C code identifier if defined is added as a prefix to the structure name e Move up Structure classes can be assigned in any order This command moves the appointed class one position up in the class list e Move down This command moves the appointed class one position down in the class list ITEMS Each structure contains a number of items 0 255 Each item can be one of the types Clear area Clears an area of the screen or the complete screen to a desired color Active area Defines an active area of the display Display writing falling outside the active area is not prohibited but can optionally be clipped The coordinate system may optionally be transferred to the active area The active area is in effect for all following items in the structure or until another active area item is encountered Clipping rectangle Defines a clipping rectangle All following items are drawn clipped to the specified rectangle Can be cancelled by another clipping rectangle Text A single text
172. decimal character is at thousands positions like in 1 000 00 The formatter parameters have no effect on string variables Bitmap panel Item types Bitmap Background bitmap Selects the bitmap file for display The file can be specified with or without a path Files without a path is read from the folder in which the project file gui resides A partial path may also be entered in which case it is taken as relative to the project file folder assSiiaul The bitmap is not stored in the project file only its path and filename Changing the bitmap therefore influences how it looks in easyGUI The path and filename can be edited directly or selected by pressing the BROWSE button The REFRESH button reads the bitmap again and can be used to force a re read if the bitmap has been edited Jumping to another structure and back again also forces a re read The REMOVE PATH button removes the file path from the bitmap file name except for eventual sub folders to the current project folder location This means that by using this function the bitmaps can be contained in a project sub folder and the project still made movable to another main folder without disturbing the relative folder path The size of the bitmap in pixels and its filename without the path is shown above the file name edit box If the bitmap is not found a warning is shown and the bitmap is drawn as a black rectangle with white fill and a black cross cover
173. declaration Adjusts the Y axis origin Useful for dynamic graphs with moving Y axis Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8S AxisIndex EasvilliGUIi Input Output Related functions GuiConst INT32S Offset GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based AxisIndex Index of Y axis in the graph index is zero based Index 1 will offset all defined Y axes This only makes sense if all Y axes have identical scaling Offset Amount of movement of the Y axis origin Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 Lib Graph DrawAxes Lib Graph HideXAxis Lib Graph HideYAxis Lib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin Lib Graph Redraw Lib Graph ResetXAxisOrigin Lib Graph ResetYAxisOrigin Lib Graph SetXAxisRange Lib Graph SetYAxisRange Lib Graph ShowXAxis Lib Graph ShowYAxis H H H H H H H H H H p G G G G G Gu G G G G G GuiLib_Graph_Redraw Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Redraws the complete graph including background axes and data sets Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph Redraw GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 GuiLib Graph Close GuiLib Graph RemoveDataSet Purpose Remarks Full declaration
174. dinates for itself and the three texts This can be demonstrated by selecting item 2 the icon and experiment with changing the coordinates Observe that the four items now move as a united entity PS nice texts One feature of the texts which is maybe not immediately apparent is its style The texts are written in proportional writing just like the text you are reading right now That looks much nicer than text written with fixed spacing Select item 3 the Graphical User Interface Tool text and try changing the Style setting assSii aul JEn peccemus ical Top Pos Vartez Color Misc ibed Text na d ar aH Graphical User Interface Tool No of characters in text 29 Ff Char set Translation ona Text direction Controlled by language Result Left to Right Font ANSI 7 bold Result ANSI 7 bold Style Proportional Result Proportional Background box Width 0 EDS Underlining Blinking text field Foreground color eo to fixed spacing The result is rather terrible eaae uy Graphical User Interface Tool for Embedded Systems making graphical user interfaces has never been easier Version 1 23 But look closer Both texts Graphical User Interface Tool and for Embedded Systems changed style resetting to Proportional will bring both texts back to something a little more pretty eaae uy Graphical User Interface Tool fo
175. e 278 GuiLib ScrollBox GetaActiveLine cccsscccssccsssccsssscessscessscessescsesscessssessscessssecsssersssersssees 278 GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLineCount cccecccsssssssscescesssssssscsecsssssecsecseessesseseeeesssasssreeesenses 279 GuiLib ScrollBox GetTopLine ce eeeseeseeeecceecsseseeeeeecsessesseeeeessesseeaseeseesaesseeeseessesaeeaeeeseees 279 Guibib ScrollBox HOME riter rtr Freeride rr rib E ee 279 GuiLib ScrollBox Init nennen nnne nenne nnne nnnr entrent tn sette entere tn sinn 280 GUILID_SCrOlIBOX_RECAW uc ccccccccssscessscessscesssccssscssescsssscecsscesssscsesscessssecsseessssesesssesssseresees 280 GUILID_ScrolIBOX_REArawLine cc seeescsssesscsscsssesessecsecsscssssecseessssseseeseeessesseseeeesessssereeeeenses 281 GuiLib ScrollBox SetlndiCatOr eise riter reete trt reote treo ete oer better rte oy roce Ete Pun 281 GuiLib ScrollBox SetLineMarker sese nnns 281 GuiLib ScrollBox SetTopLine eese nenne nnne enn tn nnne naia a tnnt tnn enne 282 G ilib ZS COMB OX TO LINE aasre aaan cea castes e chem ue eMe T D EE T ian 282 GUILIB SCFOIBOX2U Discs uiti ect Ine ette evs re ire erre ier mee p ra Re genito 283 GuiLib SetBlueRgbColor esee eene ennt tnter tnt tn tnnt tntn sint i tinere tn tintas enn 283 GUILID SEtCliP BING m iaeaea 283 GuiLib SetGreenRgbColor esee eene netten nnne saienisi naana kaiini e
176. e GuiConst KEIL COMPILER REENTRANT EasvilliGUIi GuiConst LANGUAGE ACTIVE CNT Purpose Count of languages included in the build This might be lower than the total count of defined languages if language subsets are used Full declaration define GuiConst LANGUAGE ACTIVE CNT XXX GuiConst LANGUAGE ALL ACTIVE Purpose Indicates that all defined languages are included in the build Full declaration define GuiConst LANGUAGE ALL ACTIVE GuiConst LANGUAGE CNT Purpose Count of total number of defined languages Full declaration define GuiConst LANGUAGE CNT XXX GuiConst LANGUAGE FIRST Purpose Index of first included language If all languages are included in the build the index will be zero Full declaration define GuiConst LANGUAGE FIRST XXX GuiConst LANGUAGE SOME ACTIVE Purpose Indicates that not all defined languages are included in the build Some languages are excluded through the use of a language set Full declaration define GuiConst LANGUAGE SOME ACTIVE GuiConst LANGUAGE XXX Purpose Defines a specific language The XXX is the language name taken from Language setup in easyGUI The keyword is followed by the language index All languages are defined in this way also if they are not present in the build because of the use of a language set Full declaration define GuiConst LANGUAGE XXX XXX GuiConst LINES PR SECTION Purpose Display lines for each display
177. e contrast regulation for later and concentrate on getting something on the display This could be a big mistake because a contrast setting at the lower limit will mask all attempts to write on the display The contrast setting should be changed from minimum to maximum and the display should correspondingly change from totally blank to rather dark If not something is wrong with the contrast regulating electronics or controlling code When seemingly working ok set the contrast to a middle value and proceed 2 Turning on a single pixel Write some code to turn on the top left pixel GuiLib Dot 0 0 GuiConst PIXEL ON This should turn on the upper left pixel If nothing happens try the opposite GuiLib Dot 0 0 GuiConst PIXEL OFF The last statement should normally not produce anything but sometimes the meaning of black and white pixels are mixed up because some display controllers use a zero bit as black while others use a one bit we are talking monochrome displays here assSiioaul Next make sure that the relevant GuiLib functions GuiLib Init and GuiLib Refresh are actually called at all A little embarrassing if they are not and if this is overlooked before proceeding with the next attempts because then guaranteed nothing will show up on the display Still no reaction Time to recheck all settings both easyGUI settings and the display controller specific code written previously If this doesn
178. e coordinate move is only in effect for items following the active area item Clipping panel Item types Clipping rectangle Active area Contains a check box that determines if the clipping action is active Touch area panel Item types Touch area The touch area number can be set The allowed range is 0 65535 This number is used in the easyGUI library when referencing to individual touch areas Any numbering scheme can be used even several touch areas with the same number if desired however only the last touch field of several simultaneously using identical touch area numbers will be recognized Text panel Item types Text Paragraph Structure call Indexed structure call Conditional structure call Variable Variable paragraph Scroll box Controls the appearance of texts and variables The following parameters can be set e Text box Text items only The actual text The s button opens a small window allowing simultaneous editing of all languages in the project for the item and furthermore allows selection of another language as the current The Ei button is only enabled if translation is on for this item A tip shift Enter hard line break is shown above the text box for paragraph items It denotes that a hard line break can be inserted into the paragraph text To perform it set the cursor into the required part of the text in the text box and press the key combination Shift Enter e Translation checkbox Text
179. e window Input parameters Scroll box index Function result Top line IN IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 209 EasyiliGUl 16 easyGUI LIBRARY FUNCTION REFERENCE There are five modules in the easyGUI system each a c file with associated h file e GuiLib e GuiDisplay e GuiFont e GuiVar e GuiStruct Main library unit Display driver unit easyGUI font definitions easyGUI user defined variable definitions easyGUI structure definitions Most target system functions are found in the GuiLib unit and its associated include files the rest are in the GuiDisplay unit The GuiLib unit uses a number of include and header files in order to keep its size manageable e GuiLibStruct h e Guiltems c e GuiComponents c e GuiGraph c e GuiGraphlH c e GuiGraphlV c e GuiGraph2H c e GuiGraph2V c e GuiGraph2H2P c e GuiGraph2V2P c e GuiGraph4H c e GuiGraph4V c Basic easyGUI declarations Additional library routines Additional library routines General graphical routines Graphical library for 1 bpp monochrome displays with horizontal display bytes Graphical library for 1 bpp monochrome displays with vertical display bytes Graphical library for 2 bpp grayscale displays with horizontal display bytes Graphical library for 2 bpp grayscale displays with vertical display bytes Graphical library for 2 bpp grayscale displays with horizontal display bytes and
180. eaches the ends of the scroll list Stopsat top bottom Wraps around From Parameters setup Parameters window Operations tab page The setting has no effect when testing in the structure editor Only on the target system can the effects be observed Scroll mode Can be selecting between Moving scroll line This is normal scrolling where the scroll line moves up and down and the list scrolls if necessary when the scroll line near the top or bottom of the visible window A numerical value determines how close the assSii aul scroll line can get to the top and bottom of the visible window before scrolling starts Fixed scroll line The scroll line is at a fixed position with the list scrolling up and down whenever the active scroll line index changes A numerical value determines the placement of the scroll line inside the visible window e Scroll line markers The scroll line marker section contains both commands for creating ordering and deleting scroll line marks and a set of parameters for each scroll line marker The creating ordering and deleting commands are Scroll line marker index Indicates for which scroll line marker parameters are shown Below are the marker index management buttons New Creates a new scroll line marker as a copy of the current marker The copy is then made the current marker The new marker is inserted after the current marker Delete Deletes the current marker
181. easyGUI when refreshing the system e Auto redraw item updating e Cursor field updating e Scroll box updating e Blink box updating e Display updating You should therefore only call GuiLib Refresh not GuiDisplay Refresh GuiLib ShowScreen The final basic easyGUI function is GuiLib ShowScreen which displays a specific structure just like it is displayed in the easyGUI editor The normal syntax is GuiLib ShowScreen GuiStruct GuiLib NO CURSOR GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW The first function argument ID s the structure to show the ID s are defined in the GuiStruct h file The two other arguments specify that no cursor shall be shown and that eventual auto redraw items from previously shown structures should be discarded This setup is the most usual Structures containing cursor fields will use the second argument to specify which cursor field to initially show instead of stating GuiLib NO CURSOR The last argument can be used if several structures are shown in succession where auto redraw items from the first structure should be maintained even after displaying the second structure This is done by specifying GuiLib NO RESET AUTO REDRAW instead ofGuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW The advanced components add on module kj 1 M t d S9 9 COMIP creates a number of internal structures to render the advanced components These internal structures are define
182. ect file folder The BROWSE button allows selection 4 Soluti assSii aul of any folder while the INSERT PROJECT FILE PATH button simply inserts the path to the project file making it easy to edit it C file extension selects the file extension for C files Most compilers use c while some older C compilers use cpp Interface files are always treated as having extension h Keep old files if unchanged can be selected if overwriting files that have not changed is not desirable Code generation mode A selection between normal mode and PC simulator mode can be made e Target normal This setting is used for all normal C code generation for the target system e PC simulator This setting is for generating code for the easyGUI PC Simulation Toolset see the easyGUI PC Simulation Toolset chapter The setting overrides some of the compiler setup settings see Parameters window Compiler tab page in order to easily produce code suited for PC usage To make sure C code generating is not left in this setting when intending to generate C code for the target system a small warning A is shown The target system path can optionally be different for normal and PC simulator modes which is often handy Language selection Normally all defined languages are included in the C code But if memory constraint makes it difficult to allow this languages can be divided into language sets It will then be necessary to make several builds each wi
183. ected bitmap image One color in the bitmap can be selected as transparent Options to select the bitmap file only appear when the Bitmap Radio button style is selected Count The number of radio icons to be included in this group Inter distance the vertical distance between radio icons Active radio button mark style Determines the style of the radio button that will be displayed in the active radio button It can be set according to one of three options Standard The mark will be a filled circle centred in the radio button Icon The mark is displayed as the selected font character Options to select the font character only appear when the Icon mark style is selected EasvilliGUIi Bitmap The mark is displayed as the selected bitmap image One color in the bitmap can be selected as transparent Options to select the bitmap file only appear when the Bitmap mark style is selected Mark color The color of the check mark is selected from one of seven options See the foreground color panel description for details of what the color selections mean This control is only displayed when the check mark style selected is Checked Crossed Filled or Icon Button panel Item types Button OK tm yt aSScoMpP Defines the parameters of a Button item The panel determines the layout and appearance of the button and the content text glyph of the button The panel contains the following items Button layout A dropdo
184. ed by the structures can also be included in the copying IMPORT OBJECT button starts importing of objects marked in the right panel Objects marked in the left panel are irrelevant EasyilliGUl 14 HOW TO SET UP YOUR SYSTEM MINIMUM RAM AND ROM REQUIREMENTS Because easyGUI is a purely graphic system it must have access to a reasonable amount of RAM and ROM to function properly How much RAM and ROM cannot be stated explicitly because it depends on the complexity of the user interface build in easyGUI but a couple of approximate levels can be stated e RAM usage 3KB Display width x Display height x Bits per color 8 Examples 128x64 pixels monochrome 3KB 128x64x1 8 4KB 240x128 pixels monochrome 3KB 240x128x1 8 7KB 320x240 pixels QVGA monochrome 3KB 320x240x1 8 13KB 128x64 pixels 4 bit color 3KB 128x64x4 8 5KB 240x128 pixels 8 bit color 3KB 240x128x8 8 34KB 320 x 240 pixels QVGA 24 bit color 3KB 320x240x24 8 228KB e ROM usage Program code font data structure data Examples Low complexity GUI 50 structures 2 full text ANSI fonts 1 partial big font 2 icon fonts 60KB 120KB depending on display size Medium complexity GUI 250 structures 2 full text ANSI fonts 2 partial big fonts 4 icon fonts 180KB 300KB depending on display size High complexity GUI 400 structures 4 full text Unicode fonts 2 partial big fonts 6 icon fonts 450 1200KB depending on display size
185. ed from the easyGUI installation For the Microsoft Visual Studio version the important files are WinSimulator cpp The main Windows application source As delivered WinSimulator cpp does nothing more than contain a simple visualization of the target system display and show a simple call to the GuiLib library GuiLib c and GuiLib h library These files are identical to the target system library files GuiDisplay c and GuiDisplay h display control unit These files are radically different from the normal GuiDisplay c and GuiDisplay h display control files of the easyGUI library This is the Windows display driver which is the core of easySIM It uses the data from the GuiLib library in exactly the same way as the normal target system i e GuiLib doesn t know that it is working in a Windows environment Guiltems c GuiComponents c GuiLibStruct h GuiGraph c GuiGraphlH c and GuiGraphlV c include libraries These files are identical to the target system library files lll COLOR and UNICODE versions GuiGraph2H c GuiGraph2V c GuiGraph2H2P c GuiGraph2V2P c GuiGraph4H c GuiGraph4V c GuiGraph5 c GuiGraph8 c GuiGraph16 c and GuiGraph24 c include libraries These files are identical to the target system library files For the DEV C version the important files are GNUSimulator cpp The main Windows application source As delivered GNUSimulator cpp does nothing more than contain a simple visualization of the target system display
186. ed in variable formatting function calls HH MM am pm hours and minutes time format is used with upper case AM PM 12 hour indication fdefine GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 12 AMPM 8 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 12 ampm Purpose Full declaration Used in variable formatting function calls HH MM am pm hours and minutes time format is used with lower case am pm 12 hour indication define GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 12 ampm 6 assSii aul GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 24 Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls HH MM hours and minutes time format is used in 24 hours style Full declaration define GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 24 4 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 12 AMPM Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls HH MM SS am pm hours minutes and seconds time format is used with upper case AM PM 12 hour indication Full declaration define GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 12 AMPM 9 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 12 ampm Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls HH MM SS am pm hours minutes and seconds time format is used with lower case am pm 12 hour indication Full declaration define GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 12 ampm 7 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 24 Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls HH MM SS hours minutes and seconds time format is used in 24 hours style Full declaration define GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMMSS 24 5 GuiLib LANGUAGE TEX
187. een specified Four corner adjustment example GuiLib TouchAdjustReset GuiLib TouchAdjustSet 12 13 16 16 GuiLib TouchAdjustSet 230 11 224 8 GuiLib TouchAdjustSet 12 119 13 115 GuiLib TouchAdjustSet 233 121 236 117 The touch interface coordinates 16 16 corresponds to display coordinates 12 13 touch interface coordinates 224 8 corresponds to display coordinates 230 11 touch interface coordinates 13 115 corresponds to display coordinates 12 119 and finally touch interface coordinates 236 117 corresponds to display coordinates 233 121 The ordering of the GuiLib TouchAdjustSet function calls is irrelevant assSiiaul For a simple system where touch and display coordinates are always in agreement no touch adjustment routines need to be called 3 Event handling Each time the GuiLib ShowScreen function is used to show an easyGUI structure the currently registered touch areas are lost New touch areas found in the structure being displayed are remembered in a list When an event from the touch interface hardware is detected the GuiLib TouchCheck function must be called It shall be supplied with the touch event coordinates for the event in touch interface hardware coordinates GuiLib TouchCheck first converts the touch event coordinates to display coordinates using the conversion strategy specified earlier if needed It then searches through the current list of touch areas checking if the co
188. efore difficult to cover all possible setups Contact easyGUI support if you encounter trouble in the setup process wg GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS Solutions EasyiliGUi SIMULATED DISPLAY jale e g xla t amp E ES Basics Display controller Color Simulated display Compiler Operation Simulated display Border color C As Pixel ON Display border width 4 Undrawn area i Settings on this page only affect the visual representation of the display inside the easyGUI environment in order to more accurately reflect the real thing The selections are not transferred to the target system Border color Select between light and dark border Most displays use light color for the border area also called the overscan area but some displays are dark in this area Normally this is not user selectable but depends on the technology used in the display It is important to select the correct setting here because a dark border makes it necessary for all dark text on light background to stay clear of the border with at least one pixel to avoid the text gluing to the border where a light border does not have this problem The border color thus somewhat affects the layout of the user interface If light text on dark background is used the problem is of course reversed Display border width The border area is the visible area around the active pixels in the display Measured in pixels A se
189. eful to take a look at the Screen Basic Graphics 1 structure This structure shows a random sample of the different graphical elements in easyGUI and shows how to use the four rectangle types and the four circle types Iq ejiBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 195 Solutions assSii aul easyCOMP COMPONENTS easyGUI with the OK v i a S 9 COMIP add on module supports a number of advanced components for creating advanced user interface designs even quicker The following sections discuss how these components can be used to deliver really compelling GUI solutions rapidly cm Advanced Configuration Say that an embedded system has 3 settings for the smoothness of its results The system has some Flash memory where the settings can be stored but the user can also make one time changes So changing the smoothness setting should only be saved to Flash as an option Once the user has selected the options it needs to be accepted to the system or rejected Let s see how that might look structure Screen Advanced Config 1 Advanced Configurati n Rough 4 E Coarse Q Save to Flash v Smooth Q A ESC Cancel Ok ES e ais This example shows the panel button radio button and check box advanced components These items can of course all be created using lines and circles rounded rectangles and icons easyGUI with easyCOMP allows this screen to be created in just 9 s
190. elected as a child of another structure The CHILD STRUCTURE button is visible if the current item calls another structure These buttons don t edit anything they are just convenient ways of navigating between structures belonging to a common family tree Navigation shortcuts All item types Below this panel and before the following panels there is a small row of buttons that allow the user to quickly jump to the lower panels All items include a Top button to return to the top panel the other navigation buttons vary depending on the item currently selected assSii aul Item information panel All item types The first panel below the navigation shortcuts provides a simple text box where the user can write some information about this item Writing content here is optional and is provided only to help users to record information about why an item has been added in order to help when returning to the item in the future Primary position panel Item types Clear area Text Paragraph Pixel Line Framed rectangle Filled rectangle Framed rounded rectangle Filled rounded rectangle Circle Ellipse Quarter Circle Quarter Ellipse Bitmap Background bitmap Structure call Indexed structure call Variable Variable paragraph Check box Radio button Button Panel Graph Scroll box Active area Clipping rectangle Scroll box Graphics layer Touch area Edits the primary coordinate pair X1 Y1 Coordinates have 0 0 at the to
191. em so that it can be referenced through the GuiLib API This number cannot be set manually and is assigned when a new data set is added using the NEW button The identifier for a data set can be changed using the UP and Down buttons but only within the range of the number of data sets currently defined A data set can be deleted using the DELETE button and the data set identifiers of any following data sets will be decremented accordingly If only one data set is defined the DELETE button is disabled Data representation This parameter determines how the data set will appear on the Graph There are 5 options for how the data will be represented and 5 controls allow the representation to be adjusted to individual needs The controls are Width Height Thickness Border color and Fill color where a control is not applicable for the selected representation option the control is disabled The color control work exactly like the control defined in the Foreground color panel described previously M Dot Each data point in the data set will be represented as a dot circle The diameter of each dot is determined by the value in the Width box The dot has a border and is filled The border color is set with the Border color control and the fill color is determined by the Fill color control Line A standard line graph each data point is connected by a single pixel width line The line is not smoothed in anyway the data points are simply joined by the
192. ems GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph ShowYAxis GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U AxisIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based AxisIndex Index of Y axis in the graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 QANAAANAAAAADA H H H H H H H H GuiLib_GraphicsFilter_Init Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Lib Graph DrawAxes Lib Graph HideXAxis Lib Graph HideYAxis Lib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin Lib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin Lib Graph SetXAxisRange Lib Graph SetYAxisRange Lib Graph ShowXAxis Initializes a Graphics filter operation Used only for Graphics filter items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib GraphicsFilter Init GuiConst INT8U GraphicsFilterIndex void FilterFuncPtr GuiConst INT8U DestAddress GuiConst INT16U DestLineSize GuiConst INT8U SourceAddress GuiConst INT16U SourceLineSize GuiConst INT16U Width GuiConst INT16U Height GuiConst INT32S FilterPars 10 Graphics filter index FilterFuncPtr Address of Graphics filter call back function of type void FuncName QAAAANAAADA iCons iCons iCons iCons iCons iCons iCons ET T EF GENES ET ET Hi Ho H HH HH NT8U Des NT16U Des NT16U Hei QINTSOS Fil 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok tAddress tLineSize INT8U SourceAddress INT16U Sou NT16U Width rceLineSize ght terPars 10
193. endian mode LSB at first memory address others in big endian mode MSB at first memory address The setting is recognized by 4 bpp and higher color depths Observe that also the micro controller endian mode can be set on the Compiler tab page No of display controllers horizontally Some displays uses more than one display controller horizontally splitting the display job between several display controllers An example is the Hitachi HD61202 controller a 64x64 pixel controller when used with 128x64 pixel displays No of display controllers vertically Some displays uses more than one display controller vertically splitting the display job between several display controllers 4 eaSSiIQGUI Basics Display controller Color Simulated display Compiler Operation Colors Color Grayscale mode r Color mode Color via palette index Pixel OFF A Direct RGB color M Color depth bits per pixel 4 1 bit monochrome 2 bit 4 gray C 4bit 16 5 bit 32 gray levels 5 8 bit 256 palette entries colors gray levels C 12 bit 4096 colors 15 bit 32K colors C 16 bit 64K colors 18 bit 256K colors 24 bit 16M colors JN Palette RGB fomat The color page controls how the display controller handles color modes Selecting the optimal color mode and color depth is a complex evaluation of needs in t
194. ent Determines how the text is placed inside the field width Can be left adjusted centered or right adjusted Don t confuse this alignment with the normal alignment for texts boxes etc The formatter alignment determines how the digits characters are placed in the field width With the field width set to zero dynamic width this setting has no effect e Format Can be Decimal Hexadecimal 1234h Hexadecimal 0x1234 Hexadecimal 1234 no pre postfix Exponential Time MM SS Time HH MM 24 hour clock Time HH MM SS 24 hour clock Time HH MM am pm clock Time HH MM SS am pm clock Time HH MM AM PM clock Time HH MM SS AM PM clock The exponential notation works only on float variables The time format works only on integer variables and uses the variable value as a minute or second count depending on the chosen type types displaying seconds expect time values measured in seconds e Always show sign If set it will always show the sign even for positive values 123 Zero is shown as 0 Has no effect on unsigned variables e Zero padding Pads the value with leading zeroes With the field width set to zero dynamic width this setting has no effect Works only with alignment set to right adjusted e Trailing decimal zeros Pads the value with trailing zeroes so that the number of decimals are always the same e Thousands separator Adds characters if decimal character is or characters if
195. ent can be selected manually It is advisable to start with the first option and then shift to the manual placement if the result is not as desired Vertical placement Two options are possible for the vertical placement of imported characters At font baseline easyGUI tries to place characters so that capital letters are correctly placed at the font baseline The letter E is used as a template Other Y position The vertical placement can be selected manually It is advisable to start with the first option and then shift to the manual placement if the result is not as desired Only create characters existing in the font If this setting is checked the importer will only create font characters already existing in the TTF font If unchecked all font characters in the indicated range will be created no matter if they exist in the TTF font or not If importing e g Asian Unicode characters it is advisable to have this setting checked as characters not existing in the TTF font are probably not usable in the Windows environment and will therefore be difficult to enter in texts Do no overwrite existing characters If an imported character is already presetnt in the easyGUI font it is skipped The IMPORT FONT button executes the actual import conversion process It is best to import TTF characters into a font with generous pixel dimensions so that nothing is clipped Later when the correct sizes and settings have been determine
196. environment It is part of the easyGUI package and is found in the easySIM folder PURPOSE There are several interesting uses for easySIM e Demonstration software Can show the intentions of the user interface for e g sales staff or potential customers with the added bonus that the screen presentation can be made to look like the target system or part of it e Experimental parts of the user interface It is generally much easier and faster to develop purely on the PC than to download code into the target system in order to test user interface specific items e Development of the user interface before the actual target system hardware becomes available Demonstrating the user interface as a Windows application developed with the PC simulator is far superior compared to using the easyGUI structure editor This is especially true if the persons receiving the demonstration are not technically skilled NECESSARY FILES In order for easySIM to work the following items is necessary e A PC based compiler easySIM is delivered in with support for the following development toolsets Borland C Builder 6 for Windows Embarcadero C Builder XE for Windows Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 2010 for Windows DEV C 4 9 9 2 GNU for Windows This product is free if used under the license rules of the GNU General Public License Please look at http www bloodshed net devcpp html for further information The final executable will look al
197. er code Structure selection All structures Only structures prefixed with rec Ignore these texts after structure name Ee cwsumwneme texts with semicolons w Only include texts marked for translation String format C Strings Character hex codes The following parameters can be set here Use Unicode format in exported files Selects between ANSI and Unicode character codes in the created h files I GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 81 Solutions assSii aul Main H file File name for the main h file Extension is fixed as h and cannot be changed Main H file fixed header amp footer code Shows a secondary window allowing entry of a header and a footer text section for the main h file The header footer system is the same as used in the C Code Generation window F1 1 Language H files fixed header amp footer code Shows a secondary window allowing entry of a header and a footer text section for the language h files All language h files will receive the same header footer Structure selection All structures No structure filter is applied All structures in the project are scanned for texts Only structures prefixed with A structure name filter can be applied All structures beginning with the specified prefix are scanned for texts Other structures are ignored Ignore these texts after structure name prefix When determining the
198. er is used when retrieving a text string from remote text storage The buffer has a size just big enough to contain the largest existing text GuiLib RemoteTextReadBlock GuiConst INT32U SourceOffset GuiConst INT32U SourceSize void TargetAddr GuiLib AccentuatePixelColor Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Accentuates color in display controller color setup Colors with less than 5096 mean gray are made darker otherwise brighter Amount in 96o 0 o gives no change 1000960 gives pure black or white GuiConst INTCOLOR GuiLib AccentuatePixelColor GuiConst INTCOLOR PixelColor GuiConst INT16U Amount Encoded pixel color value Accentuate value 0 1000960 Encoded pixel color value GuiLib AccentuateRgbColor GuiLib BrightenPixelColor GuiLib BrightenRgbColor GuiLib DarkenPixelColor GuiLib DarkenRgbColor GuiLib AccentuateRgbColor Purpose Accentuates RGB color Colors with less than 5096 mean gray are made darker otherwise brighter Amount in 96o 096o gives no change 100096o gives pure black or white assSiiauIl Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiConst INT32U GuiLib AccentuateRgbColor GuiConst INT32U RgbColor GuiConst INT16U Amount 24 bit RGB color value Accentuate value 0 1000960 24 bit RGB color value GuiLib AccentuatePixelColor GuiLib BrightenPixelColor GuiLib BrightenRgbColor GuiLib DarkenPixelColor GuiLib D
199. ere appropriate in easyGUI code Full declaration define GuiConst CODEVISION COMPILER GuiConst COLOR BYTE SIZE Purpose Size of color variables Can be from 1 to 3 bytes in size Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR BYTE SIZE XXX GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 1 Purpose Indicates a 1 bpp monochrome color depth assSiiaul Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 1 GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 2 Purpose Indicates a 2 bpp grayscale color depth Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 2 GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 4 Purpose Indicates a 4 bpp grayscale or color color depth Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 4 GuiConst_COLOR_DEPTH_5 Purpose Indicates a 5 bpp grayscale color depth Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 5 GuiConst_COLOR_DEPTH_8 Purpose Indicates a 8 bpp grayscale or color color depth Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 8 GuiConst_COLOR_DEPTH_12 Purpose Indicates a 12 bpp color depth Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 12 GuiConst_COLOR_DEPTH_15 Purpose Indicates a 15 bpp color depth Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 15 GuiConst_COLOR_DEPTH_16 Purpose Indicates a 16 bpp color depth Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 16 GuiConst_COLOR_DEPTH_18 Purpose Indicates a 18 bpp color depth Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 18
200. es odi A c arget normal GuiStruct c Pf Fixed code View source G E at GuiStructh Pf Fired code View source Separate destination path M Language selection GuiVar c gm Fixed code amp View source Select language set Jar languages Sao GuiVarh f Fredcode A Vien source amp Language set setup GuiConsth f Fiedcode R View source mr e i Pr Ja I Uncompressed fonts T p Generates basic setup stuctures External memory storage PF Make structures source AM Tue eee I Fonts Structures with separate text file 5 Code size Bitmaps Le Compressed bitmaps Requires RGB color mode with at least 8 bit color depth and select MAKE ALL SOURCE The units GuiConst h GuiFont c h GuiVar c h GuiStruct c h and VarInit c are created The important unit initially is the GuiConst h unit which contains the basic easyGUI settings of your system 3 Display control functions The software must be able to control the display This is done in the GuiDisplay unit The following actions must be implemented e Display initialization e Display writing e Light and contrast control easyGUI does not require display reading Ig GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 158 Solutions EasyiliGUl Display initialization The display must be properly initialized Thi
201. et between scroll lines Defines the vertical offset for scroll lines Scroll line offset X Y Defines the offset of the topmost scroll line relative to the primary coordinates of the Scroll box item Scroll line width height Defines the active area of each scroll line All scroll line drawings will be clipped to within this area This value should be smaller than the vertical offset between scroll lines The value zero can be entered meaning that the vertical offset between scroll lines value is used i e scroll lines that precisely touch each other without overlaps or gaps Scroll line structure Defines the layout of a single scroll line Not defining a scroll line structure is meaningless but possible as scroll lines will then only be single filled rectangles Use relative coordinates for the scroll line structure it is best to start T with relative 0 0 for the first item in the scroll line structure The Structure offset X Y settings see below can then be used to place the scroll line structure correctly relative to the scroll line boundaries Structure offset X Y Defines the offset of the scroll line structure relative to the primary coordinates of the Scroll box item Scroll line background color Selects background color for scroll lines The alternatives and the principles are the same as above described see Background color panel Wrap around mode Selects between three modes of wrapping around when scrolling r
202. et in easyGUI Errors on this subject almost certainly results in a non operating system Other potential areas of trouble are stack sizes and memory wrap around if the compiler only supports e g 64KB segments Some linkers don t even warn on memory wrap around A final source of errors are the two task switching protection functions GuiDisplay Lock and GuiDisplay Unlock Errors arising from improper code in these functions show up as periodical problems with garbled display contents EasyilliGUl 15 HOW TO UTILIZE easyGUI A TUTORIAL A system with the complexity of easyGUI takes some time getting used to The tutorial in this chapter walks you through the various aspects of structure editing from the very simple to the more complex tasks EFFICIENT LEARNING The tutorial is best read while running easyGUI To achieve the quickest and most efficient learning easyGUI should be started and the project file Tutorial gui loaded This project file is installed as part of the easyGUI system and is found in the sub folder Manual under the folder containing easyGUIl If a standard install was performed it is found under C Program files easyGUIManual ITEM TYPES Let s start with reviewing the different types of items Enter structure editing Bi easyGUI project Tutorial file CheasyGL Project Tutorial File name C XeasyGUIXTutoi Display 240x128 pixels ori Character mode Unicode 16 bit cl File commands Recently o
203. et system Several Graphics filters can be active simultaneously but they must then have different index numbers If only one Graphics filter is used at any time all defined Graphics filters can be given index 0 simplifying addressing them Index numbers of Graphics layers and Graphics filters are not related e Input layer Defines the source for the filter operation There are several alternatives Current layer The latest defined Graphics layer is used as the input layer Previous layer The next to latest defined Graphics layer is used as the input layer Base layer The normal display buffer is used as the input layer Layer index No XX A specific Graphics layer is used as the input layer If no Graphics layer corresponding to the specification is found the base layer is used instead e Output layer Defines the destination of the filter operation There are several alternatives Current layer The latest defined Graphics layer is used as the output layer Previous layer The next to latest defined Graphics layer is used as the output layer Base layer The normal display buffer is used as the output layer Layer index No XX A specific Graphics layer is used as the output layer If no Graphics layer corresponding to the specification is found the base layer is used instead e Continue at layer Defines the destination canvas of drawing commands issued after the Graphics filter item There are several alternatives Current layer The lates
204. et system and Unicode aware systems e All kinds of characters like e g Western world Cyrillic Japanese can be placed in the same font but must adhere to the limits of the character mode in use ANSI or Unicode Character definition A character is defined in a matrix of fixed coordinates common for all characters in a font An 11x21 text font is used as an example in the following chapters Each character is defined as a pixel pattern e g a capital F The character is placed according to certain fixed positions in the character cell There are three horizontal and one vertical position assSiiaul MmENENENE mammmEM ERE foetal ee e ale tl EE Mid Line ae EN E mu Ep ps eap p p dep n ERE BEBE EH ERES EE El BE mm a BE Es mm HER Baseline MB Box Right Capital letters should generally go from Base Line to Top Line Letters with accents and the like at the top e g utilizes the area above Top Line Lower case letters are placed between Base Line
205. eters 1 Ok GuiLib ScrollBox Close GuiLib ScrollBox Init GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw GuiLib ScrollBox SetIndicator Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Sets scroll indicator position Used only for Scroll box items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox SetIndicator GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex GuiConst INT16S StartLine Scroll box index Indicator line 1 means no indicator 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLine GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLineCount GuiLib ScrollBox SetLineMarker GuiLib ScrollBox SetLineMarker Purpose Remarks Sets scroll marker position and line count Scroll marker index 0 active scroll line can only cover 0 or 1 scroll line Used only for Scroll box items EasvilliGUIi Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox SetLineMarker GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex GuiConst INT16U ScrollLineMarkerIndex GuiConst INT16S StartLine GuiConst INT16U Size Scroll box index Scroll marker index Marker start line 1 means no marker Marker line count clipped to a maximum of 1 for marker index 0 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLine GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLineCount GuiLib ScrollBox SetIndicator GuiLib ScrollBox SetTopLine Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Sets topmost
206. ex Index of data set in the graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 iLib Graph AddDataPoint iLib Graph AddDataSet iLib Graph DrawDataPoint iLib Graph DrawDataSet iLib Graph Redraw iLib Graph RemoveDataSet iLib Graph ShowDataSet QQOQQQAQDA H H H H H H p GuiLib_Graph_HideXAxis Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Marks an X axis as invisible Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph HideXAxis GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U AxisIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based AxisIndex Index of X axis in the graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 iLib Graph DrawAxes iLib Graph HideYAxis iLib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin iLib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin iLib Graph Redraw iLib Graph SetXAxisRange iLib Graph SetYAxisRange iLib Graph ShowXAxis iLib Graph ShowYAxis QAAAADAAAAANA H H H H p p H H H GuiLib_Graph_HideYAxis Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Marks an Y axis as invisible Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph HideYAxis GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U AxisIndex GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based assSii aul Output Related functions AxisIndex Index of Y axis in
207. ex of data set in the graph index is zero based Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 iLib Graph AddDataPoint iLib Graph AddDataSet iLib Graph DrawDataPoint iLib Graph DrawDataSet iLib Graph HideDataSet iLib Graph Redraw iLib Graph ShowDataSet QQNQAAADA H H H H Be H H GuiLib_Graph_SetXAxisRange Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Changes an X axis range Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph SetXAxisRange GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U AxisIndex GuiConst INT32S MinValue GuiConst INT32S MaxValue GraphIndex Index of graph index is zero based AxisIndex Index of X axis in the graph index is zero based MinValue Minimum limit of X axis range MaxValue Maximum limit of X axis range Returns zero if an error is encountered otherwise 1 GuiLib Graph DrawAxes GuiLib Graph HideXAxis GuiLib Graph HideYAxis GuiLib Graph OffsetXAxisOrigin GuiLib Graph OffsetYAxisOrigin GuiLib Graph SetYAxisRange assSiioaul GuiLib Graph ShowXAxis GuiLib Graph ShowYAxis GuiLib Graph SetYAxisRange Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Changes a Y axis range Nothing is drawn in this function Used only for Graph items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Graph SetYAxisRange GuiConst INT8U GraphIndex GuiConst INT8U AxisIndex GuiConst
208. f easyGUI the foreground and background colors were merely swapped that corresponds to both foreground bar color and background bar color being set to Invert If the item in question is not used in cursor fields scroll lines the bar background color has no effect a The Border pixels area controls the addition of an extra pixel row or column to make the background more prominent and to allow the background to fully contain e g a g letter without the bottom of the g touching the background border One or more of the four rectangles surrounding the Border pixels text can be clicked If a rectangle is black it means that an extra pixel row column is added on that side Example LEE Normal setting Border pixels 5 LIEFE Extra bottom row of pixels L Border pixels Border pixels also work for background boxes Miscellaneous panel Item types Text Paragraph Pixel Line Framed rectangle Filled rectangle Framed rounded rectangle Filled rounded rectangle Circle Ellipse Quarter circle Quarter ellipse Bitmap Background bitmap Structure call Indexed structure call Conditional structure call Variable Variable paragraph Contains various special item flags e Cursor field If checked the item is considered a cursor field by the target system The cursor number can be selected in an edit box to the right of the check box only visible when the check box is checked Cursor fields consume a sizeable amount
209. f no Paragraph items are marked as scrollable this directive will not be present either and some library code related to paragraph scrolling is excluded define GuiConst T GuiConst TOUCHAREA CNT Purpose Full declaration EXTBOX FII ELDS ON Defines number of different touch area ID numbers currently in use define GuiConst TOUCHAR EA CNT assSii aul GuiLib unit This unit contains the core library for handling the easyGUI system The unit should never by edited as this will make updating to newer versions of the easyGUI library difficult The unit must have the same version number as the easyGUI Windows application in use The GuiLib unit includes one of the graphical library files GuiGraphlH c GuiGraphlV c GuiGraph2H c GuiGraph2V c GuiGraph2H2P c GuiGraph2V2P c GuiGraph4H c GuiGraph4V c GuiGraph5 c GuiGraph8 c GuiGraphl6 c Or GuiGraph24 c depending on the selected color and display controller setup Furthermore GuiLib uses a number of include files in order to keep the files down to manageable sizes The following constants variables and functions are available in alphabetical order Constants Constants only relevant internally between the easyGUI units are not mentioned GuiLib ALIGN CENTER Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be centered Full declaration define GuiLib ALIGN CENTER 2 GuiLib ALIGN LEFT Purpose Used in text formatting fun
210. face hardware are fed to the proper easyGUI library routines and easyGUI checks if any touch area falls under the position where a touch event happened If so the easyGUI library returns the touch area number as set up in the Structure editor 1 Touch interface hardware The touch interface hardware is not controlled by easyGUI and can therefore be implemented in any way found suitable 2 Coordinate training On systems where the touch hardware coordinates and display coordinates coincide by definition typically touch hardware built into display coordinate training is not necessary and this section can therefore be skipped The touch interface coordinate training only needs to be accomplished at system power on Preferably the values should be stored so that coordinate training can be reduced to a minimum There are two variants of coordinate training e Two diagonal corner coordinate positions Correspondence between touch interface coordinates and display coordinates are defined for two diagonally opposing positions P1 P2 The positions can occupy any two opposing corners In this conversion mode coordinates are converted individually in the X and Y directions i e X coordinate conversion is not affected by the Y coordinate and vice versa e Four corner coordinate positions Correspondence between touch interface coordinates and display coordinates are defined for four positions one near each corner a
211. functions Scrolls text box contents one pixel position down Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down Pixel GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Text box index 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib TextBox Scroll End Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll To PixelLine GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll End Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Scrolls text box contents to the bottom Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll End GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Text box index 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home GuiLib TextBox Scroll To Line GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up assSii aui GuiLib TextBox Scroll End Pixel Purpose Scrolls text box contents to the bottom Remarks Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll End Pixel GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Input Text box index Output 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok Related functions GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll To PixelLine GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll FitsInside Purpose Determines if a text fits co
212. g settings are possible Like Button up text Check box available on the Down and Disabled tabs only that allow all three states to have the same text string assSii aul Button text Sets the text string to be shown in this button state Like Button up color amp font Check box available on the Down and Disabled tabs that allow all three states to have the same color and font settings Button text color Sets the font color of the text in this button state The color is selected from one of seven options See the foreground color panel description for details of what the color selections mean Button text font e Font Sets the font to be used with this text using the drop down list of available fonts A shortcut button to go to the font edit window is provided to the right e Style Sets the style to No change default Fixed width Proportional or PS numerical e Underlining Check box to underline the text shown in the button Common button text parameters These parameters are applied to all button states e Translation Check this control if the button texts should be changed according to the language setting e Text direction Set whether the text should be drawn Left to Right or Right to Left By default this is determined by the language in use Glyph This part of the panel is only enabled if the Button layout includes a glyph It consists of a common panel and a tab panel The common part consists of t
213. ge panel to the right e Current char Editing operations only work on the currently selected character i e the character shown in the single character panel e Range Editing operations work on the range of character codes indicated just below All characters existing within the range range limits included are affected by editing commands e All characters Editing operations work on all characters in the font For the latter two options a small warning AN is shown to remind of the potentially huge alterations to the font The character range setting works on the editing functions indicated by the gray lines going from command buttons to the Character range panel An alternative is to select a range of characters in the character set panel Several characters can be selected by dragging the mouse in the character set panel a block clicking on a character while holding down the Shift key extend shrink block or clicking on a character while holding down the Ctrl key include exclude single character This method of data selection is common in Windows Please Observe that the Character range panel setting takes precedence so a range of characters selected in the character set panel is only useful if the Character range panel is set to Single character One character is always the active character unless the font is empty This character is shown in the single character panel Editing commands A large number of commands are
214. ge line Item 3 is a simple explanatory text Language while item 4 is more complex It introduces the concept of indexed structures which is without doubt the most important aspect of easyGUI display design The task is to display a text based on a language setting In this example we want to display the language designations with their native spelling character set English English German Deutsch French Francais Spanish Espa ol Italian Italiano It should be fairly clear that just showing a text variable is a solution but a rather restricted solution because it forces us to do string manipulations on the target system and it is far easier to do things in easyGUI in the comfort of our PC environment And here the concept of indexed structures comes in handy A variable has been declared called DiConfigLanguage It is a numerical variable 8 bit unsigned but that is not essential here and the values 0 4 determines the language selection with zero indicating English Look at the structure with item 4 selected s AI HU me ee Right adjust Y yx Yag Result Right Indexed structure call LanguageT ext v Jump to structure Variable DiConfigLanguage ca c Type 8 bit unsigned Value 0 Text Font No change ara Result ANSI 7 The two important properties in this discussion are Indexed structure call and Variable Indexed structure call is set to LanguageText and variable is set to
215. generation Under most circumstances only structure data and perhaps variable data has been edited and generation of font data is therefore not needed speeding up the file generation a little For this the MAKE STRUCTURES SOURCE button can be used Generating only font data can be done with the MAKE FONTS SOURCE button To generate all files use the MAKE ALL SOURCE button This should be used whenever changes have been made to the setup of the project or if execution time is not a problem each time changes have been made Fixed code can be added to each file by using the buttons FIxED CODE The code could be compiler directives include directives copyright notices etc The code is saved in the easyGUI database Custom content can be added to each file generated by easyGUI in three areas 4 eaSSiliIQGUI e Header This content is added to the very top of the file This is typically where copyright headers would be added e Fixed code Area to add in static code or declarations In header files this content is added before the closing endif to ensure that the code is only included once e Footer This content is added at the very bottom of the file This may be used to add comments to close the file to comply with coding guidelines standards that may need to be adhered to The generated files can be viewed using the VIEW SOURCE buttons IN IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 148 Solut
216. h files Full declaration define GuiConst AVRGCC COMPILER GuiConst BIT BOTTOMRIGHT Purpose Defines that display bytes are oriented with bit zero at right horizontal display bytes or bottom vertical display bytes Full declaration define GuiConst BIT BOTTOMRIGHT GuiConst BIT TOPLEFT Purpose Defines that display bytes are oriented with bit zero at left horizontal display bytes or top vertical display bytes Full declaration define GuiConst BIT TOPLEFT GuiConst BITMAP SUPPORT ON Purpose Bitmap module enabled Full declaration define GuiConst BITMAP SUPPORT ON assSii aul GuiConst BLINK FIELDS MAX Purpose Defines highest blink field number currently in use Full declaration define GuiConst BLINK FIELDS MAX GuiConst BLINK FIELDS OFF Purpose No blink fields in use If no items are marked as blink field this directive will not be present either and some library code related to blink field handling is excluded Full declaration define GuiConst BLINK FIELDS OFF GuiConst BLINK LF COUNTS Purpose Line feeds are included when counting characters for blinking operations on marked items If not defined line feeds will not count Full declaration define GuiConst BLINK LF COUNTS GuiConst_BLINK_SUPPORT_ON Purpose Blink module enabled Full declaration define GuiConst BLINK SUPPORT ON GuiConst BYTE HORIZONTAL Purpose Defines that display bytes in the display controller are
217. he LSB and Blue in MSB in easyGUI Color fields in the library are 24 bit for 24 or 18 bit color depth 16 bit for 16 15 or 12 bit color depth or 8 bit for 8 bit or less color depth grayscale Monochrome e Numerical value The numerical value is only used inside easyGUI it is up to the programmer to assign proper values on the target system Has a special meaning for string type variables where it defines the number of characters e String value Has only meaning for string type variables e Explanation Free text for information purposes only Variables not in use anywhere in easyGUI are marked with a special background pattern e g DebugLong All values can be saved in a file and later reloaded using the SAVE VALUES and LOAD VALUES buttons This can come handy when setting up a lot of variables controlling dynamic structures to show a specific situation in easyGUI The save load feature has no effect on target system code When easyGUI generates the project C code a Varlnit c file is included which contains C code to initialize all easyGUI variables to the same value as in the easyGUI Project By pressing Ustp BY a list of structures referencing the currently selected variable is shown Double clicking on one of the structures jumps directly to the structure editing window New Edit Variable New variables are added to the list using the New button which displays the new edit variable window 4 eaSSiiIQGUI
218. he following options Glyph Style Common to all 3 button states The Style can be set to Icon the glyph will be a font character or bitmap The tab panel has 3 tabs so that the glyph can be set independently depending on which of the three possible button states the button is in The button states are Up not pressed Down pressed and Disabled For each of the states the following settings are possible when the Icon glyph style is selected Like Button up glyph Check box available on the Down and Disabled tabs only that allow all three states to have the same icon and settings Button glyph color Sets the icon color in this button state The color is selected from one of seven options See the foreground color panel description for details of what the color selections mean Button glyph icon e Char Select the font character that will be used as this glyph Can be directly typed in the text box or selected from all font characters by clicking the CHAR SET button assSii aul e Font Select the font set from which the selected icon will be taken e Icon offset X Y Changes the position the icon in the button Note that if the button layout includes Text easyGUI moves the text when the icon is moved in order to maintain an even appearance The following settings are available in the tab panel when the Bitmap glyph style is selected Panel panel Like Button up glyph Check box available on the Down and Di
219. he largest one among all the item types However its size may vary depending on certain selected settings The following groups of parameters can be set e Basic parameters Index No Identifies the scroll box on the target system Several scroll boxes can be active simultaneously but they must then have different index numbers If only one scroll box is visible at any time all defined scroll boxes can be given index 0 simplifying addressing them in the target system Scroll box type There are two different types of scroll boxes Scroll box List box The list box does not have an active scroll line only passive scroll line markers Scroll line marker 0 is still obligatory but is not treated specially Initially no scroll line markers will be visible The main difference between a scroll box and a list box is the way scrolling is performed each time a scroll command is issued line up line down go to home go to end or go to line For scroll boxes the primary scroll line marker EasvilliGUIi index 0 determines the scrolling If this marker reaches the top or bottom of the scroll box it will scroll For a list box any scroll command will cause a scroll Makeup structure Defines the scroll box body layout Leaving it empty is allowed The scroll box body can also be defined through individual items preceding the Scroll box item Visible scroll line count Defines how many scroll lines are visible in the box Vertical offs
220. he user interface capabilities of the selected display controller available RAM and ROM and processor power Higher color depths puts increased demands on every aspect of the target system hardware but also produces more pleasant results increasing the quality feel of the product Colors panel e Pixel On and Pixel Off colors I MONOCHROME version Used to make the display look like the real thing when showing it in the easyGUI application Has no influence on the target system lll COLOR and UNICODE versions Defines which colors are to be used when specifying Pixel ON and Pixel OFF colors for structure items Default is black for Pixel ON and white for Pixel Off These colors are also used on the target system ng 6jiBI5 Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 55 Solutions E asviliGUIi Color Grayscale mode panel Only lll COLOR and UNICODE versions Defines the type of color management used by the display controller Can be e Gray scale Can be used with from 1 bpp 2 colors to 8 bpp 256 colors color depths No definition of how the colors are constructed is necessary for grayscale mode easyGUI defines a range of gray colors ranging from purely white to purely black with the number of colors defined by the next parameter Color depth Selecting Gray scale and 1 bpp 2 colors color depth corresponds to a monochrome display with only Pixel ON and Pixel OFF capability This is the native mode of easyGUI I MONOCHROM
221. her and some library code related to cursor field handling is excluded Full declaration define GuiConst CURSOR FIELDS OFF GuiConst_CURSOR_MODE_STOP_TOP Purpose Indicates that cursor movement stops at the top bottom cursor fields i e no wrap around to the other end Full declaration define GuiConst CURSOR MODE STOP TOP GuiConst_CURSOR_MODE_WRAP_AROUND Purpose Indicates that cursor movement wraps around at the top bottom cursor fields going from top cursor field to bottom cursor field and vice versa Full declaration define GuiConst CURSOR MODE WRAP AROUND GuiConst_CURSOR_SUPPORT_ON Purpose Cursor module enabled Full declaration define GuiConst CURSOR SUPPORT ON GuiConst_DECIMAL_COMMA Purpose The decimal character for floating point variables is a comma 12 34 Full declaration define GuiConst DECIMAL COMMA GuiConst_DECIMAL_PERIOD Purpose The decimal character for floating point variables is a period 12 34 Full declaration define GuiConst DECIMAL PERIOD GuiConst_DISPLAY_ACTIVE_AREA Purpose Indicates that a general active area has been defined globally for the display assSiiaul Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA CLIPPING Purpose Indicates that clipping is enabled for the general active area Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA CLIPPING GuiConst DISPLAY ACTIVE AREA
222. hould by at right or vice versa Change the bit orientation layout in Project parameters generate C code compile and try again The display uses vertical display bytes but they are reversed i e bit zero is at top and should by at bottom or vice versa Change the bit orientation layout in Project parameters generate C code compile and try again The display uses vertical display bytes but horizontal bytes have been selected or vice versa Change the byte orientation layout in Project parameters generate C code compile and try again The display uses vertical display bytes but horizontal bytes have been selected or vice versa Furthermore bit zero is at top and should by at bottom or vice versa Change the byte orientation layout in Project parameters generate C code compile and try again assSiioaul Same as previous pattern Same as previous pattern mmm 4 Showing an easyGUI structure The first easyGUI structure to show should be simple preferably just a single text Normally this last test step doesn t pose problems The difficult part is to get the display communication and addressing correct and the previous items should have taken care of this by now If problems arise they are almost always connected with variable type declarations and pointer sizes as set up in Project parameters Most important is to make sure that the memory model selected for the processor corresponds to the pointer size s
223. howing variables The version number in the lower left corner eaae eu Graphical User Interface Tool for Embedded Systems making graphical user interfaces has never been easier Version 1 23 could of course just be written in plain text but then it would have to be edited each time the source code receives a new version number Better to just show the version number from the source code In the example the version number is a simple 16 bit constant set to 123 This number should be shown as 1 23 i e major and minor version number Many other schemes can of course be employed but this example shows a couple of things concerning formatting and display of variables Item 7 is a formatter The only properties for this type of item are assSii auti m reete o uniche ical Top Var test abed Variable formatting Ing g Field width 0 Width 0 means dynamic width Decimals 2 Dec and exp formats only on Alignment Left adjust Format Decimal v The properties are set to Field width Decimals Alignment Format Always show sign Zero padding Trailing decimal zeros Thousands separator Always show sign Dec and exp formats only Zero padding Right adjusted alignment only Trailing decimal zeros Dec and exp formats only Thousands separator Dec and hex formats only Zero to indicate variable field width i e the field width is just sufficient to co
224. iable type Select column zero Signed unsigned o i Signed Signed When sign is prefix to variable type Unsigned Unsigned Select column zero i Variable value o ei When not in use select column zero M Variables existing already when importing C Overwrite Skip X Cancel Import type First of all there is a selection between C style import or Delimited import e C syntax C style import follows standard C syntax and tries to extract all variable definitions from the C code Complex structures and arrays are skipped as are constants Variable types can both be standard C types as defined in the Parameters window Compiler tab page Type definitions box example bool char Signed char unsigned char Signed short unsigned short signed long unsigned long float Ig IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 88 Solutions assSii auti double or they can be standard easyGUI variable types like GuiConst CHAR GuiConst_INT8S GuiConst_INT8U GuiConst_INT16S GuiConst_INT16U GuiConst_INT32S GuiConst_INT32U GuiConst_TEXT GuiConst_CHAR Any mix of definition types is allowed Delimited This format is for formalized and is also known as e g comma delimited text The many parameters in the setup window allows for very flexible configuration of the import format The following parameters can be edited Delimiter The character separating pa
225. ine structure designated in the Basic parameters section above is rendered the marker structure block is ignored Only marker structure Only the marker structure block is rendered the scroll line structure designated in the Basic parameters section above is ignored e Scroll bar The scroll bar shows where in the scroll list the visible part belongs A number of parameters define this Scroll bar marker type Selects the type of marker moving up and down in the scroll bar None Turns the scroll bar off Icon Shows a font character Bitmap Shows a bitmap Block fixed size Shows a framed filled quadratic rectangle Block dynamic size Shows a framed filled rectangle of varying height The last two options use a filled rectangle with a one pixel border The last option varies the block height so that the relationship between visible scroll lines and total scroll lines can be seen like in Windows The minimum height of the dynamic block is four pixels Scroll bar position X Y Defines the scroll bar position either relative to the primary coordinates of the Scroll box item or as absolute coordinates Scroll bar area Defines the scroll bar area i e the area covered by both passive and active parts of the scroll bar within which the scroll bar marker moves Scroll bar movement area offsets Defines the scroll bar active area as a subset of the total scroll bar area The scroll bar marker moves within
226. ing it On the target system missing bitmaps are simply ignored i e the black rectangle with black cross is not displayed Parts of the bitmap can be made transparent by checking the TRANSPARENT BACKGROUND setting A color must then be assigned as the Transparency reference color i e the color which will be treated as transparent when rendering the bitmap Only one color value can be assigned as the Transparency reference color It is assigned by either entering it directly through the RGB coton button or by pointing it out in the bitmap through the FROM BITMAP button Line panel Item types Line Lines can be drawn as full lines or stippled When stippling is enabled a pattern of 8 pixels can be set This pattern is then repeated as needed in order to draw the line The pattern can be entered by clicking the eight boxes representing pixels or as a single number 0 255 Rectangle panel Item types Clear area Framed rectangle Filled rectangle Framed rounded rectangle Filled rounded rectangle Displays rectangle size based on the current coordinate settings Framed rectangle items also show an edit box allowing selection of border thickness in pixels For Clear area items a checkbox allows selecting the complete display Active area panel Item types Active area assSii aut Contains a check box that determines if the coordinate system origin shall be moved to the active area upper left corner or left as is Th
227. ing support Clipping rectangles cannot be used in the target code More important drawing of objects text lines etc outside the display area is no longer caught by the easyGUl library and can potentially cause memory area violations Saves approximately 3kB of code Be careful if turning clipping support off Any graphical component exceeding the display limits will cause memory corruption Clipping support should only be turned off if limited memory is a serious problem e Bitmap support Bitmaps cannot be used in the target code Not to be confused with icons in fonts which can still be used Saves approximately 2 2kB of code e Floating point support Variables of types float and double cannot be used in the target code The amount of code saved on the target system overall differs depending on the floating point library in the compiler in use and more important whether it is used by other parts of the target code The amount of code saved in the easyGUI library is negligible Only deselect modules if forced to do so by memory constraints This saves troubleshooting if a function using one of the de selected modules is inadvertently used When creating C files easyGUI will raise warning messages if the structures require functions that have been deselected e g a scroll box definition is met with the scroll box module turned off Structure editing panel e Colored backgrounds on item parameter panel When enabled all item
228. ion menu item It is assumed that cursor field zero is selected i e shown inverted like in the above illustration The inverted colors stretch beyond the text itself this was also the case for the Language item in the previous structure The purpose here is to make all three menu items look the same when inverted best shown by enabling all three of them in easyGUI MAIN MENU Preparation Manual preparation Configuration This effect is achieved by defining a background box for all three menu items when the same width 90 pixels in this example Another small feature which enhanced the look is much more difficult to spot An extra line of dark pixels has been added to each menu item assSii aul MAIN MENU MAIN MENU Preparation Preparation Manual preparation not Manual preparation Configuration Configuration This has the effect that the middle p in Preparation doesn t touch the bottom of the dark box It looks just a little better One extra pixel line can be added to any of the four borders by using the Border pixels control at the right side of the Background color panel jinvert mg J Result Invert RGB 255 255 255 4 Background color Piel OFF v Border pixels Result Pixel OFF RGB 255 255 255 Bar backcolor Used only for cursors and scrolling Invert is Result Invert RGB 0 0 0 Miscellaneous V Cursor field Na 3 2 HEREIN In this example the bottom b
229. ions edSSiliQUI 3 Code size After generating the C source files it is possible to view the data memory requirements of the easyGUI project by pressing the CODE SIZE button The Code size info window provides a breakdown of where the data memory is used for Fonts Translations Structures and Variables The information can be copied from this window as a table that can be pasted into a document or spreadsheet so easy comparison can be made when making changes to the easyGUI project Last calculated 15 01 2012 23 13 10 GuiFont c Characters 000005065 Fonts m Ox00001FD4 Languages 000000018 705 0x000002C1 123588 OxO001E2C4 0x00000000 10401 000002841 000000040 Note that this window does not include the size of the GuiLib internal memory usage and program memory IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 149 Solutions 4 eaSSiiIQGUI 13 IMPORT EXPORT WINDOW The import export function allows the copying of data between easyGUI projects The window is divided into three parts easyGUI project Current project Tutorial G easyGUNTutorial Tutorial gui External project P2 pen project Destination 1 aB Languages H y Positions Kz Variables Er Structures i bE C code setup m Duplicates If destination has object of same name source object will C Overwrite it
230. ions can with advantage be moved to external memory e Font data e Structure data Structure Text Strings e Bitmap data These three types of data take up a major part of the amount of easyGUI generated data Any type of remote placement of data is possible as long as the data can be accessed randomly based onamemory offset and a memory block size Observe that using external data can result in a significant speed penalty as data now have to be fetched using the connection method to external memory instead of simply being read from the ordinary memory bus There are individual checkboxes for font structure and bitmap data If at least one of the checkboxes is set the binary data file GuiRemote bin is generated It is placed in the same folder as the normally generated c and h files If Structure data is selected to be in external memory an additional checkbox is enabled WITH SEPARATE TEXT FILE which if checked will create an additional binary file GuiText bin containing just the text strings used in the structures The strings used in structures can then be edited outside of easyGUl Note that any string edits in the file cannot be imported back to easyGUI If WITH SEPARATE TEXT FILE is left unchecked the strings are placed in the GuiRemote bin file The data in the binary files must be moved to external memory by some means How this happens is irrelevant to easyGUI Whenever external memory is enabled the following additions ca
231. isse nnne 214 GUIGOMSE CHAR ort tte ROW E Wea SE 214 GuiConst CHARMODE ANSI essent nne nn nennen etnies inneren tnter 214 GuiConst CHARMODE UNICODE eseeeeeeeenenennenenn nnne nnne nnne nnne nnns en enne nn nnn 214 GuiConst CLIPPING SUPPORT ON sesseeeeeeneneen enne nn snnt nn ennt stein inna 214 GuiConst CODEVISION COMPILER sees enne nnne nnns nn nennen ennt nnn n 214 GuiConst COLOR BYTE SIZE sese nn ennt nn enne en etnies nn enn 214 GuiConst COLOR DEPTH nne RARI oa S 214 Gui onst COLOR DEPTHE2 irt ERU RR E USER Wes 215 GuiConst COLOR DEPTH Asirienii as n aia En ENA ERRENTA AS 215 GuiConst COLElOR DEPTHES cinere eee titii ei UE a 215 GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 8 ccccescsscssssssssseseceseesessececssessesseseessssssesseseeessesseseeesassaesarseesenses 215 GuiCOnst_COLOR_DEPTH_12 csccsscssssssssscsssssssssssncessessesssossessessessesssessesssonsestssesseessesesstess 215 GUICONSt COLOR DEPTE 15 unii iter dno aeri dera rra eee iv iilos eiue e vdd 215 GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 16 nennen enne nnne nn enne idikas eniran Es DiRi 215 GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 18 nennen nennen enne nne nn ttes nist nn tensa sinis inna 215 GuiConst COLOR DEPTH 24 nennen nennen nnne nni tn enisi ene tn stint n iens nn nnn 216 GuiConst COLOR MAX cccccccsssscssssssssscssesseesecsecssessesseceesssessessesesesssseseseesssesseseeseaseassareeseases 216 GuiConst COLOR MODE GRAY 5 evertere ED E
232. it signed 8 bit unsigned 8 bit unsigned sting Controls the state of the radio icons 50 Scroll line item 0 1234 0 1 0 Suspension 3 OBS For string variables the numerical value denotes A Variable not in use sira long excluding terminating zero O New P Edit a Copy B Delete Used by eu Load values xS Save values ox Import variable definitions xy Import setup The variables can be used on the target system just as variables defined normally but furthermore they can be used to control structures in structures i e structures can be shown depending on the setting of a controlling variable Each variable has the following properties e Name Must conform to standard C syntax When used on the target system all variables will have the text easyGUI_ added before the variable name in order to make clear that this variable originates from the easyGUI system e Type One of the following types bool A special case of 8 bit unsigned which can only be assigned the values false 0 and true 1 8 bit unsigned 8 bit signed 16 bit unsigned 16 bit signed IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 85 Solutions EasvilliGUIi 32 bit unsigned 32 bit signed float double string color A special unsigned variable which can be used for setting the color fields of easyGUI structure items Color variables are always 24 bit RGB888 with Red in t
233. item one When encountering a structure call child structure the items of the child structure are drawn completely before continuing with the rest of the parent structure items The available items in easyGUI can be extended with the BK 1 M t d S JCOMIP add on module This pack adds to easyGUI the following items e Check box A check box is a control that has two states to represent a binary selection e Radio button A radio button is a control that allows the selection of one out a number of options e Button A button is a rounded rectangle with 3 states normal pressed and disabled e Scroll box A scroll box is a complex control intended for the target system scroll routines Panel A panel is a background rectangle that allows easy segregation of the screen e Graph A graph is a complex component to graphically display data e Graphics layer A graphics layer used in connection with the Graphics filter item type Allows modifications at pixel level to an area of the screen e Graphics filter A graphics filter used in connection with the Graphics layer item type Allows modifications at pixel level to an area of the screen The ll v t C aSYCOMIP items are described in more detail further below and in the Tutorial chapter 4 eaSSIlIQGUI WINDOW LAYOUT easyGUI structures are handled in this window Index No tems Prev name 4 Nest name
234. items only Determines if the text should be translated all languages defined in the project or only be kept in one version the primary language normally English because the text is part of a service page not needing translation for example e Character set button Text items only Shows a window containing all available characters in the selected font Select characters by double clicking them The character set window can also be used to see the character code for a specific character already in the text Place the cursor just before the character in question and invoke the CHARACTER SET button The same character will be selected in the window and its character code can then be inspected assSii aul Font Can be set to any font which has at least one character included in the project through the font selection function or can be set to No change meaning that the currently selected font is used It is easier to later change a font if only the first of a number of contiguous items selects a specific font while the rest has the No change setting Style Select the writing style as No change Keeps the writing style currently in use Fixed spacing All characters occupy the same horizontal space Courier style Proportional Normal proportional spacing is used PS numerical Special numerical proportional spacing is used see Fonts chapter Underlining Is selected in a checkbox The size and placement of underlining is deter
235. itten using same proportional writing style as previously used Gl Full declaration define GuiLib PS NOCHANGE GuiLib_PS_NUM Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be written using numerical proportional writing style Full declaration define GuiLib PS NUM 3 GuiLib_PS_OFF Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be written using fixed spacing writing style Courier Style Full declaration define GuiLib PS OFF 1 GuiLib PS ON Purpose Used in text formatting function calls Text will be written using normal proportional writing style Full declaration define GuiLib PS ON 2 assSii aul GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW Purpose Full declaration Used in GuiLib ShowScreen function call Auto redraw items from previously shown structures shall be erased define GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW 1 GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL ABOVE HOME Purpose Full declaration Used in GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Pixel and GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos function calls Current vertical scroll position is above home position some blank space shown above first text line define GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL ABOVE HOME 4 GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT END Purpose Full declaration Used in GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Pixel and GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos function calls Current vertical scroll position is at end of text last text line just shown
236. ive area upper left comer I Clipping Activating the feature with the following parameters produces Settings Display will look like Basics Display controller Color Simulated display Compiler Operation Project Project name Tutorial File name CAeasyGUI Tutorial Tutorial gui Display IN i P 9 Display width 240 raphics Proportional spacing G Underline E FF n x R ispl ight i oo exts 4 ew E xe z3 v2 aa SE E es relative to active area upper left comer Bitmaps On the target system the display will look like Graphics 3 I 0 I r r LLL Underline Texts y gp L vp Icons Variables a 56 i e the inactive area of the display is clipped IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 52 Solutions E EasyliGUI m It is also possible to move the coordinate system so that it starts at the active area upper left corner instead of the normal display upper left corner DISPLAY CONTROLLER ial file CAeasyGUMTutorial Tutorial gu E Basics Display controller Color Simulated display Compiler Operation Dis 2 5 C Vertical bytes ecc BitOatleft C Bit at right IATSIATATETET FATS x B EE Number of color planes 1 Display oriented normally Display rotated 90 right Display oriented upside down CALY C Display rotated 90 left GUI Mirror horizontally Mirror vertically EARS
237. l NT16S BackBoxSizeY2 NT8U BackBorderPixels NTCOLOR ForeColor NTCOLOR BackColor Coordinates Reference point is the starting pixel of the font baseline scan line Font index Character set selection 1 selects the default character set O selects the standard ANSI character set gt 0 selects special national character sets Only used in ANSI character mode String A zero terminated text string Alignment Can be GuiLib ALIGN LEFT starts text writing from the X coordinate GuiLib ALIGN CENTER centers text writing around the X coordinate GuiLib ALIGN RIGHT positions the text so that it ends on the X coordinate Proportional writing Can be GuiLib PS Orr turns off proportional writing EasvilliGUIi Output Related functions GuiLib DrawVar Purpose Full declaration e GuiLib PS ON turns on proportional writing e GuiLib PS NUM uses numerical proportional writing Transparent Can be e GuiLib TRANSPARENT OFF turns transparent writing off i e the background is painted e GuiLib TRANSPARENT ON turns transparent writing on i e only the text is painted Underlining Can be e GuiLib UNDERLINE OFF e GuiLib UNDERLINE ON Background box size X Determines the width of a background box Zero means no background box Background box size Y1 Determines the height of a background box measured from the font baseline and up
238. l PS marks for each imported character and adjust if needed 9 Trim font size so that all characters are included without clipping 10 Check all basic font dimensions like reference lines underline etc Binary font import The IMPORT FONT button opens a new window where font file and a few other settings can be selected Font file none selected E Load font file Convert from JIS x 0201 0208 character codes 4 A E 3 PA Import font Big Endian byte order in 16 bit values elis The LOAD FONT FILE selects which binary file to import The font contents are shown in the middle area if the font is accepted The binary font must adhere to a specific format Iq IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 46 Solutions EasyiliGUl Header 128 bytes Character 1 data N bytes Character 2 data N bytes Character 3 data N bytes Last character N bytes Header data are organized as Width in pixels 2 bytes Height in pixels 2 bytes Unused 124 bytes Character data are organized as Character code 2 bytes Label not used 8 bytes Bitmap data X bytes Dummy Y X 10 bytes where X Width 7 8 Height Y 128 10 X 128 1 For each character the bitmap data are stored with leftmost pixel in each row in LSB of first byte There are a few settings determining how to read the font e Convert from JIS 0201 0208 character
239. l below The window is divided into three parts E 9 Solutions Copyright O 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS r OYIEUEEEPNENUESEELLLELLLLLLCESECILLA al JIS X 0208 AL Begin 1 Top 3 Zoom shift JIS A End 5 Bottom 9 dx C 2 C 3x Jaya Width 5 Height 7 Color mode Monochrome Type Tex Setup Selection Editing Import Selection mode All characters in font M Characters in use in structures v Numerical characters n 3 Manually selected characters JIS X 0208 characters H h ct E A Single character Joyo g Arabic characters 1 Commands Character view filter All characters no state indicators All characters with state indicators d C Cnet set chao aed CHM Va fk pu e All characters in use in structures Manually selected characters mem P DINSA bnmuw iz 287 characters in the font 93 characters in use in structures Ma No characters manually selected Il 5l D E PC T Y C h Ti r Ll cJ 101 characters currently selected D ek erka ali nebh 5 38 EBbLBM E eljoltu f w c Each panel handles a part of the editing process 1 Commands All commands for creating handling and selecting characters are placed here Because of the number of commands the panel is subdivided into four tab pages Setup Selection Editing and TTF import 2 Character set Show all characters in the current font Also show
240. le without border A circle can be of any radius An ellipse can be of any shape and size of axes A Framed rectangle item with rounded corners A Filled rectangle item with rounded corners A quarter of a circle item A quarter of an Ellipse item A bitmap file located outside the project file The bitmap is shown in full color in easyGUI but is reduced to the colors possible by the currently selected color mode and color depth on the target system A bitmap file located outside the project file The bitmap can be used as a background canvas with any number of dynamic overlapping items which will correctly redraw the background bitmap when updated Defines an area of the display for the touch interface The touch areas are individually numbered There is no visual drawing associated with touch areas Reports back current drawing position at run time through a call back function Useful for situations where a position on the screen changes dynamically depending on the assSii aul situation and it is neede for further graphical operations There is no visual drawing associated with position callbacks The items Structure call Indexed structure call and Conditional structure call are the ones that give easyGUI its dynamic properties by enabling structures to be called from structures either unconditionally or controlled by a variable When a structure is drawn items are drawn sequentially starting with
241. liased Monochrome Anti aliased Monochrome Anti aliased Monochrome Monochrome Unicode 7 14 bold Monochrome Unicode 9 15 Monochrome Unicode 11 16 Monochrome Monochrome Icon 32x32 Monochrome Icon 48x48 Monochrome Icon 72x72 Monochrome Icon 225x50 Monochrome Oo New R Delete a Copy e Character code info A list of available fonts in the system is shown New fonts can be created existing fonts erased fonts copied and a font selected for editing Double clicking on a font starts editing just like pressing the EDIT button When creating a new font it should be decided if it should be a monochrome or an anti aliased font This distinction can however later be changed but already defined characters would need extensive editing The In use column indicates if the font is used in the project Enabling just a single character for a font will show it as in use Character enabling disabling is done in the Font editing function Two informational commands are available e STRUCTURES USING FONT A window appears showing all structures using the highlighted font if any Double clicking on a structure launches the Structure editor with the first item in the structure which uses the font highlighted e CHARACTER CODE INFO Shows a window displaying a table with all possible Unicode characters Unicode 32 65535 along the horizontal axis and all existing fonts in the easyGUI project Ig IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS
242. line in pixels The two last parameters background box heights can be set to zero in which case the height above and or below the text baseline will be equal to normal background drawing Background boxes are normally but not necessarily used in conjunction with centered texts as in the above example Blinking text field If checked the item can be blinked on the target system An index number should be set to be able to uniquely identify this blink item in the target source code assSii aul Paragraph panel Item types Paragraph Variable paragraph Selects special Paragraph settings regarding alignment and line height Horizontal alignment There are three options Left All text lines start at the left edge of the paragraph box Center All text lines are centered between the left and right edges of the paragraph box Right All text lines end at the right edge of the paragraph box Vertical alignment There are three options Top The first text line is placed at the top of the paragraph box Center The text lines are centered between the top and bottom edges of the paragraph box Bottom The last text line is placed at the bottom of the paragraph box Line height Determines the distance between lines in the Paragraph box and hence the number of lines visible in the box Note the Alignment panel described earlier is also visible for Paragraph items but the alignment selected there only affects the positi
243. lipse panel nte nnnne nennen nnnm ene tnnt nenne 103 Structure call pan elenini iiaii eere re OP Pee d dee ea pere 103 Default structure Call panel sees siesieesseesese ene tn ennt tn atenta tetra teinte tn ioiai 104 Conditional structure call panel esses eene nennen nnne enne nnne ennt tn innen nnn 104 Variable panel esses eene tete nntnt nennen tntne nnnm tenete tette tenete sete tnter tne rennen tnn 104 Variable formatting panel essere enne ennt ennt tnt nn tnnt tn innt ne ennt en etnies 104 Bitmap panel M nares 105 Line panels ette a RERBA ur I HE 106 mciacinuenlee 106 Danu ua 5egj MN 106 Clipping patielizzs ccce HERE THER S E AREE OEORETE EIE EHE 107 TOUCH AFCA panel uio eh mre ie ide tri pe ei ENE AEN iamen 107 Text Of lm M 107 Paragraph panels auiem Rr ene rr ir PR Rien a e dr n 109 Foreground color pan lirria annida rene nere prb ee re ee Te iig 109 Background color panel eese nennen tenete tnnne nnne nene tne nnnm nennen nennen 110 Miscellaneous panel esee enne entente tne tn tnnt entia tinte teta tine aN N tinent intrent teen 111 easyCOMP iter panels toco rete E A EE AE O ERA OX NURSES AR SHEETS 114 Check box eril
244. little endian mode LSB at first memory address others in big endian mode MSB at first memory address Observe that also the display controller endian mode can be set independently on the Display controller tab page Special compiler settings Normal ANSI compiler C AVR compiler flash RAM operation Microchip Pic C compiler operation Keil compiler reentrant keyword magecraft compiler DodeVision compiler C AR GCC compiler Settings on this page concerns the C compiler used on the target system Unfortunately the various C compilers in use in the embedded world don t comply 10096 to the same standard Even if a particular compiler states that it adheres to the ANSI X3 159 1989 Standard C convention it is not guaranteed to work without the need for some tweaks to these settings It is therefore necessary for easyGUI to know the syntax for various subjects of the compiler Furthermore some buffer sizes are determined here Type definitions panel e 8bit char type Default is char e 8bit signed type Default is signed char e 8 bit unsigned type Default is unsigned char e 16 bit signed type Default is signed short Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 7 22 Max text string length o Max numerical variables string length p Max number of paragraph lines fo Maximum number of concurrent dynamic items fio Max No of concurrent background bitmaps fio assSii aul 16 bit unsigned type
245. m uses relative coordinates This is usual practice for structures containing parts of a display layout so these structures will never be shown on their own on the target system If they are shown directly on the target system the origin is set to 0 0 In easyGUI it is practical to set origin to e g 20 20 to bring relative texts into view in the display panel If origin is kept at 0 0 a relative text will only be partially visible at the top left corner of the display very inconvenient If the first item in a structure assSii aul uses absolute coordinates the origin setting has no effect The origin setting is individual for each structure Below the original box is a single button CALLED BY Shows a list of all structures calling the current structure either directly or indexed The list may be empty but if not one of the calling structures can be selected by clicking it A warning button A may be shown below the origin box if easyGUI detects a possible error condition Pressing it shows the relevant warning The following warnings are possible e Largest text is X characters in length max text length selected in Project parameters is Y characters The maximum length should be increased or alternatively the item text made shorter or divided into two separate texts e Largest numerical variable is X characters in length max string length selected in Project parameters is Y characters The max length should be increased or alter
246. ma character Full declaration define GuiLib DECIMAL PERIOD 0 GuiLib FORMAT ALIGNMENT CENTER Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls Variable text is centered within allocated text string Full declaration define GuiLib FORMAT ALIGNMENT CENTER 1 GuiLib FORMAT ALIGNMENT LEFT Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls Variable text is left adjusted within allocated text string Full declaration define GuiLib FORMAT ALIGNMENT LEFT 0 assSii aul GuiLib FORMAT ALIGNMENT RIGHT Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls Variable text is right adjusted within allocated text string Full declaration fdefine GuiLib FORMAT ALIGNM ENT RIGHT 2 GuiLib FORMAT DEC Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls Decimal format is used Full declaration define GuiLib FORMAT DEC 0 GuiLib FORMAT EXP Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls Exponential format is used Full declaration define GuiLib FORMAT EXP 1 GuiLib FORMAT HEX Purpose Used in variable formatting function calls Hexadecimal format is used Full declaration define GuiLib FORMAT HEX 2 GuiLib FORMAT TIME MMSS Purpose Full declaration Used in variable formatting function calls MM SS minutes and seconds time format is used define GuiLib FORMAT TIME MMSS 3 GuiLib FORMAT TIME HHMM 12 AMPM Purpose Full declaration Us
247. marids sssini iesto ee akt d dee Re RR EXER Re ER ERIT H YR UR Sie Saanaa EXE ee Re aee 42 Font TIM POP ge e 44 T sake hed e a 910 Gie eerer re 44 Binary font IMPON e PE ERRORES LIII LT 46 BDF TOMEI P OME cerisa P M 48 COMMON import PAFaMOleL Se asses sccacessecserenseccaveusecuecessovesueatecevtestescdsessseuvieaUecudsereveaviesteudieaestseverireds 48 Character rid 49 7 PROJECT PARAMETERS WINDOW e eeeeee eee ee eene nnne enne nnne nennen enn nnnn 50 BASICS m 51 Project DAME eR RR NERA ERE EEERU R E e E an 51 DISPlAY Mera 51 DISPIAY controller m 53 Ee Le Ht PP 55 ello cerne 55 Color Grayscale mode panel eese esee enne enenatis nennen 56 Color depth panel eiiieaen RR EUER ar eer cer cere peer err rer eee rare erence ARR RAE 56 Palette PL GLIA Sea irr tti ox P e REA UR te 64 eer 68 RGBA eegt ut ERES ERE MEM 69 SimUlated display 71 Compiler eeeee esee esee eese ense eene tense AE EEEa tns set tns setis sss tns set E EE E setis asses se tens seen se snnn 72 Type definitions panel uoce cec terrent eee ET
248. mined by font parameters Background box not Paragraph items A background box is a special kind of background drawing A box is drawn in the background color with the width and height as specified Background boxes are useful for e g menus arranged vertically so that each menu item has the same background width when selected Example Two menu items arranged vertically Preparation and Configuration aration Preparation selected Configuration Preparation Configuration selected Configuration Both texts are centered and have background box widths of 75 pixels Another use is when dynamically changing texts are shown e g by using an indexed structure call item or for variables To make sure the old text gets erased when displaying a new text in the same position the item can be supplied with a background box of sufficient size to cover the largest possible text The individual texts in the called structures then only needs a foreground color the background color should be set to Transparent This also avoids any unnecessary background drawing i e drawing first a background box and then a normal background in the same position which would waste processor time Parameters for the background box comprise of a checkbox Background box on off and three edit boxes specifying the background box width in pixels background box height above text baseline in pixels and finally background box height below text base
249. mode is necessary for target systems requiring more than one character set On the downside a Unicode mode target system requires a little more memory than an ANSI mode system The UNICODE version also supports projects running in ANSI character mode Each font in the system can support both character modes but Unicode characters are only visible if the project runs in Unicode mode Character codes in the 0 255 range are common to the two character modes ANSI mode Unicode character codes above 65535 24 bit 32 bit character codes are not supported by easyGUI The character mode is selected in the Parameters window on the Operation tab page see later Character codes 0 31 should never be used for font characters While these character codes are not prohibited they are also used for other purposes like e g line control in multi line texts Using them for characters can thus cause unpredictable behaviors assSiiaul TEXT FONTS All original text fonts are made after these guiding lines e Proportional writing Fixed spacing fonts can also be made but all original text fonts are proportional e True hanging characters The letter g is defined with the lower part going below the base line Eg not E8 This is however not a requirement any font style can be created e ANSI Unicode character codes as used in Windows This makes it easy to both enter Unicode text into the system and to exchange data between targ
250. most 10096 the same no matter which development tools are used If another toolset must be used some work must be anticipated on the visual components e easySIM For the Borland Embarcadero C Builder version the important files are EasviliGUi Main cpp and Main h The main Windows application source As delivered Main cpp does nothing more than contain a simple visualization of the target system display and show a simple call to the GuiLib library GuiLib c and GuiLib h library These files are identical to the target system library files GuiDisplay cpp and GuiDisplay h display control unit These files are radically different from the normal GuiDisplay c and GuiDisplay h display control files of the easyGUI library This is the Windows display driver which is the core of easySIM It uses the data from the GuiLib library in exactly the same way as the normal target system i e GuiLib doesn t know that it is working in a Windows environment Guiltems c GuiComponents c GuiLibStruct h GuiGraph c GuiGraphlH c and GuiGraph1v c include libraries These files are identical to the target system library files lil COLOR and UNICODE versions GuiGraph2H c GuiGraph2V c GuiGraph2H2P c GuiGraph2V2P c GuiGraph4H c GuiGraph4V c GuiGraph5 c GuiGraph8 c GuiGraph16 c and GuiGraph24 c include libraries These files are identical to the target system library files If they are not present in the delivered easySIM package they can be copi
251. mpletely inside a text box without scrolling Remarks Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll FitsInside GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Input Text box index Output 0 No 1 Yes GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Purpose Returns status of topmost visible text line of text box Remarks Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Input Text box index Output GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL ILLEGAL NDX Illegal text box index GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL INSIDE BLOCK Text box scrolled mid way GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT HOME Text box scrolled to the top GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL AT END Text box scrolled to the bottom GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL ABOVE HOME Text box scrolled above the top GuiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL BELOW END Text box scrolled below the bottom EasviliGUIi GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Pixel Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Returns status of topmost visible pixel position of text box Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll Get Pos Pixel GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Text box index uiLib TEXTBOX SCROLL ABOVE HOME
252. mported Checking both Only update existing easyGUI characters and Do not overwrite existing characters options will prohibit any import EasvilliGUIi CHARACTER TESTING Either the character set or a test function can be shown by selecting the Character set or the Character test tabs The Character test tab page shows a number of fields and controls ww C R m Character set Character testing Zoom G 11 Underline Q inet PS on C PS num C Bi Left ANSI 65 0x0041 Right ANSI 6 9 ABCdef 23 Unicode 65 0x0041 Unicode 6 Character 0 ANSI 65 0x0041 T Select char Unicode 65 0x0041 Text writing direction 8 Left to Right Right to Left P p PS off A S E una PS on W BH mni W 47 a PS num P8Cdef 123 K mu We51 In the edit box a simple text can be entered ABCdef123 in the example above and the result inspected in the three representations below one for fixed spacing writing and two for each type of proportional writing and in the character pair window at right The character pair window also shows the PS marks of both characters of a character pair The cursor position selects the starting character of the pair The PS ON and PS NUM radio buttons selects one of the proportional writing styles for the character pair view Underlining reversed writing and right to left writing can also be tested in detail EasyiliGUl 7 PROJECT PARAMETERS W
253. mpty If the target system does not make re entrant calls to the GuiLib Refresh function this function can be left empty void GuiDisplay Lock void None None GuiDisplay Unlock GuiDisplay Refresh Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Refreshes display controller RAM based on the internal easyGUI display buffer and refresh flags Should never be called directly because GuiLib Refresh calls it as part of the easyGUI refresh process void GuiDisplay Refresh void None None GuiDisplay Init GuiDisplay Unlock Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Allows normal operating system task shifting again The contents of this function must be filled out by the programmer because it is OS dependent it is thus initially empty If the target system does not make re entrant calls to the GuiLib Refresh function this function can be left empty void GuiDisplay Unlock void None None GuiDisplay Lock assSiiaul 17 easyTRANS easyTRANS is a utility to aid in translating easyGUI structure texts The utility is not strictly needed because the complete translation job can be done inside easyGUI in the Language window However if external translation is desired easyTRANS comes handy because it e Hides the complexity of the easyGUI development environment from the Translator which possibly is a non technical person e Prevents the Translator fr
254. n Do NOT turn off No translation 07 No translation ee Manuelle Pr paration Kor guraton Pr paration von Einzelproben Probenhalterpr paration 117 Configuration Konfiguration s The list in the left part of the window contains two columns of texts a reference column and an editable column The reference column is then set to the reference language which doesn t have to be the primary language and the editable column is set to one of the other languages in the project German in this example For the text selected in the right text column Manuelle Pr paration in this case all structures containing this text are shown in the right half of the window a single structure in this example Each structure is shown in two versions with the left one using the reference language English here and the right using the edited language German here At the top is a box CURRENT LANGUAGE for selecting the current language when editing structures This setting has no immediate effect in the language window but controls which language is used when showing structures in other windows in easyGUI Next to this setting is the SETUP button which shows a window with language definitions Iq 6jiBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 78 4 eaSSiliIQGUI e LANGUAGE SETUP No Language name Test drection Decimal point character D English Left to Right From project setup
255. n be found in the generated data assSii aul The following compiler directives are defined in GuiConst h to indicate which remote data sections are used The first compiler directive indicates that remote data of some type is in use GuiConst REMOTE DATA GuiConst REMOTE FONT DATA GuiConst REMOTE STRUCT DATA GuiConst REMOTE TEXT DATA GuiConst REMOTE BITMAP DATA The following constants are set in GuiConst h to indicate the memory required for each of the intermediate buffers assigned to hold remotely retrieved data from the binary data block The first constant denotes the maximum buffer size The other constants denote the necessary buffer size just big enough to retrieve the largest possible data block for font structure text and bitmap data respectively GuiConst REMOTE DATA BUF SIZI GuiConst REMOTE FONT BUF SIZI GuiConst REMOTE STRUCT BUF SIZ GuiConst REMOTE TEXT BUF SIZE GuiConst REMOTE BITMAP BUF SIZI p It Gl These intermediate buffers are defined in GuiLib c It is necessary to have individual buffers for font structure text and bitmap data as all types of data are used concurrently The library only reads data into the buffer if the data previously loaded is different These intermediate buffers operate as a cache and allow easyGUI to operate much faster than reading all data as needed from external memory A GuiLib RemoteDataRe
256. n fast enough and ensures that the user experiences an adequately responsive system It is also feasible to call GuiLib Refresh on demand e g after each new structure is displayed and after any change of variables that affects structures This is marginally quicker than the above described approach but is not as elegant and more error prone WHICH FILES TO USE The easyGUI library files are found in the Embedded library sub folder under the easyGUI installation folder typically c Program files easyGUI but it depends on local Windows type or selected destination folder during installation These files should be copied into your target system development folder or a sub folder to this The files are e GuiLib c h Main library unit e GuiLibStruct h Basic easyGUI declarations e Guiltems c Include file with additional library routines e GuiComponents c Include file with additional library routines e GuiDisplay c h Display driver unit e GuiGraph c Include file with general graphical routines e GuiGraphlH c Include file with graphical library for 1 bpp monochrome displays with horizontal display bytes e GuiGraphlV c Include file with graphical library for 1 bpp monochrome displays with vertical display bytes assSiioaul e GuiGraph2H c e GuiGraph2V c e GuiGraph2H2P c e GuiGraph2V2P c e GuiGraph4H c e GuiGraph4V c e GuiGraph5 c e GuiGraph8 c e GuiGraphl6 c e GuiGraph24 c e
257. n setup A single component Parameters a single font etc is marked by clicking it Several components are marked by holding the Ctrl button and clicking the desired components Fonts positions variables and structures can be marked en masse by clicking the root of the component type EXTERNAL PROJECT PANEL The external project can be of two variants e Project Another project just like the current project e Temporary project This is a special temporary holder of data always present Before importing or exporting can happen the external project must be opened by pressing the OPEN PROJECT button This sets up the right panel in the same way as the left panel 4 eaSSiIQGUI 3 3 External project Close project Tutorial Temporary project C easyGUNTutorial Tutorial gui AF Fonts gt F Fonts i Hn Parameters Export object i n Parameters 25 Languages Duplicates A3E Languages If destination has jS y Positions 1 object of same i X7 Variables name source oo Xe7 Variables H E Structures Gps EE Structures ir C Overwrite it H F FE C code setup S petes Ep C code setup xy Positions m Font handling Complete font C Character range First 286 Last Bs o M Structure handling gt v Include called structures IV Include variables amp positions in use Import object RN Delete object W Delete ever
258. natively the variable formatting changed e No of Dynamic items cursor auto redraw in this structure is X max No of Dynamic items selected in Project parameters is Y items The maximum number of dynamic items should be increased or alternatively the number of auto redraw and or cursor items should be reduced e No of Paragraph lines in an item in this structure is X max No of Paragraph lines selected in Project parameters is Y lines The maximum number of Paragraph lines should be increased ITEM LIST PANEL The item list shows all items in the current structure The list may be empty if no structure is currently selected only possible if no structure exists at all or if the current structure contains no items not very useful The items are numbered from 1 to at most 256 always sequentially Items can be added copied and deleted using the buttons to the left of the list New Creates a new item above the current one or optionally below if the last item is current Copy Copies the current item or items to a position below the current one DELETE Deletes the current item or items ITEM TYPE Selects Changes the type of the current item CLIPBOARD CUT Cuts deletes the current item or items from the structure and places it in an internal easyGUI clipboard allowing it to be pasted into another structure eventually in another project file as long as easyGUI is not closed down assSiioaul CLIPBOARD COP
259. nd or manipulating the input layer data before storing data in the output layer Graphics layer parameters e Index No Identifies the Graphics layer on the target system Several Graphics layers can be active simultaneously but they must then have different index numbers If only one Graphics layer is used at any time all defined Graphics layers can be given index 0 simplifying addressing them e Size Defines the rectangle covered by the Graphics layer filter operation There are three alternatives assSii aul Directly defined X1 Y1 X2 Y2 defines the size like for other item types Full screen The complete screen area is covered by the Graphics layer Current clipping rectangle The currently active clipping rectangle is used for the Graphics layer dimensions If no clipping rectangle is active the full screen will be used e Initialization Defines how the Graphics layer canvas memory is initialized There are three alternatives No action The Graphics layer canvas memory is left as it is This of course means that it is in an undefined state the following drawing commands should therefore completely cover the area Background color The Graphics layer canvas is filled with the background color Copy current image A copy of the current display image inside the defined Graphics layer area is copied to the Graphics layer canvas Graphics filter parameters e Index No Identifies the Graphics filter on the targ
260. nd to the internal easyGUI clipboard allowing the characters to be pasted into another font Clipboard PASTE imports the characters currently in the internal easyGUI clipboard The imported characters can have any size but easyGUI only uses the top left part matching the current font size The check box KEEP OLD PIXELS pastes on top of already set pixels The check box No PASTING OVER EXISTING CHARACTERS only pastes character codes not found in the font i e only adds new characters The check box PASTE AT CURRENT AND FOLLOWING CHARACTERS pastes characters beginning at the current character disregarding the character codes stored in the clipboard buffer Move Up Down LEFT and RIGHT rolls the current character pixels in the direction selected with pixels spilling over an edge reemerging at the opposite edge PS marks rolls left and right but stops at edges Str PS MARKS readjusts all PS marks so that they are touching the character The function also takes pixel rows just above and below the PS row into consideration in order to improve the selected PS mark positions The PS marks can then be adjusted manually if desired RESET PS moves all PS marks to the left and right edges of the character box HALF PS moves all left PS marks to the left edge and all right PS marks to the X center position This command is handy for setting PS marks for characters with fixed width FIXED CHARACTER WIDTH controls the PS mode for the character The no
261. ndexed structure Screen Config 1 1 Filled rectangle 2 Text 3 Text 4 Indexed structure call LanguageText X 1 Text 5 Indexed structure call ConfigForceReduction 1 1 Text 2 Indexed structure call TxtOnOff X 1 Text 6 Text 7 Formatter 8 Variable Backgrounds are important There is another interesting thing about the on off text It is supposed to change during editing sounds reasonable and that shouldn t involve rewriting the entire config structure although that would be a solution but a very inefficient and perhaps slow one depending on CPU resources in the target There are two ways to get items redrawn without redrawing everything e Cursor fields e Auto redraw items assSii aul The first approach is used here but that is explained a little later The second option will also be explained in due time Suffice it to say that the item is redrawn The interesting thing here is what happens when we redraw an already present item Coordinates are no problem easyGUI remembers the coordinates already calculated and draws the item again in the same position The problem can be the background If no background is specified transparent writing the texts will pile up on each other so changing Force Reduction from OFF to ON will change the display from CONF IGURATION Language English Force Reduction OFF Display contrast 25 t
262. ne the count is always zero or one Full declaration GuiConst INT16S GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLineCount GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex GuiConst INT16U ScrollLineMarkerIndex Input Scroll box index Scroll marker index 0 active scroll line gt 0 secondary line markers Output Count of scroll marker lines 1 Error in parameters Related functions GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLine GuiLib ScrollBox SetIndicator GuiLib ScrollBox SetLineMarker GuiLib ScrollBox GetTopLine Purpose Returns topmost visible scroll line Remarks Used only for Scroll box items Full declaration GuiConst INT16S GuiLib ScrollBox GetTopLine GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex Input Scroll box index Output Index of topmost visible scroll line 1 Error in parameters Related functions GuiLib ScrollBox SetTopLine GuiLib ScrollBox Home Purpose Makes first scroll line active and scrolls list if needed Remarks Used only for Scroll box items Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox Home GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex EasvilliGUIi Input Output Related functions Scroll box index 0 No change list already at top 1 Active scroll line changed GuiLib ScrollBox Down GuiLib ScrollBox End GuiLib ScrollBox To Line GuiLib ScrollBox Up GuiLib ScrollBox Init Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Initializes a scroll box Used only for Scr
263. ned to show much more complex screen setups with many parts of the display being dynamic depending on the settings of variables Not just for hiding parts of the display but also for e g displaying different types of information in parts of the display The latter concept will be demonstrated in our next example structure An on off text Turn the Force Reduction line on again by setting the ForceReductFlag variable to one CONF IGURATION Language Deutsch Display contrast 25 Force Reduction OFF The parameter text is an on off text controlled by another variable called ForceReduction Jump into the ConfigForceReduction 1 structure Force Reduction and you will se that it consists of two items Item 1 Text Force Reduction Item 2 Indexed structure On Off text It must be admitted that item 2 is virtually non visible this is because it reads the X coordinate from a coordinate register which is not set up properly when looking directly at the structure The second item is yet another indexed structure controlled by the ForceReduction variable which can adopt the values zero Off and one On It calls the structure TxtOnOff X By the way the On Off EasvilliGUIi text is nearly invisible that s because it uses X register 1 as a coordinate source and its value is not set correctly inside this structure This construction is an example of an indexed structure within an i
264. ner Transparent background color 1 means no transparency assSii aul Output Related functions None GuiLib ShowBitmap GuiLib ShowBitmapArea GuiLib ShowBitmapAreaAt GuiLib ShowScreen Purpose Full declaration Input Output GuiLib SinDeg Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiLib SinRad Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Instructs structure drawing task to draw a complete structure void GuiLib ShowScreen GuiConst INT16U Structure GuiConst INT16S CursorFieldToShow GuiConst INT8U ResetAutoRedraw Structure ID Active cursor field No enter GuiLib NO CURSOR if there is no cursor to show Maintain or erase old auto redraw items use GuiLib NO RESET AUTO REDRAW Or GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW None Calculates Sin angle where angle is in radians factored GuiConst_INT32S GuiLib SinDeg GuiConst INT32S Angle Angle in degrees 10 1 10 Sine of angle in 1 4096 units GuiLib DegToRad GuiLib RadToDeg GuiLib CosDeg GuiLib CosRad GuiLib SinRad Calculates Sin angle where angle is in radians factored GuiConst INT328 GuiLib SinRad GuiConst INT32S Angle Angle in radians 4096 1 rad 4096 Sine of angle in 1 4096 units GuiLib DegToRad GuiLib RadToDeg GuiLib CosDeg assSii aul GuiLib CosRad GuiLib SinDeg GuiLib Sqrt Purpose Retur
265. nes the style of the checkbox from one of four options Flat The check box is a simple square The size of the square is determined by the Size selection box below the Check box style selection options 3D The check box will be a square with a slightly thicker top and left border to the right and bottom to present a 3 dimensional appearance The size of the square is determined by the Size selection box below the Check box style selection options Icon The check box is displayed as the selected font character Options to select the font character only appear when the Icon check box style is selected Bitmap The check box is displayed as the selected bitmap image One color in the bitmap can be selected as transparent Options to select the bitmap file only appear when the Bitmap check box style is selected None No check box is drawn only the check mark is shown Check mark style Determines the style of the check mark that will be displayed in the check box item when it is selected It can be set according to one of five options Checked The check mark will be a tick mark v centred in the check box Crossed The check mark will be a cross x centred in the check box Filled The check mark will be a filled square centred in the check box Icon The check mark is displayed as the selected font character Options to select the font character only appear when the Icon check mark style is selected EasvilliGUIi Bitmap The
266. nes to look different like in the examples shown on these pages It is purely for cosmetic reasons in the editor and has no relevance for the target system appearance Example Position 2 Count 1 Position 3 Count 3 SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO Mo Item Price Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item SCROLL BOX ITEM TYPE DEMO Item Price Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item Scroll line item The above settings may be combined as desired but setting too many options on will make the display rather unreadable USE OF TOUCH AREAS easyGUI separates the tasks of handling the touch interface hardware and the actual handling of touch events easyGUI handles events from the touch interface and handles eventual coordinate conversion from touch interface coordinates to display coordinates should these differ In the following it is assumed that activating the touch interface produces an event with a coordinate of the touch position This coordinate need not coincide with the display coordinates but easyGUI needs to know how to convert from touch interface coordinates to display coordinates EasviliGUi The proper sequence for implementing a touch interface is 1 Touch interface hardware is tested and debugged 2 easyGUI touch interface is trained in coordinate conversion if needed 3 Events from the touch inter
267. ngle text Now jump back to the calling structure Screen Config 1 by pressing the PARENT STRUCTURE button at the top of the properties panel We are now back at the calling structure still with item 4 selected easyGUI remembers the selected item individually for each structure in the system a big advantage assSiioaul Let s try to alter the DiConfigLanguage variable to something else Press the small and buttons and watch the variable value change and more importantly watch the language text change Editing the variable value directly can be accomplished by pressing the EDIT button which shows a little editing window If the value is incremented past four or below zero easyGUI ascertains that no structure exists with e g the name LanguageText 5 Right adjust x M Yo 45 Result Right Indexed structure call LanguageT ext A Ganime missing Variable DiConfigLanguage Eat c Type 8 bit unsigned Value 5 Text Font No change v amp Result ANSI 7 At the same time no language text is shown CONFIGURATION Language Force Reduction OFF Display contrast 25 In this situation it is clearly an error but in the next section you will see that this feature can be used to your advantage Main point is that easyGUI handles the situation gracefully no error condition is entered Utilizing a disappearing indexed structure The next line in our example structure is
268. nn enne 246 Guilib BrightenReb Color iere dente en mere dee e eed ire eee doeet a 247 GullibsCIFrcle co n uud M uL EI M MM MID T 247 UN Ne pe a AR M 248 GuiLib ClearDisplay esses seeece essen eene entente tnnt tna tette te traen sn steer testate tnnt 248 GUILD COSDES E E Gak 248 G l Goin e X 248 Gulbib C rs r DOWD ceteri pate etre e d eee reete detecte ot Pieter eot dene Ee e ia pedo tel uite 249 GUILIB CutrsoE End iere nep debitae 249 GUILib Cursor HIde 5 aon eate diee TES 249 Gilib Cursor HONE redeo Pere me ORD 250 GUILID Cursor Select E ERREUR RESRITETSU 250 EasvilliGUIi G ilib Cursor Dio ie 250 GuiLib DarkenPixelColor eese nennen nnne nnne nennen nnn a aaae entren tn nian 251 Guibib DarkenRegbColot 5 rere rere e dere n Re evi ee Qe dr ee UE ne 251 GUILID DESTORAG ERR 252 CUNOMPe REN 252 Gu ibib DrawChiat 35er eria ne metre rdi 252 GuiLib_DraWwStr RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRMRRRRRRMMMMMMEMMEMEEEEEMMMEEEMMMMMMMM 253 GUILD DAW al uon a A ENN 254 GUILD alli 258 Gull lb FillBo35 33d to E eee isnt aes WESTERN 258 GuiLib GetBlinkingCharCode eese nennen tnter tn tnter tinte eterne inen enn 258 GuiLib GetBlueRgbColor eese eene ennt netten tne tn ennt tnter instet nnn 259 IVNlemCiA CRISIS
269. nnne nnns 211 GuiCorist ARAB CHARS INUSE 1d nini imet rre ied irre e i anion 211 GuiConst AUTOREDRAW MAX VAR SIZE essere nnne nnne nennen nnn 212 GuiConst AUTOREDRAW ON CHANGE cccsccsccssssscsscssessscsscescesessesecesessesseseeseessesseeeseaees 212 GuiConst AVR COMPILER FLASH RAM eene nnne nnne nnne nnns nennen nnns 212 GuiConst AVRGCC COMPILER seen eott vua e YT EXTERN TTE ERI TERRENT ETE EE ERREUR 212 GuiConst BIT BOTTOMRIGHT esses eene eene nennen nnns nn innen sinis ttn stint in innen 212 GuiCorist BIT TOPE Ts ierit RETE PERENNE GER TRES ERE RETENIR UNE 212 GuiConst_BITMAP_SUPPORT_ON ccccsccsssssssscsssessssecescssesssssecsecessssesesesessesseseesessesesaeseeenees 212 GuICONSt BLINK FIELDS MAX itii nininini conia n E ai ERa Ena an 213 GuiConst BUNK FIELDS OFF ir rrr v i et ri deiade 213 GuiConst BLINK LF COUNTS uu cecescsssssscsscescssessecsecssesssssessesssessessesessssesseseseessassaeeeesenses 213 GuiConst_BLINK_SUPPORT_ON cccccsssssssscsseesesssssecsecssessessecseessesseceseesssesseseeeeaesassereeesenees 213 GuiConst BYTE HORIZONTAL cscescsscsssessesecssessesseceecssessssseseesesssseseesessssssseseesassassaeesesenses 213 GuiConst BYTE LINES ioci de ERE ER ERS ERE ESTNE EECRERUEVUUEN 213 GuiCornst BYTE VERTICAL vii et RE REIR PS 213 GuiCOnst BYTES PR LINE 5er Pe ER rr e ED TEE 213 GuiConst BYTES PR SECTION nennen nennen nnne nnt nn innert sientes n
270. ns Square root of argument Full declaration GuiConst INT32U GuiLib Sqrt GuiConst INT32U X Input Argument Output Square root of argument GuiLib StrAnsiToUnicode Purpose Converts ANSI string to Unicode string Remarks Only accessible in Unicode character mode Unicode string must have sufficient space for converted string Full declaration void GuiLib StrAnsiToUnicode GuiConst TEXT S2 GuiConst CHAR S1 Input ANSI and Unicode string references Output None Related functions GuiLib UnicodeStrCmp GuiLib UnicodeStrCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrNCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrLen GuiLib UnicodeStrNCmp GuiLib TestPattern Purpose Shows the test pattern used for initial development of the display controller driver See the chapter on how to set up the system Full declaration void GuiLib TestPattern void Input None Output None GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down Purpose Scrolls text box contents one text line down Remarks Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down assSiioaGul Input Output Related functions GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Text box index 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib TextBox Scroll End GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home GuiLib TextBox Scroll To Line GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down Pixel Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related
271. nsible value for most displays is 3 or 4 pixels Undrawn area color Used by easyGUI to indicate areas of the display not touched by a particular screen structure Set this color to a deviating color to enhance its visibility In many instances it is nice to be able to see which areas of the display are drawn on by the structure Without the Undrawn color area this is invisible if drawing with the background color 6 4 i Soluti E 6 2 s Solutions 4 eaSSiliIQGUI COMPILER Basics Display controller Color Simulated display Compiler Operation Type definitions T ec ian mode C Bigndan BMS 8 bit char type char 8 bit signed type signed char 8 bit unsigned type unsigned char 16 bit signed type signed short 16 bit unsigned type unsigned short 24 bit signed type 24 bit unsigned type 32 bit signed type signed int 32 bit unsigned type unsigned int Pointer size C 16 bit C 24 bit C 32bit yoid void const Constant declarations Prefixes for constant declarations Unsigned byte const GuiConst INT8U Unsigned integer constGuiConsLINTIEU Signed integer constGuConsLINTIES Generic pointer const GuiConst PTR Font structure constGulib FonRec Font structure pointer const GuiLib_FontRecPt Font pointer lists OoOo S Default compiler prefixes e p controller endian mode Some micro controllers work in
272. nt LngScreenMainCount 9 const int LngScreenPreparationComplexCount 4 const int LngScreenPreparationSimpleCount 2 const int LngScrollBoxLineComplexTimeCount 2 const int LngTxtOnOffCount 2 include English h include German h include French h include Spanish h include Japanese h WideStringList LngConfigForceReduction LngLanguageCount ConfigForceReductionEnglish ConfigForceReductionGerman ConfigForceReductionFrench ConfigForceReductionSpanish ConfigForceReductionJapanese Iq ejiBI5 Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 80 Solutions So 4 easSSilIQGUI 3 Agroup of individual files for each defined language The texts are exported as string arrays Each string array contains texts from all structures with a common name PD English h Notepad DE File Edit Format View Help MessageBoxTextEnglish LngMessageBoxTextcount rr DU i er t e t r MessageBoxTitleEenglish LngMessageBoxTitlecount N G G E R I A PopupcleaningBoxEnglish LngPopupcleaningBoxcount NING S F1 to start cleaning widestring PreparationDosingEnglish LngPreparationDosingcount Doser No fLevel e EXPORTSETUP Defines texts export parameters Common setup Use Unicode format in exported files H file export setup Main H file Language ch m Main H file fixed header amp footer code m Language H files fixed header amp foot
273. nt height Rectangle Rectangle height and a width set directly as a property to the right of the Background box checkbox In our example structure the background box is enabled for the indexed structure that calls the ON OFF texts ConfigForceReduction 1 The net result is that a background of in this case 19 pixels width is drawn before the ON or OFF text is drawn sufficiently wide to cover any pre existing text As a side product the background color of an item with background box drawing enabled is automatically set to transparent to avoid drawing the background twice The fine art of cursor fields We are not quite finished with the trusted and tried Screen Config 1 structure It is supposed to be navigated by using a cursor to point out the desired parameter but so far not a word about cursor fields except for several promises to do it later so now is the time We want three cursor fields one for Language one for Force Reduction optional and one for Contrast In the example they are of course already defined Select Item 4 the first indexed structure in the Screen Config 1 structure Note the C0 in the item list rightmost column ex No Items ltem New Str Bt Copy f Delete SUL t uage To Item type La r CO s Langu Prin struct Clipboard Indexed struct call ConfigFor amp Cut Text t Display co c Formatter M T B ode Variable C2 v DiCon x Pos t
274. ntain the number in the selected style Two we want to show the value 123 as 1 23 Left adjusting Don t confuse this alignment with the normal alignment for texts boxes etc this alignment determines how the digits characters are placed in the field width but with the field width set to zero dynamic width this setting has no effect Decimal Other possibilities are hexadecimal exponential and time HH MM Off Not relevant here Off With the field width set to zero dynamic width this setting has no effect Off Not relevant here Off Not relevant here All this results in the numerical value 123 being translated to 1 23 If no formatter preceded the variable it would be formatted with default settings CONFIG STRUCTURE Our next example is the Screen Config 1 structure which shows a configuration screen containing three parameters assSii aul CONF IGURATION Language Enalish Force Reduction OFF Display contrast 25 The first parameter is a language selection where the language can be selected between five languages English German French Spanish and Italian The second parameter is optional and shall only be shown in some instances It is a Force Reduction on off selection whatever that is The third parameter is a display contrast setting going from 0 50 The intention is to let the user navigate the three parameters or two by using cursor fields but more on that
275. nun 284 GuiLib SetLanguage sese nnnne nnnm rennes tette nenne tenete netten ene nennen 284 GuiLib SetRedRgbColor eese eene ennt nn ennt tnt tn tnnt tnihi tnter taste innen 284 Guilib ShowBitrmiap aenea iet ette tite deri idee eee Pepe e NE PES NE PNE E NANE 285 Guilib ShowBitmiapArea ine rete terre reti gx ree eee pee e P AY Prep ee CE Pea ESO 285 GuiLbib ShowBitmapaAregAL icc ren ene e a EH EXER Te ECTS EON IEEE TK TRE TERI 286 Gullib ShowBitmidpiAE aceti cct ree rete e Ee PI Ee Ee Der Ie PHI EY eee R8 Te TE RSS VETERE 286 Gllib 3SDOWSCEeBED o sectetur temet PD LEE EEA 287 Guibib SInDeg niter eet ended re gue tete eene xev iei eme P be ENE 287 GUILD SINRA A oreinen ret end iret OT nesses deca aie GTI ERE ETE Vise tradu 287 Guilib Sart m P sande 288 GuiLib StrAnsiToUnicode esses ener nennen nennen nnne nn tense nn nnns 288 GUILID_TestPattern cccccccscccsscccsscccssscssscssscessscesssscsssscsesssecsssesssscseescessssecsssessssesssseesssersseees 288 GuiLib TextBox Scroll DOWn essere enne nennen nennen nnne nnne nnne innen 288 GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down Pixel eese nennen enne nnne nennen nennen 289 GULD TextBOX Scroll EO menu uio EIL lE IDEE 289 GuiLib TextBox Scroll End Pixel esses ener nnne nnne nennen nnns 290 GuiLib TextBox Scroll FitsInside eeseeeeeeeeennne nennen
276. o CONFIGURATION Language English Force Reduction OBR Display contrast 25 This isn t visible in easyGUI because the display is cleared each time a setting is changed or another structure is selected but on the target the above will happen Not pretty so something have to be done about the background Changing the background from Transparent to Pixel Off should solve the problem Indeed going from ON back to OFF displays CONFIGURATION Language Enalish Force Reduction ON Display contrast 25 to CONF IGURATION Language Enalish Force Reduction OFF Display contrast 25 Very fine Until you change the parameter to ON again assSii aul CONF IGURATION Language Enalish Force Reduction OON Display contrast 25 My my What happened now Invented a new word No the ON text was displayed correctly but the first letter of the OFF text is still very much visible So another solution must be found And this is a concept called a background box It is situated in the Text part of the properties panel mr ju change A 2J puruci ps colour Result Forced to transparent by background box Text Font No change Result Text2 Style Proportional Result Proportional Underlining V Backgroundbox 19 Mier I7 Ui renes find Mid a Turning it on for an item will instruct easyGUI to draw a filled box in the background color with a height determined by the item Text Fo
277. ode source string reference assSii aul S2 Unicode destination string reference StrLen Number of characters to copy Unicode destination string must have sufficient space Output None Related functions GuiLib StrAnsiToUnicode GuiLib UnicodeStrCpy GuiLib UnicodeStrCmp GuiLib UnicodeStrLen GuiLib UnicodeStrNCmp GuiLib VLine Purpose Draws a vertical line Full declaration void GuiLib VLine GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst INT16S Y2 GuiConst INTCOLOR Color Input Coordinates Color Output None Related functions GuiLib HLine GuiLib Line GuiLib LinePattern GuiDisplay unit This unit must be edited to suit the target system display controller as described previously The following functions are available in alphabetical order Functions GuiDisplay Init Purpose Initializes the display Should never be called directly because GuiLib Init calls it as part of the easyGUI initialization process However GuiLib Init must be called at some time during system startup Full declaration void GuiDisplay Init void Input None assSii aul Output Related functions GuiDisplay Lock Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions None GuiDisplay Refresh Prevents the operating system from making task shifts The contents of this function must be filled out by the programmer because it is OS dependent it is thus initially e
278. oll box items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox Init GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex void DataFuncPtr GuiConst INT16S LineIndex GuiConst INT16S NoOfLines GuiConst INT16S ActiveLine Scroll box index DataFuncPtr Address of scroll line call back function of type void FuncName GuiConst INT16S LineIndex NoOfLines Total No of lines in scroll box ActiveLine Active scroll line 1 means no active scroll line 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib ScrollBox Close GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw GuiLib ScrollBox RedrawLine GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Redraws dynamic parts of scroll box For complete GuiLib ScrollBox Init Used only for Scroll box items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex Scroll box index 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib ScrollBox Close redraw use assSiioaul GuiLib ScrollBox Init GuiLib ScrollBox RedrawLine GuiLib ScrollBox RedrawLine Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Redraws a single line of a scroll box For redrawing all visible lines use GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw Used only for Scroll box items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox RedrawLine GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex GuiConst INT16U ScrollLine Scroll box index Scroll line index zero is first line in scroll box list 0 Error in param
279. olor e Edited color with palette resolution Shows the current state of the color using the current color mode and depth bits per red green and blue color shown in parenthesis This field is only shown if applicable EasviliGUIi e Table of user defined colors These colors are 256 colors that can be easily used and copied across the system To set the color being edited to one of the Table entry colors just double click the Table entry To set the Table entry color drag the color from the Edited color field just above the Table using the mouse These colors need not be set to anything they are just meant as an easy way of selecting the same color for many items The Table colors can also be used as settings for colors throughout the easyGUI screens Changing this table can then quickly change the color of many items at once e Copy and Paste Copies a color to the internal clipboard and pastes it back in RGB format Only fii COLOR and maws UNICODE versions Specifies how the target system display controller handles color information in display RAM A window for color bit definitions is shown SE GREER 1 11 j Red bits 1 byte in use e Drag colors unused from legend at left to relevant bits above G Green bits Or just drag colors unused from bits to bits B Blue bits Tip Just drag to first and last bits of a color the rest will fill in automatically Unused bits Bits for the three primary
280. om changing anything else than the texts of a single language e Avoids license key problems when using another PC possibly at a remote location for the translation work It is part of the easyGUI package and is found in the easyTRANS folder INSTALLATION Run the easyTRANS installation program on the translators PC following the instructions on screen Several special fonts are required e Arial Should be present in a standard Windows installation e Arial Narrow Is part of e g Microsoft Office e Arial Unicode MS The installation program installs these fonts if needed The fonts can also be found in the Fonts sub folder of the easyTRANS install folder The easyTRANS utility shows a warning message if one or more fonts are missing PRINCIPLES easyTRANS functions by reading a special data file egt produced by easyGUI containing all fonts structures variables etc in short a complete copy of your project with the master language texts and the working language texts to be translated But why the complete project why not just the texts This is to enable easyTRANS to show not only the texts but also the complete structures containing these texts just like in the Language window in easyGUI This is a huge advantage when translating as it enables the Translator to see the context of the texts not just the bare texts The Translator can thus make correct translations of pieces of text and judge if the translated te
281. on define GuiConst DISPLAY HEIGHT XXX GuiConst DISPLAY HEIGHT HW Purpose Physical height of display in pixels This is the height used by the display driver in GuiDisplay c Differs from the virtual display height only if the display is rotated 90 Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY HEIGHT HW XXX GuiConst DISPLAY LITTLE ENDIAN Purpose Uses Little Endian byte ordering least significant byte in first address for display memory Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY LITTLE ENDIAN GuiConst DISPLAY WIDTH Purpose Virtual width of display in pixels This is the width seen by easyGUI when handling the display Differs from the physical display width only if the display is rotated 90 Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY WIDTH XXX GuiConst DISPLAY WIDTH HW Purpose Physical width of display in pixels This is the width used by the display driver in GuiDisplay c Differs from the virtual display width only if the display is rotated 90 Full declaration define GuiConst DISPLAY WIDTH HW XXX GuiConst FLOAT SUPPORT ON Purpose Float support module enabled Full declaration define GuiConst FLOAT SUPPORT ON assSii aul GuiConst FONT UNCOMPRESSED Purpose Indicates that all font data are uncompressed Full declaration define GuiConst FONT UNCOMPRESSED GuiConst GRAPH AXES MAX Purpose Max number of axes associated with all graph items automatically calculated b
282. on define GuiConst ITEM CHECKBOX INUSE GuiConst ITEM GRAPHICS LAYER FILTER INUSE Purpose One or more Graphics layer and or Graphics filter items are in use If no Graphics layer filter items are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to Graphics layer filter handling is excluded Full declaration define GuiConst ITEM GRAPHICS LAYER FILTER INUSE GuiConst ITEM GRAPH INUSE Purpose One or more Graph items in use If no Graph items are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to graph drawing is excluded Full declaration define GuiConst ITEM GRAPH INUSE GuiConst ITEM PANEL INUSE Purpose One or more Panel items in use If no Panel items are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to panel drawing is excluded Full declaration define GuiConst ITEM PANEL INUSE assSiioaul GuiConst ITEM RADIOBUTTON INUSE Purpose Full declaration One or more Radio button items in use If no Radio button items are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to radio button drawing is excluded fdefine GuiConst ITEM RADIOBUTTON INUSE GuiConst ITEM SCROLLBOX INUSE Purpose Full declaration One or more Scroll box items in use If no Scroll box items are present this directive will not be present either
283. oning of the complete Paragraph box not the placement of its contents inside the box Scrollable paragraph index No Enables vertical scrolling of a paragraph contents An index number should be assigned to this paragraph for identification in the target system Foreground color panel Item types Text Paragraph Pixel Line Framed rectangle Filled rectangle Framed rounded rectangle Filled rounded rectangle Circle Ellipse Quarter Circle Quarter Ellipse Structure call Indexed structure call Conditional structure call Variable Variable paragraph Scroll box Selects the foreground and bar foreground colors There are seven options No change Keeps the color currently on use Pixel ON This color is set in the display parameters function Normally it means a dark pixel in monochrome systems but could mean the opposite in inversed systems light text on dark background Pixel OFF This color is set in the display parameters function Color The color can be freely selected from the possible colors on the target system depending on the currently selected color mode and color depth Not relevant in monochrome target display systems EasvilliGUIi e Invert Uses the current background color e Table Use the color specified in the table of user defined colors e Variable Uses the variable defined in the appearing dropdown box to determine the color The button copies the variable name to the clipboard to be easily
284. or GuiLib GetRedRgbColor Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Extracts red component from RGB color GuiConst INT8U GuiLib GetRedRgbColor GuiConst INT32U RgbColor 24 bit RGB color 8 bit red color component GuiLib GetBlueRgbColor GuiLib GetGreenRgbColor GuiLib SetBlueRgbColor GuiLib SetGreenRgbColor GuiLib SetRedRgbColor assSiiaul GuiLib GetTextLanguagePtr Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Returns pointer to text in structure Language of selected text can be freely selected no matter what language is active char GuiLib GetTextLanguagePtr GuiConst INT16U Structure GuiConst INT16U TextNo GuiConst INT16S LanguageIndex Structure ID Text No O is first text in the structure items other than Text and Paragraph are ignored Language index Pointer to text based on structure text No and current language Returns Nil if no text was found GuiLib GetTextPtr GuiLib GetTextWidth GuiLib GetTextPtr Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Returns pointer to text in structure char GuiLib GetTextPtr GuiConst INT16U Structure GuiConst INT16U TextNo Structure ID Text No O is first text in structure Items other than texts are ignored Pointer to text based on structure text No and current language Returns Nil if no text was found GuiLib GetTextLanguagePtr Gui
285. or indices which are initially black H E Ea C N LENESET PL EL EET T LIS ILI ET EIS NS LN MINNS E NEN H EH O A E Nu OL LI LN E LIES LI LI an E L_ m e Factory 2 RGB 8 8 4 levels i e all combinations of 8 red levels 8 green and 4 blue Em gH nucum T m E j E IJ E ENS EN LI EE ee NND NNI LI ES Lee SEND NNI LI EJ INN ESNND NN LI LEE INN SEND NNI LI LJ i assSiiaul e Factory 3 RGB 8 4 8 levels i e all combinations of 8 red levels 4 green and 8 blue LJ ES BS BS D j LJ ES ES ES IND E m Nm NN NM NM eee LI L E L L A ES ES BW ND NN TLL LESE T LETTILIJ LESE T T PE Tt LESE Py Tt LIT T a LL LST E LISS LLL e Factory 4 RGB 4 8 8 levels i e all combinations of 4 red levels 8 green and 8 blue a E ELI E ELI LT E LII E NE ET O ES BS B ND JN LJ EJ EJ EX BS BS LN L E L L LI IE EJ LI LH LE LI LE LE J _ a an a E E m N NM NM M EX p S NE NN JN mE IP IILLILII NES NET DX gj BOLE T e User defined 1 Any color can be assigned to any color index Initially all colors are black e User defined 2 Any color can be assigned to any color index Initially all colors are black e User defined 3 Any color can be assigned to any
286. order has an extra line of pixels added as indicated by the black box below the Border pixels text Clicking on any of the four boxes around this text will toggle its status Playing with cursor indices In the demo database are two main menus MAIN MENU MAIN MENU Preparation Single Samples Preparation Manual preparation and Sample Holder Preparation Configuration Manual preparation Configuration They are made in the same style but don t contain exactly the same menu items The purpose is to show once more that cursor fields can be numbered rather freely MAIN MENU MAIN MENU MME AGMA UG AU MAA COORG UOR id assSiioaul In the left structure is three menu items cursor fields O Preparation 3 Manual preparation 4 Configuration while the right one contains 1 Single samples preparation 2 Sample holder preparation 3 Manual preparation 4 Configuration One of the two main menus is shown on the target system depending on some kind of selection a standard and a deluxe version perhaps if machine deluxe GuiLib ShowScreen GuiStruct Screen Main 0 else GuiLib NO CURSOR GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW GuiLib ShowScreen GuiStruct Screen Main 1 GuiLib NO CURSOR GuiLib RESET AUTO REDRAW This code selects between the two structures So in this instance the index numbers of the two structures 0 an
287. order is drawn as a lowered edge around the panel Note that the embossed panel border cannot have rounded corners Scroll box panel Item types Scroll box OK cm X11 aSScoMpP assSiiaul Defines the parameters of a Scroll box item A scroll box is an extended functionality which contains a complete scroll box feature in one single item Typically it consists of the following parts e Body the essence of the scroll box which presents itself an optional combination of visual items e Scroll lines a number of lines of the scroll box list e Scroll line markers colored markers of each scroll line in the box with an index e Scroll bar an optional element of scrolling which typically consists of a framed rectangle two arrows bitmaps and two horizontal lines separating these arrows e Scroll bar markers an element inside the scroll bar indicating the state of the scroll list usually a bitmap in form of a small rectangle e Indicator an optional element for additional scroll line marking e Indicator marker an element inside the indicator pointing to one of the scroll lines independently of currently selected scroll lines There are two variants of creating these components e The components may be drawn right in the scroll box item e The components may be drawn separately in other structures and then composed together by means of indexed structure calls The scroll box panel is t
288. ordinate position lies inside one of the touch areas The first touch area found to include the event coordinate is selected as a hit and its touch area number is returned by the GuiLib TouchCheck function If GuiLib TouchCheck did not find any touch areas at the touch event coordinates it returns 1 A slightly more advanced function is GuiLib TouchGet which performs the same action as GuiLib TouchCheck and additionally returns touch coordinates in display coordinates The GuiLib_TouchGet function is thus only meaningful if touch adjustment is in action i e if touch and display coordinates differ GuiLib TouchGet can also be useful for simply converting touch coordinates to display coordinates thus ignoring the function result EasviliGUi 12 C CODE GENERATION WINDOW The final stage in easyGUI is generation of actual target system C code This is accomplished in the code generation window Font files Destination path Browse Insert project file path ESeasyGUN Tutorial Paths relative to project file folder are allowed Empty path means project file folder GuiFont h m Fixed code View source GuiFont c m Fixed code View source C file extension c Keep old files if unchanged r3 Make fonts source Generates fonts and language setup code Code generation Structure amp Variable files Mode A 5 s Target normal GuiStruct c Ef Fixed code LQ View source C m Pe simulator GuiStructh Fixedcode amp View source L
289. other advanced tools but the reward will be reduced development time and a better final product when the easyGUI tool has been mastered Take your time start with simple problems and gradually work your way through the system using more and more advanced functions as the needs arise THE DISPLAY easyGUI treats the target system display as a graphical canvas i e a drawing surface on which objects may be placed All placements are free so there are no predefined positions or grid which limits the artistic freedom The coordinate system has origin 0 0 at the upper left corner with X coordinates going towards the right and Y coordinates going downwards The coordinates are counted in display pixels so the display sets the limits for the coordinate system There is no formal limit on display size in easyGUI but the vast majority of systems using easyGUI have display resolutions of 800x600 pixels or lower with 320x240 pixels quarter VGA being a very popular resolution easyGUI supports color depths ranging from simple monochrome systems one bit per pixel up to true color systems with a maximum of 32 bits per color oo E asyiiGUl MENUS Project Tutorial aja B File name C easyGUI T utorial T utorial gui Display 240x128 pixels oriented normally 24 bit per pixel 16M colors RGB colors Character mode Unicode 16 bit character codes File commands Recently opened projects D Projekt easyGUI Ap
290. ou can create the driver using one of the other drivers as a template Each driver in GuiDisplay c is described with the supported display resolution and color depth the appropriate settings for easyGUI set in the Parameters window Display controller tab page compatible display controllers if any and special features precautions of this display controller type Make a copy of the original GuiDisplay c delete unwanted display drivers and add any other relevant or desired display functionality like e g contrast control New drivers are constantly added to GuiDisplay c so if your display controller of choice is not found in GuiDisplay c it may have been included in an updated version Contact easyGUI support at support ibissolutions com and we will help you Display writing The GuiDisplay Refresh function transfers data from easyGUI s internal display buffer in system RAM to the display controller s own internal RAM This data transfer is kept at a minimum because most display controllers are rather slow to access easyGUI therefore checks which parts of the display have been altered since the last display data transfer and then only transfers the altered data This data checking is done on a scan line level ensuring a very efficient system assSiioaul The function must go through all scan lines horizontal or vertical depending on display controller type and for each scan line transfer data from a starting position
291. ow major ticks on X axis Show a small line tick below the X axis at the intervals determined by the Major step setting above If selected the size of the tick can be customized using the Length and Width controls provided Show minor ticks on X axis Show a small line tick below the X axis at the intervals determined by the Minor step setting above If selected the size of the tick can be customized using the Length and Width controls provided The Minor tick mark would typically be smaller than the Major tick marks Show numbers on X axis Show the value of the X axis at the Major tick marks The distance of the values from the X axis is determined by the bottom of the Major tick marks and the Offset from X axis setting Show ticks number at origin Turn on or off the tick mark and or number at the start of the X axis assSii aul Omit ticks numbers at end of X axis The setting here allows axis marks to be removed from the end of the axis Graph Y axis The easyGUI graph item supports multiple Y axes definitions This provides a powerful instrument to be able to show multiple data representations on a single chart each axis can be displayed or hidden independently of all others A graph must have at least 1 Y axis Four buttons are provided to control the Y axes definitions New DELETE UP and Down Y axis index Identifies the Y axis on the target system so that it can be referenced through the GuiLib API This number cannot be
292. p left corner of the display with X coordinates running to the right and Y coordinates running down The following parameters can be edited for each coordinate e Coordinate value 16 bit can be negative e Mode Can be Absolute The coordinate value is used directly Relative The coordinate value is added to the calculated coordinate of the previous item For item zero it is added to the origin coordinate value Relative to start The coordinate value is added to the starting coordinate of the previous item This is e g the left edge of a text or top in case of Y coordinate This is not the same as the calculated coordinate of the previous item if that item e g contains a centered text the calculated coordinate would then be at the center of this text Relative to end The coordinate value is added to the starting coordinate of the previous item This is e g the right edge of a text or bottom in case of Y coordinate e Table Fetches a coordinate from the Position window e Variable Fetches a coordinate from a variable value The variable must be of an integer type The value can be edited using the small buttons below the variable box e Memory load Fetches a coordinate from a memory buffer There are three memory locations individually for X and Y The memory values are only stored during the writing of one structure including calls to child structures When structure writing begins all memory buffers are reset to zero
293. parameter panels in Structure editor are displayed in various colors to distinguish between them visually Paragraph panel e Include line feeds when counting characters When enabled line feeds are also included when counting characters for blinking operations on marked items Bitmaps panel e Use 16 bit words Some microcontrollers require 16 bit words when reading bitmap data Only applicable to color depths of 12 16 bits per pixel Code size will increase slightly F EaSYliGUI c li 8 LANGUAGE TRANSLATION WINDOW Displays a list of all texts in structures Current language English EA easy TRANSLATE export import P3 Export texts lt 43 Import texts amp Language setup gt Export lt q Import P3 Export h files amp Export setup Texts in list Fonts in display Displays off Zoom v Mark text Alltexts Translation texts only Selected characters All characters E Yan c Mx dx C 2 7 Show active area gA Search dh Find next Copy from left to right Show all text languages Screen Main 1 Translating from Translating to MAIN MENU HAUPTMEN E N nglish MAN PR PARATION Single Samples Preparation Pr paration von Einzelproben PROZESS LAUFT Sample Holder Preparation Probenhalterpraparation PAUSED PAUSE Manual preparation Manuelle Pr paration STOPPE Configuration Konfiguration Noten wm 3 e os 2 aim zE V e Anzeigenkontrast 02 FLASH PROGRAMMING No translatio
294. pixel width border void GuiLib Ellipse GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT16U Radiusl GuiConst INT16U Radius2 GuiConst INT32S BorderColor GuiConst INT32S FillColor Center coordinate Horizontal and vertical radii Border color GuiLib NO COLOR means same color as fill color Fill color GuiLib NO COLOR means no filling None GuiLib Circle Draws a filled rectangle void GuiLib FillBox GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst INT16S X2 GuiConst INT16S Y2 GuiConst INTCOLOR Color Coordinates Color None GuiLib BorderBox GuiLib Box GuiLib GetBlinkingCharCode Purpose Returns character code from a blinking item string assSiiaul Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Removed if blink support is disabled GuiConst TEXT GuiLib GetBlinkingCharCode GuiConst INT16U BlinkFieldNo GuiConst INT16U CharNo GuiConst INT16U OmitCtrlCode Blink item index number Character number Index 1 is first character OmitCtrlCode if true hard and soft line breaks will be excluded in the character number count Hard line breaks are OxOA codes Soft line breaks are space and characters if at the end of a line Character code None GuiLib GetBlueRgbColor Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Extracts blue component from RGB color GuiConst INT8U GuiLib GetBlueRgbColor GuiConst INT32U
295. play c so that it is easier to maintain explained in more detail below SETTING UP THE SYSTEM FOR EASYGUI USE Before running the easyGUI library your target system must be set up The following items must be successfully implemented 1 2 Physical display connection Setting up easyGUI for your display type Display control functions Compiling the project easyGUI interfacing 4 eaSSiIQGUI 3 3 When these items are properly implemented you are ready to start developing your GUI your very own Graphical User Interface 1 Physical display connection The display can be connected using port access direct memory access or a combination hereof Most small displays are simply connected via a number of ports but the most efficient connection depends on your actual hardware It is irrelevant to easyGUI how this connection is made as long as a single requirement is satisfied easyGUI must be able to address individual pixels on the display by sending display RAM contents from its own display buffer in normal system RAM to the internal display controller RAM buffer It is beyond the scope of this manual to give details on how to make a proper connection of the display so this issue will not be covered further 2 Setting up easyGUI for your display type It is essential that easyGUI is properly configured for your specific type of display and compiler Enter the Parameters window
296. plic 6 0 046 0 0 002 PC T utorial qui D Projekt easyGUI Applic 6 0 046 0 0 002 PC T estGraph gui D Projekt easyGUI Applic 6 0 046 0 0 002 PC D emo qui D Projekt easyGUI Applic 6 0 046 0 0 002 PC CharT est gui D Projekt easyGUI 4pplic 6 0 046 0 0 002 PC T est ariables gui D Projekt easyGUI Applic 6 0 046 0 0 002 PC test gui D Projekt easyGUI Applic 6 0 046 0 0 002 PC GuiDemo gui D Projekt easyGUI Applic 6 0 046 0 0 002 PC T utorialRichard qui D Projekt easyGUI Applic 6 0 046 0 0 002 PC T estColourT able gui Open ORDAN Bo Ea e easyGUl is controlled through a number of windows one for each main function Selection between the main functions are done by using the hot keys along the left edge or function keys One project can be loaded at a time The project contains all fonts screen structures etc for one display If the target system utilizes several different displays a project should be created for each display Several displays handled by the same p processor are not supported by easyGUI albeit easyGUI can be used for one of the displays The exception is if both displays are of the same type and resolution easyGUI contains a number of main functions e Basic file functions e Font management F3 e Font editing F4 e Project parameters F5 e Language support F7 e Positions F8 Ig GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 21 Solutions assSiiaul Variables F9 St
297. put Related functions None None GuiLib MarkDisplayBoxRepaint GuiLib RgbColorToGrayScale Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Translates from RGB color to 0 255 gray scale value GuiConst INT8U GuiLib RgbColorToGrayScale GuiConst INT32U RgbColor RGB color value 32 bit 24 bits used low byte Red middle byte Green high byte Blue Gray scale value 0 255 GuiLib GrayScaleToRgbColor GuiLib RgbToPixelColor Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Translates from RGB color to proper pixel value for display controller color setup GuiConst INTCOLOR GuiLib RgbToPixelColor GuiConst INT32U RgbColor RGB color value 32 bit 24 bits used low byte Red middle byte Green high byte Blue Encoded pixel color value GuiLib PixelToRgbColor GuiLib ScrollBox Close Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Closes a scroll box Used only for Scroll box items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox Close GuiConst INT16U ScrollBoxIndex Scroll box index 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib ScrollBox Init GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw GuiLib ScrollBox RedrawLine assSii aul GuiLib ScrollBox Down Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Makes next scroll line active and scrolls list if needed Used only for Scroll box items GuiCon
298. r Embedded Systems making graphical user interfaces has never been easier Version 1 23 The reason for this can be found by inspecting item 4 the for Embedded Systems text Look at the Style setting for this item 4 eaSSiliIQGUI ibed ing d m onNg D rarm suucu g ormu suucut tical Top Pos Var text Color Misc Text for Embedded Systems GEH No of characters in text 20 p Char sel Translation Text direction Controlled by language Result Left to Right Font No change v E Result ANSI 7 bold Style No change v Underlining Result Proportional Background box Width er ei Height above baseline o El lih Height below baseline o zi font height Blinking text field Foreground color mio v A EN It is set to No change This is a common feature of many settings in the property panel Selecting No change means that the settings from the previous item is maintained And what is this setting then That is revealed by the small blue info texts right next to most of the properties D rarm uuu go omu sui ical Top Pos Vates Color Misc bed ing g n onN Text for Embedded Systems Age No of characters in text 20 Ff Char sei Translation Text direction Controlled by language Result Left to Right Font No change Al Result ANSI 7 bold Style
299. rameters in the import file Most of the parameters are either column numbers or keywords Columns are divided by the delimiter character and are numbered one two etc in each imported text line Variable identified column The column containing the names of the variables Data type column Allows for variables to be divided between integral and enumerated variable definitions If this division between types is not necessary the column index can be set to zero Please observe that enumerated types are currently not supported by easyGUI but that these variable definitions are imported as variables of type unsigned char Integral keyword The keyword to be found in the Data type column if a variable definition is of integral type Enumerated keyword The keyword to be found in the Data type column if a variable definition is of enumerated type Enumerated types are always imported as 8 bit unsigned variables Enumerations starts at column For an enumerated variable type the first enumeration declaration is found in this column The following columns are expected to contain additional enumerations until the end of the line Variable type boolean column Boolean keyword The underlying variable type for boolean is an unsigned char Variable types integer column 8 bit keyword assSiiaul 16 bit keyword 32 bit keyword Variable types floating point column Float keyword Double keyword Variable type string column St
300. required easyGUI color depth The black white ratio slider determines how dark a pixel must be in order for easyGUI to perceive it as black and not white monochrome fonts or how much to darken brighten the original pixel color anti aliased fonts Some fonts are best imported with the slider near the middle position while others will be better represented if the slider is pushed more toward darker or brighter It is easy to experiment because the import can be repeated again and again using slightly different slider settings If the import covers a very large range of characters a smaller sub range can be used when adjusting the slider in order to speed up the response Examples Windows TTF Mistral font 16pt normal font style monochrome font Windows ABC easyGUI import 50 black white ratio AEG easyGUI import 70 black white ratio AEG easyGUI import 80 black white ratio ARG In this example the best result is probably somewhere around 70 black white ratio Sharpening can be enabled and its strength set 1 10 Sharpening enhances character edges in order to tighten up the appearance However on the downside the sharpening will cause pixel defects if used too much Horizontal placement Two options are possible for the vertical placement of imported characters EasvilliGUIi Default from font easyGUI does not make any adjustments to the horizontal character placement Other X position The horizontal placem
301. riable which can take one of the following values GuiLib BUTTON STATE UP GuiLib BUTTON STATE DOWN and GuiLib BUTTON STATE DISABLED The Up state usually indicates that a button is not pressed and the Down state indicates that the button is pressed This provides comfortable feedback for touch screen users who can immediately see assSii aul a response to their touch Of course these states are labeled Up and Down because when the button is styled as 3D that is how it looks in these states There is no restriction placed by easyGUI on which of these states means pressed and which means not pressed The disabled state is a special state that turns the button grey Each state can have a different text a different glyph and a different font Making buttons a very simple way to create advanced functionality By changing the values of two variables and calling GuiLib Refresh the appearance of both buttons can be rapidly changed In the example below the OK button is being pressed Advanced Cdiffigurau E i ae Rough Coarse Q Save to Flash v Smooth Q Using a Paragraph item with a radio button allows the text associated with each option to be set in one entry This makes it easier to find all options for this radio button group in the list of translations Now to the structure calls the structure MessageBoxButton x contains just one item a button The first question may be why no
302. ring keyword String length column This column setting is to be used if the string length is specified in its own column and not as part of the string keyword If this feature is not necessary the column number can be set to zero Signed unsigned column This column setting is to be used if the signed unsigned choice for integer types is specified in its own column and not as part of the integer keyword If this feature is not necessary the column number can be set to zero Signed keyword Unsigned keyword Variable value column This column setting is to be used if values for variables are specified in their own column If this feature is not necessary the column number can be set to zero all variable values will then be set to zero empty string The columns for boolean integer float etc can be the same column in fact this is often the case Making the import When pressing the IMPORT VARIABLE DEFINITIONS button a dialog is shown which permits selecting the desired import file After pressing OK the import will start All variable definitions accepted by the importer function are then created Variables with names that already exist can be overwritten skipped or made as a copy depending on the setup Corrupt or illegal syntax in the import file is simply skipped EasyilliGUl 11 STRUCTURES WINDOW Screen structures are the basic ingredient in easyGUI Structures are simple or complex collections of text and graphical elemen
303. rmal setting is unchecked i e the character acts as a standard proportionally spaced character For certain situations like e g some Asian characters it may be convenient to treat characters as having a fixed width This is enabled by checking this setting CHECK WHITE SPACE controls the selected characters for sufficient white space at the edges of the character cell This can be useful when creating large Asian fonts In a quick action a range of characters can be checked for parts of characters extending out of the desired character box Before starting the function the desired white space at the top bottom left and right edges is set and it can be controlled where the test shall start from When pressing the CHECK WHITE SPACE button easyGUI will show the first character in the range which violates the criteria or show an Ok message if all selected characters passed the test Nothing is edited with this function REPORT WHITE SPACE reports how many pixels white space is present at the top bottom left and right edges Nothing is edited with this function PREV selects the character just before the current character Characters can also be selected using the arrow keys on the keyboard by clicking in the character set or by using the Search for character field just below the PREV and NEXT buttons character codes both in decimal and hexadecimal and direct characters can be entered NExT selects the character just after the current ch
304. ro I e The compiler directive GuiConst LANGUAGE ALL ACTIVE in GuiConst h tells that all languages are included E e The compiler directive GuiConst LANGUAGE SOME ACTIVE in GuiConst h tells that some languages are absent Ig ejiBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS Solutions assSii aul Uncompressed font data The Uncompressed font option instructs easyGUI to generate font data uncompressed i e all characters in a font take up the same space Normally this option should be left unchecked ensuring that easyGUI will compress all font data as much as possible saving considerable ROM space on the target system The only reason for using uncompressed font data is if manual manipulation of font data is needed in the target system e g when dynamically reading in font data during execution External memory storage The font structure and bitmap data and various other minor data structures are normally placed in the target system user interface as constant data These data are usually placed in main memory space as ROM data In order to put these data into external memory e g SPI accessed Flash RAM because of memory constraints pointer references in ordinary ROM must be changed to external memory data offsets Some ROM memory space is thus still needed but the amount is greatly reduced The data destined for external memory is generated as a GuiRemote bin binary file The following data sect
305. roll lines the bar foreground color has no effect Background color panel Item types Clear area Text Paragraph Framed rectangle Framed rounded rectangle Circle Ellipse Quarter Circle Quarter Ellipse Structure call Indexed structure call Conditional structure call Variable Variable paragraph Graphics layer Scroll box Selects the background and bar background colors There are eight options e No change Keeps the color currently on use e Pixel ON This color is set in the display parameters function Normally it means a dark pixel in monochrome systems but could mean the opposite in inversed systems light text on dark background e Pixel OFF This color is set in the display parameters function e Color The color can be freely selected from the possible colors on the target system depending on the currently selected color mode and color depth EasviliGUIi e Invert Uses the current foreground color e Transparent No background is drawn e Table Use the color specified in the table of user defined colors e Variable Uses the variable defined in the appearing dropdown box to determine the color The button copies the variable name to the clipboard to be easily used in the target code The button shows a window for color selection just like explained above for foreground color The bar background color is used for cursor fields and scroll lines when these are active i e selected In early versions o
306. rtionally the PS marks are used to calculate the distance between the characters The characters are placed so that the left PS marks of the second character keep a minimum distance in pixels to the right PS marks of the first character This minimum distance is common for all characters in the font and is defined along with other basic font dimensions The PS marks are not necessarily placed on the first or last used pixels in a pixel line It is the overall shape of the character that determines where PS marks are placed Proportional writing example The text Fg F and g has the following PS marks assSii aul Di it ttt ik gt a im q E E pps EBENEN PTT tT Yt EEE EEE 5 EN L im gt _ lt 1 EN EN EN EN EN NEM BEEN an PTT Ey Ty gt d NEN NH un 7 X Dy tT m and For this font the proportional distance is set to 2 pixels so g is placed after F so that the two PS marks coming closest to each other maintains a horizontal distance of two pixels In this example it is the PS marks midway between Base Line and Mid Line indicated by stars gt gt a n al
307. ructures screen designs F10 C source code generation F1 1 Import export of data between easyGUI projects F12 The individual items are explained in the following chapters Basic file functions Project and application management Handling of projects open close save recent files etc plus About Help and License keys The nine projects last opened are remembered by the system for easy access They are presented in the central list box Selecting one of them corresponds to opening it normally with the Open command Buttons Open Opens a project file The ctrl O command can be used Save saves changes to the project The F2 key or the ctrl S command can also be used SaveAs Saves the project under another name The ctrl A command can also be used New Creates a new project containing only basic data The ctrl N command can also be used Close closes the currently open project The ctrl F4 command can also be used Help displays this manual The F1 key can also be used About displays information about the easyGUI program The ctrl command can also be used License displays license data allowing license key updating The ctrl L command can also be used If a working dongle is attached the dongle ID will be shown Exit closes easyGUI The ctrl Q command can also be used Save saves changes to the project The F2 key or the ctrl S command can also be used assSii
308. s uiLib Graph AddDataSet 0 0 GraphDataLine 100 0 0 an Add data points to graph item 0 data set 0 iLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 0 12 2 iLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 0 20 14 uiLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 0 25 17 iLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 0 52 47 iLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 0 82 147 QQQQQ Add a dataset to graph item 0 as data set 1 with 100 data points uiLib Graph AddDataSet 0 1 GraphDataBufBar 100 0 0 S Add data points to graph item 0 data set 0 iLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 1 10 5 iLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 1 20 24 uiLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 1 25 3 iLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 1 52 57 iLib Graph AddDataPoint 0 1 82 43 QQAQQAQ Q p ibLib Graph Redraw 0 GuiLib Refresh The Graph item has a number of additional function calls available that allow more precise control over the display of the Axes and data sets Refer to the function reference section of this manual for more information LET S SCROLL easyGUI with the 6K 1 v t AaSYCOMP add on module supports scrolling information A necessity when handling lists of data because the relatively small displays used in most embedded applications don t allow much data to be visible at once The Scroll box item All visual components of the scroll box are contained in the scroll box item either directly as parameters or through c
309. s coordinate relative coordinate etc the calculation can be viewed at the bottom of the panel Alignment panel Item types Clear area Text Paragraph Line Framed rectangle Filled rectangle Framed rounded rectangle Filled rounded rectangle Circle Ellipse Quarter Circle Quarter Ellipse Bitmap Background bitmap Structure call Indexed structure call Variable Variable paragraph Check box Radio button Button Panel Graph Scroll box Active area Clipping rectangle Graphics layer Touch area Edits the horizontal alignment of the item There are five alternatives e No change Keeps the alignment setting currently in use As previous item e Left adjust The item is placed so that its left edge is at the calculated X coordinate e Centre The item is placed so that it is centered over the calculated X coordinate e Right adjust The item is placed so that its right edge is at the calculated X coordinate e From X1 table Takes the alignment defined in the Position function for the table position defined under coordinate X1 The vertical alignment cannot be freely selected Texts are placed with their Base line over the calculated Y coordinate Other objects have their top at the calculated Y coordinate Quarter circle Ellipse panel Item types Quarter Circle Quarter Ellipse Selects one of four quadrants of a circle ellipse to draw Structure call panel Item types Structure call and Indexed structure call Sele
310. s involves e Setting up ports and or addressing e Enabling the display e Selecting a purely graphics mode e Select start address and address range e Initializing display memory These initial activities cannot be supplied by easyGUI in a ready to use form as the actual routine depends on the type of display controller the microprocessor and compiler tools The supplied GuiDisplay unit in the easyGUI library folder must therefore be edited to fit the selected display controller in your target system Make a copy of the supplied GuiDisplay unit into your target system source code folder and make adjustments to the GuiDisplay Init function as required Selecting a display driver At the top of GuiDisplay c are a number of compiler directives One of them should be activated corresponding to the desired display driver Each driver supports one or more display controllers as many display controllers are marketed under different names and numerical codes but are in fact identical To find the correct driver you must search for your display controller type through the complete GuiDisplay c file e g 5T7920 Omit eventual characters after the number as they often designate differences in e g housing and it is not practical to mention all existing variants in the driver lists If the desired display controller cannot be found you can contact easyGUI support at support ibissolutions com A suitable driver can then usually be made quickly Or y
311. s routine ensures that the blink box position and size is synchronized with the text being displayed Remarks Removed if blink support is disabled Full declaration void GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItemUpdate GuiConst INT16U BlinkFieldNo Input Blink item index number Output None Related functions GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItem GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItemStop GuiLib BlinkBoxStart Purpose Sets parameters for blinking box function Remarks Removed if blink support is disabled Full declaration void GuiLib BlinkBoxStart GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst INT16S X2 GuiConst_INT16S Y2 GuiConst INT16S Rate Input Rectangle coordinates Blinking rate in multiples of GuiLib Refresh refresh rate valid range 0 255 Blinking rate 2 255 disables blinking but makes an initial inverting of the rectangle Output None Related functions GuiLib BlinkBoxStop GuiLib BlinkBoxStop Purpose Stops blinking both if started by a GuiLib BlinkBoxStart call or a GuiLib BlinkBoxMarkedItem call Remarks Removed if blink support is disabled Full declaration void GuiLib BlinkBoxStop void assSii aul Input None Output None Related functions GuiLib BlinkBoxStart GuiLib BorderBox Purpose Draws a filled rectangle with single pixel border Full declaration void GuiLib BorderBox GuiConst INT16S X1 GuiConst INT16S Y1 GuiConst INT16S X2 GuiConst_INT16S Y2 GuiConst INTCOLOR Border
312. sabled tabs only that allow all three states to have the same bitmap and settings Button glyph bitmap A bitmap file location should be defined in the File name field with the help of BROWSE button If the bitmap is edited outside of easyGUI the REFRESH button can be used to refresh the display To make the project more portable you can move the bitmap into the project directory and a handy shortcut is provided with the REMOVE PATH button to quickly reload the bitmap from the project folder Parts of the bitmap can be made transparent using the TRANSPARENT BACKGROUND selection box Bitmap offset X Y Changes the position the bitmap in the button Note that if the button layout includes Text easyGUI moves the text when the bitmap is moved in order to maintain an even appearance cm yt aSScoMpP Item types Panel OK Defines the parameters of a Panel item This panel allows the Panel Style to be selected from the following options e Flat The panel will be drawn as a standard Framed rounded rectangle e 3D raised The borders will be drawn to show the panel as a Framed rounded rectangle that appears to come out of the screen e 3D lowered The borders will be drawn to show the panel as a Framed rounded rectangle that appears to go into of the screen e Embossed raised The border is drawn as a raised edge around the panel Note that the embossed panel border cannot have rounded corners e Embossed lowered The b
313. se key as delivered with the package easyGUI will now be fully functional for a limited amount of time typically 14 days When the dongle is received it is simply placed in a free USB connector on the PC and easyGUl is restarted easyGUI will then recognize the dongle easyGUI may be installed on several PC s and the dongle simply moved around to the desired PC If it is necessary to run easyGUI concurrently on several PC s additional licenses must be purchased A discount may be offered for multiple licenses Please contact sales ibissolutions com for more information The dongle must be mounted in the PC as long as easyGUl is running After running easyGUI the dongle can simply be removed from the PC edSSiliQUI Usually the dongle just works with the drivers found in Windows If not the official HASP dongle driver must be installed It is located in the Dongle sub folder under the easyGUI installation folder It can also be downloaded from the HASP site at topmost item www aladdin com support hasp enduser asp Should problems still arise you can contact support ibissolutions com IN IBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 18 EasyiliGUl 3 INTRODUCTION HOW DOES IT WORK The process of development when using easyGUI can be summed up as Ul easyGUI PC application data files Compiler Linker easyGUl library easyGUI Finished display dri
314. ser to manually enter modify the structure name and index Double clicking a cell displays a dropdown list of all available structures The JUMP TO STRUCTURE button does exactly the same as the CHILD STRUCTURE button for the row in the table that is currently highlighted Variable panel Item types Indexed structure call Conditional Structure call Variable and Variable paragraph Selects a variable for the indexed conditional structure call or for displaying The value can be edited using the small buttons below the variable box The button copies the variable name to the Windows clipboard with the text Guivar added before it This ensures easy pasting into target system C code Variable formatting panel Item types Variable formatter Determines formatting for numeric variables The following parameters can be edited e Field width The number of digits allowed in the numeric representation of a variable Zero indicates variable field width i e the field width is made just sufficient to display the variable e Decimals Determines the number of decimals after the decimal point The setting works for both integers and floats For integers the decimal point or is simply inserted to display the number of decimals e g two decimals shows the value 123 as 1 23 Zeroes are inserted if needed The value 23 is shown as 0 23 The type of decimal point or is set in the Parameters window assSii aul e Alignm
315. sessescsesscssssceccsccssssceeeesseecsesseeseeesnesseeeeeeeesssssaeeeenessesaeeesensnees 147 epi 149 IMPORT EXPORT WINDOW coexxvo sess eno o aaron nae nune arra aan roto sK pasa ropa n abe rab EwEOrkca 150 Current project panel 4 esee eeeeee cesses enses eene nets est ens satin assis asta asas tasse tss s sensa stas sets sias 150 External project hee 151 Middle panel controls and settings cccsssssccssssssecsssssecesssscccessssceessssscesesssscceeesseseeeeens 152 HOW TO SET UP YOUR SYSTEM oras Senna ease kanns pe rupe sy prs a rona a ek b Eve S rkca 154 Minimum RAM and ROM requirements ccccssscccssscccccesssccecesssccccesssccceeessscceeessseeeeees 154 lo rp nrc 154 ld usl TAeNIC 155 Setting up the system for easyGUl use ieeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eese e eene eene netten enses tene sees ne nee 156 1 Physical display connection sissien tiressi rnise eei E N n ENa aia 157 2 Setting up easyGUI for your display type seesssssssessssssssesessssssesrsrssereststesesentsrresenentstesesenrsrsee 157 3 Display control f nictloris ro oerte terere iter rei Rente Ret EE te e EX ieee nEaN 158 Display iriitialiZatioris a2 inrer er ee re e i e Wate 159 Selecting a display driver nennen nennen nne nnnne nennen nrnne nens 159 Displ
316. set manually and is assigned when a new Y axis is added using the NEW button The identifier for an axis can be changed using the UP and DowN buttons but only within the range of the number of Y axes currently defined An Y axis can be deleted using the DELETE button and the Y axis identifiers of any following Y axes will be decremented accordingly If only one Y axis is defined the DELETE button is disabled Y axis offset from origin This Y axis can be moved left or right along the chart by changing the offset from origin Y axis scale Minimum value at origin The value of the axis where it starts determined by Origin offset above Maximum value at axis end The value of the axis at its end Major step Distance between major tick marks on the axis Major tick mark properties are defined below Minor step Distance between minor tick marks on the axis Minor tick mark properties are defined below Scaling factor Data values are inherently integers but can be presented as any type of integer or floating number The scaling factor is applied to the integer data values before presenting Show Y axis line Display the axis as a vertical line If not checked the line is not displayed Show Y axis between X axes If checked will continue the line between X axes Has no effect if only a single X axis is used Show Y axis below X axes If checked will continue the line below all X axes Show Y axis arrow
317. shortest path The color of the line is determined by the Border color control Bar A standard bar chart Each bar is drawn as a framed rectangle the width of each bar is determined by the Width setting the frame border size is determined by the Thickness setting The frame border color is set with the Border color control and the fill color is determined by the Fill color control Cross Each data point in the data set will be represented as a straight cross i e The height and width of each cross is determined by the value in the Width box The color of the cross is set with the Border color control assSii aul X Each data point in the data set will be represented as a diagonal cross i e x The height and width of each cross is determined by the value in the Width box The color of the cross is set with the Border color control Size Determines size of data representations Dot bar cross and X types only Thickness Determines size of data representations Dot and bar types only Border color Determines the line color of data representations All types Fill color Determines the fill color of data representations Dot and bar types only Graphics layer and filter panels cm aSYCOMP Item types Graphics layer Graphics filter OK Only systems with 5 bits per pixel or higher color depth can use Graphics layer filter items Defines the parameters of the Graphics layer and
318. shown in the rightmost pane Oh what if we can t remember what number the item has Don t just click on all the items until you happen to hit the right one click instead on the display area hitting the logo This item will then be selected Another handy thing is the other way around hold the left mouse button depressed while clicking on one of the items in the item list the corresponding item is then indicated by a flashing red rectangle around it Drawing a logo Logos are shown just like normal text but the font is a little special We want to place the logo at a fixed position so the coordinates are absolute The logo should always be placed centrally in the horizontal direction so to make things a little simpler the alignment is set to Center iphical Embed aking d sion rsionN iphical Embed aking g sion rsionN asSiliQUI 3 3 tem 2 Text Structure hierarchy T Parent structure abs Child structure rog Pos Var text Color Misc position xi fis sw e 3 absolute hd J Emm J Var value slee 3 EIE Ment tm 2 Text Structure hierarchy TK Parent structure i Child structure Mode absolute Absolute Pos table Jf Variable If z Var value e Edit d 5 ead c i r Jr z This way the logo can change size but will still be placed centrally
319. splay Process Configuration Service Off E asvilliGUi Configuration Service Solid gray behind items The small SELECT STYLE button next to the ACTIVE AREA button cycles through the four possible indicator styles in the order shown above e Outlines Draws blue boxes around all items a little dot at the calculated position for each item and draws interconnecting lines between items connected by relative coordinates FLASH PROGRAMMING power dur flash programming Progress Progress Off On This structure starts with a white rectangle filling the entire display in order to erase it it can be seen as the outer thin rectangle with a little dot at the left top corner The primary coordinate The three middle texts Do NOT turn off power during and flash programming are centered note dots in the middle at the Base lines and the two lowest texts are placed relative to the top text note interconnecting lines Around each item is a box surrounding all pixels belonging to the item Note that the boxes around the three middle texts just grazes the character pixels they doesn t indicate background extents This is because the texts are drawn transparent i e with no background If the three texts had background drawing enabled Back ground color Pixel OFF they would look like V puer drta QA flash programming Progress
320. ssSiiaul P1 P4 P3 P2 In this conversion mode when coordinates are converted the X conversion factor is affected by the Y coordinate and vice versa Four corner conversion mode therefore results in superior conversion accuracy compared to two corner conversion mode However if it is guaranteed by the touch interface hardware that the X and Y coordinate directions are precisely as the display coordinate directions i e no tilting only two corner conversion mode is necessary The positions should be placed as near the corners as possible Supplying positions lying nearer to the display center will reduce coordinate conversion precision Touch interface coordinates must lie in the range 32768 32767 The coordinate training is accomplished by calling the GuiLib TouchAdjustReset and GuiLib TouchAdjustSet functions GuiLib TouchAdjustReset resets any previous conversion setup and should always be called before supplying coordinates for the conversion function GuiLib TouchAdjustSet is then called two or four times depending on the desired conversion strategy Two corner adjustment example GuiLib TouchAdjustReset GuiLib TouchAdjustSet 12 13 160 80 GuiLib TouchAdjustSet 230 11 2240 40 The touch interface coordinates 160 80 corresponds to display coordinates 12 13 while touch interface coordinates 2240 40 corresponds to display coordinates 230 11 i e upper left and lower right corners have b
321. st assSiiaul Show tab presents itself a set of buttons by means of which various parts of the display can be marked This tab is subdivided into Show options and Highlight options Show options panel contains the following display settings e Display border If pressed a thin line is drawn around the active area of the display making it easier to differentiate between active pixels and border area MAIN MEHU MAIN MENU Single Samples Preparation Single Samples Preparation Sample Holder Preparation Sample Holder Preparation Manual preparation Manual preparation Configuration Configuration Off e Undrawn Areas not touched by the current structure can be marked Off On The color used for the unmarked areas is defined in the Parameters window Simulated colors tab page e Active area Draws markings for areas of the display lying outside the active area Both the general display active area defined in the Parameters window Basics tab page and active areas defined through Active area items are indicated There are four different ways of indicators with one pair using solid gray and one pair using red hatching and with one solid gray red hatching pair showing behind the items and one pair showing in front The following example is a display where a large part is physically masked out on the target system The active area feature can therefore conveniently indicate the visible part of the di
322. st INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox Down GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex Scroll box index 0 No change list already at bottom 1 Active scroll line changed GuiLib ScrollBox End GuiLib ScrollBox Home GuiLib ScrollBox To Line GuiLib ScrollBox Up GuiLib ScrollBox End Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Related functions Makes last scroll line active and scrolls list if needed Used only for Scroll box items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox End GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex Scroll box index 0 No change list already at bottom 1 Active scroll line changed GuiLib ScrollBox Down GuiLib ScrollBox Home GuiLib ScrollBox To Line GuiLib ScrollBox Up GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLine Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Output Reports topmost marked scroll line Used only for Scroll box items GuiConst INT16S GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLine GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex GuiConst INT16U ScrollLineMarkerIndex Scroll box index Scroll marker index 0 active scroll line gt 0 secondary line markers Index of topmost scroll marker line assSii aul 1 Error in parameters Related functions GuiLib ScrollBox GetActiveLineCount GuiLib ScrollBox SetIndicator GuiLib ScrollBox SetLineMarker GuiLib ScrollBox_GetActiveLineCount Purpose Reports number of marked scroll lines Remarks Used only for Scroll box items For the active scroll li
323. st as for the scroll line structure see above Scroll indicator framed rectangle border color Selects border color for a scroll indicator Shown only if scroll indicator structure is not used assSii aul Scroll indicator framed rectangle fill color Selects fill color for a scroll indicator Shown only if scroll indicator structure is not used Scroll indicator framed rectangle border thickness Defines thickness of border for a scroll indicator Shown only if scroll indicator structure is not used Scroll indicator icon The icon character font and offset can be specified Shown only if the scroll indicator is an icon Scroll indicator icon foreground color Selects foreground color for a scroll indicator icon Shown only if the scroll indicator is an icon Scroll indicator icon background color Selects foreground color for a scroll indicator icon Shown only if the scroll indicator marker is an icon Scroll indicator bitmap A bitmap file location should be defined in the File field with the help of Browse button Shown only if the scroll indicator is a bitmap Parts of the bitmap can be made transparent using the same method as for a Bitmap item see above Graph panel Item types Graph I OK X11 aSScoMpP Defines the parameters of a Graph item A graph item is a complex component that has a large number of configurable properties These properties are joined in easyGUI into groups Basic par
324. string with associated parameters Paragraph A text box with associated parameters where text is automatically divided into lines at word spaces and hyphen characters Formatter Sets variable formatting for numeric variables no visible output Has no effect on string variables All following variables will use this format until another formatter item is encountered Variable Writes a variable according to current formatting settings assSiioaul Variable paragraph Structure call Indexed structure call Conditional structure call Pixel Line Framed rectangle Filled rectangle Circle Ellipse Framed rounded rectangle Filled rounded rectangle Quarter Circle Quarter Ellipse Bitmap Background bitmap Touch screen area Position callback A variable string box with associated parameters where text is automatically divided into lines at word spaces and hyphen characters Unconditional call of another structure specified by both name and index number Indirect call of another structure specified only by name Structure index number is specified dynamically at runtime through a specified variable Indirect call of another structure specified by name and index The structure called is specified dynamically at runtime through a specified variable A single pixel A line segment can be at any angle A rectangle frame with specified thickness optionally filled with another color A filled rectang
325. t Full declaration define GuiConst INT16S XXX GuiConst INT16U Purpose 16 bit unsigned definition Default unsigned short Full declaration define GuiConst INT16U XXX GuiConst INT24S Purpose 24 bit signed definition Normally only used on systems with 24 bit addressing Default undefined Full declaration define GuiConst_INT24S XXX GuiConst_INT24U Purpose 24 bit unsigned definition Normally only used on systems with 24 bit addressing Default undefined Full declaration define GuiConst INT24U XXX GuiConst_INT32S Purpose 32 bit signed definition Default signed long Full declaration define GuiConst_INT32S XXX GuiConst_INT32U Purpose 32 bit unsigned definition Default unsigned long assSiiaul Full declaration define GuiConst INT32U XXX GuiConst INTCOLOR Purpose Specifies the type of color variables Can be from 8 to 32 bits in size Full declaration define GuiConst INTCOLOR GuiConst_INTXXXU GuiConst ITEM BUTTON INUSE Purpose One or more Button items in use If no Button items are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to button drawing is excluded Full declaration define GuiConst ITEM BUTTON INUSE GuiConst ITEM CHECKBOX INUSE Purpose One or more Check box items in use If no Check box items are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to check box drawing is excluded Full declarati
326. t REMOTE FONT BUF SIZE GuiConst REMOTE FONT DATA Purpose Font data is placed in external memory Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE FONT DATA EasvilliGUIi GuiConst_REMOTE_ID Purpose ID number for the binary remote data file GuiRemote bin This ID number is unique for each generation of remote data By using the library function GuiLib RemoteCheck the target system can check that the binary remote data file and the generated c h files are in sync Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE ID GuiConst REMOTE STRUCT BUF SIZE Purpose Size of intermediate buffer big enough to contain largest section of remote structure data Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE STRUCT BUF SIZE GuiConst REMOTE STRUCT DATA Purpose Structure data is placed in external memory Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE STRUCT DATA GuiConst REMOTE TEXT BUF SIZE Purpose Size of intermediate buffer big enough to contain largest section of remote structure text data Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE TEXT BUF SIZE GuiConst REMOTE TEXT DATA Purpose Structure text is placed separately in external memory Full declaration define GuiConst REMOTE TEXT DATA GuiConst ROTATED 90DEGREE Purpose Defines that the display is used in a 90 rotated mode either left or right Full declaration define GuiConst ROTATED 90
327. t compilers AVR compiler flash RAM operation Use this setting if the AVR compiler is used and RAM is of flash type The flag sets some special settings in the easyGUI library enabling use of flash RAM in the AVR development environment Microchip Pic C compiler operation Use this setting if one of the Microchip Pic C compilers is used The flag inserts rom qualifiers where needed in the easyGUI library E asvilliGUIi e Keil 8051 compiler reentrant keyword Adds the keyword reentrant to all recursively called functions in the easyGUI library If this setting is not used easyGUI will typically display graphics primitives and simple screen structures correctly but fail to display complex screen structures e Imagecraft compiler operation Use this setting if one of the Imagecraft compilers is used The flag inserts const qualifiers where needed in the easyGUI library e CodeVision compiler operation Use this setting if one of the CodeVision compilers is used The flag inserts flash qualifiers where needed in the easyGUI library e AVR GCC compiler operation Use this setting if the GCC AVR compiler is used The flag inserts PROGMEM qualifiers where needed in the easyGUI library e AVR Studio 6 compiler operation Use this setting if the GCC Studio 6 compiler is used The flag inserts PROGMEM qualifiers where needed in the easyGUI library e AVR GCC compiler operation Use this setting if the GCC AVR compiler is used The flag
328. t cursor field active redrawing both current and new cursor field Remarks Removed if cursor support is disabled Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Cursor Home void Input None Output 0 Cursor at end of range 1 Cursor moved Related functions GuiLib Cursor Down GuiLib Cursor End GuiLib Cursor Hide GuiLib Cursor Select GuiLib Cursor Up GuiLib IsCursorFieldInUse GuiLib Cursor Select Purpose Makes requested cursor field active redrawing both current and new cursor field Remarks Removed if cursor support is disabled Full declaration void GuiLib Cursor Select GuiConst INT16S NewCursorFieldNo Input New cursor field No Output None Related functions GuiLib Cursor Down GuiLib Cursor End GuiLib Cursor Hide GuiLib Cursor Home GuiLib Cursor Up GuiLib IsCursorFieldInUse GuiLib Cursor Up Purpose Makes previous cursor field active redrawing both current and new cursor field assSiiaul Remarks Removed if cursor support is disabled Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib Cursor Up void Input None Output 0 Cursor at end of range 1 Cursor moved Related functions GuiLib Cursor Down GuiLib Cursor End GuiLib Cursor Hide GuiLib Cursor Home GuiLib Cursor Select GuiLib IsCursorFieldInUse GuiLib DarkenPixelColor Purpose Darkens color in display controller color setup 0 100096o 100096o results in pure black Full declaration GuiConst INTCOLOR GuiLib Darken
329. t defined Graphics layer is used Previous layer The next to latest defined Graphics layer is used Base layer The normal display buffer is used Layer index No XX A specific Graphics layer is used assSii aul e Parameters Ten parameters index 0 9 are transferred to the user defined call back function at run time Each parameter can be a constant value defined at design time or a variable reference Unused parameters can simply be left as constants set to zero All parameters are by definition 32 bit signed integer values For each parameter can be selected Parameter mode Select between constant and variable Constant value constants only Variable reference The variable must be created in the Variables window F9 All numerical integer type variables can be selected A common use of Graphics layer and Graphics Filter items is to define a Graphics layer draw some components using the various item types and then use a Graphics filter for manipulating the graphical canvas The Graphics filter call back function is defined as void GraphicsFilterl GuiConst INT8U DestAddress GuiConst INT16U DestLineSize GuiConst INT8U SourceAddress GuiConst INT16U SourceLineSize GuiConst INT16U Width GuiConst INT16U Height GuiConst INT32S FilterPars 10 where the function name can be freely selected The above example is initialized through this call GuiLib GraphicsFilter Init 0 amp GraphicsFilterl
330. t help either it is prudent to measure all signals to the display with an oscilloscope or similar equipment and make sure that they look satisfactory regarding levels flanks and timings Last resort is to dig into the display controller data sheet and double check if anything was overlooked misunderstood or misread Bitter experience has shown that very carefully rechecking the above issues one by one normally ends with the proper result albeit some times not after a certain amount of frustration This however has nothing to do with easyGUI but is the normal process necessary to get things working 3 Showing the test pattern As an extra help and control that things are set up correctly a test pattern can be generated in easyGUI Just call the GuiLib TestPattern function and the following pattern should be shown in the top left corner of the display The top and left long lines are 32 pixels in length The short lines nearest the corner are 7 pixels long while the lines farthest from the corner are 6 pixels long There is one pixel of white space between the long and short horizontal lines while there are 3 pixels between the long and short vertical lines If nothing is shown at all go back to the previous step If the pattern does not look like shown above look very carefully there are several possibilities assSiioaul The display uses horizontal display bytes but they are reversed i e bit zero is at left and s
331. t just add the button item directly to the structure Well you can but these sort of interfaces will have the same button used in multiple places To maintain the look and feel across all structures it is prudent to put such common buttons as OK and Cancel into separate structures This has the following advantages e Itis guaranteed that this button will look identical on every screen it is used e Making any change to the buttons appearance size color font text etc need only be made once e The target system only needs to maintain the definition of this button once If it is used in 15 structures you still only have 1 button definition and not 15 These buttons can also be used in indexed structure calls for example a pop up box may have just one button to close it but the text of that button might change according to the content Now all we need to do is add in some touch screen interfaces and this structure is ready to go Advanced gurari VERI Tiare CY Save to Flas lvl Ziniooth 8 Due to the relative coordinate system adding touch areas for radio buttons really is as easy as copy paste assSiioaul Displaying data in charts ctm easyGUI with the ok the Graph item Yt a S SCOMIP add on module delivers a powerful charting tool An example of the graph item can be viewed in the tutorial project structure Screen Graph Demo 1 which displays a gr
332. t the most out of your easyGUI experience e Visit our support page at www easygui com where you can find compatibility information for using easyGUI with different display controller microprocessors and compilers e Visit our FAQ easyGUI SUPPORT If you still cannot find the information you need the easyGUI support team is available to help you easyGUI support IBIS Solutions ApS support ibissolutions com Phone 45 7022 0495 Fax 45 7023 0495 Please note that easyGUI is delivered with a 3 month support package included Support plan extensions can be purchased via the easyGUI webshop LANGUAGE SUPPORT APPENDICES A number of appendices covering various aspects of individual languages are found in the separate appendix document It contains e Appendix A JIS X 0201 character set e Appendix B JIS X 0208 character set e Appendix C shift JIS character set e Appendix D Joyo character set e Appendix E Arabic character set
333. tVDBS oo or T 00 oS SUEE UST aU BEDS E OE 24 Character MODE acc sscicscccecccccscscscacscecesccscssncacscocesccscssscacscecececccssbsacecocecesccscesssecacesesocucssssaceetesseseses 25 Text TONES 5 corro Iep Ive 19 De onov e eS iveiese reas oue o Uee sese uns esU oreet eee to svvsue oo rut eco Pase sas nenene eos EU Dee aee P SERV NUS DEN EUR 26 Character deflhitlOIss eoe et petite iet asics reto e e ete opes eter el ea eae Ala 26 Proportional Writing its e ete iet tx tei rre t RR di ei eae 29 Fixed character width seen nenne nnnm entren tenens sitne enin ente eater e tees e nnus 30 gehiciu c rrEPR m 31 unde 31 Current b oT eL RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEMMM 32 FONT LIST WINDOW ipe pERRFAEKESERERRURE ERES RAE EUER A DRaR PR ERE EROHEARSKNEFE REERERKRCK CHRR ERA RUE RRHNAS 34 FONT EDITING WINDOW ccccccccccccccccsccccccsccccscccccccccsccccecsccscsccecessccscecs 36 FONE SEU o 37 Font SELECTION cccccsssssssscccccccccsssssssccccecccccssssscescecccccsssesscescececcasssesssscecccscssssssscecesecsesssssscecesseees 39 AVATAR PS DI AI oR RR PO a 40 assSii aui FONE CQICING e 41 Pixele ditin gein a a tern maU EE M ID eats 41 PSAMAPK COINS e E 41 Editing many characters at once enne nenne nennen nntne tenete ene nn eene nnne 42 Editing comi
334. table way and then read via e g a serial data connection at run time If structure text strings are separately stored in external memory a second function pointer shall be needed GuiLib RemoteTextReadBlock This function pointer should be setup in exactly the same way as the GuiLib RemoteDataReadBlock function pointer above If desired a check can be made of the validity of the current GuiRemote bin binary file By calling the GuiLib RemoteCheck function the easyGUI library checks if the binary file matches the other easyGUI generated files This will guard against running the target system application with a wrong binary file which would probably lead to an application crash Compressed bitmaps When Compressed bitmaps is enabled the memory requirements for storing bitmaps can be significantly reduced The level of compression depends on the color depth of the original bitmap the color depth of the target system and the type of image depicted in the bitmap Graphics images can be compressed by 50 9096 Photographic images can be compressed by up to 7096 if the target system is 8 bit RGB and the image is mostly a single color i e a lot of sky 24 bit photographic images in general do not compress at all and enabling compression for such images can actually have a detrimental effect on the memory usage C and H file code generation At the right are two panels named Fonts and Structures amp variables which controls the actual code
335. tal No of lines in scroll box ActiveLine Active scroll line 1 means no bar Function result 0 Parameter error 1 Ok GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw Redraws dynamic parts of scroll box Input parameters Scroll box index Function result 0 Parameter error 1 Ok GuiLib_ScrollBox_RedrawLine Redraws single line of scroll box Input parameters Scroll box index Scroll line Function result 0 Parameter error 1 Ok GuiLib_ScrollBox_Close Closes a scroll box Input parameters Scroll box index Function result 0 Parameter error 1 Ok GuiLib_ScrollBox_Up Makes previous scroll line active and scrolls list if needed Input parameters Scroll box index Function result 0 No change list already at top 1 Active scroll line changed GuiLib_ScrollBox_Down Makes next scroll line active and scrolls list if needed Input parameters Scroll box index Function result 0 No change list already at bottom 1 Active scroll line changed EasvilliGUIi GuiLib ScrollBox Home Makes first scroll line active and scrolls list if needed Input parameters Scroll box index Text line Function result 0 No change list already at top 1 Active scroll line changed GuiLib ScrollBox End Makes last scroll line active and scrolls list if needed Input parameters Scroll box index Function result 0 No change list already at bottom 1 Active scroll line changed GuiLib ScrollBox To Line Makes specified scroll line a
336. tances and transfers control to other tasks some functions in easyGUI must be protected from this especially display writing This is accomplished by writing code for the two protection functions e GuiDisplay Lock which must prevent the OS from switching tasks e GuiDisplay Unlock which opens up normal task execution again If your operating system does not use pre emptive execution i e if you must specifically release control in one tasks in order for other tasks to be serviced or if you don t employ an operating system at all you can just leave the two protection functions empty Failing to write proper code for the protection functions will result in a system with unpredictable behavior GuiLib Init This function must be called once during system start up Normally this call is done after low level system initialization but the sequence of events depends on the nature of your system GuiLib Init performs the following actions e Initializes the display by calling GuiDisplay Init e Reset display clipping to full screen e Resets display drawing e Clears the display assSii auti e Sets various easyGUI variables for normal display writing e Selects language zero reference language defined in easyGUI GuiLib Refresh The display is updated by the GuiDisplay unit regularly function GuiDisplay Refresh based on markers that indicate which parts of the display needs updating However many other tasks are performed by
337. target system display but at the cost of added memory and processor power requirements Use of anti aliased fonts should thus be backed up with sufficient target system resources o Only systems with 4 bits per pixel or higher color depth can use anti aliased fonts Systems using palette based colors cannot use anti aliased fonts EasvilliGUIi CHARACTER MODES There are two fundamental character modes in easyGUI e ANSI mode Each font can contain up to 224 primary characters character codes 32 255 8 bit character codes are used on the target system e Unicode mode Each font can contain up to 65504 characters character codes 32 65535 16 bit character codes are used on the target system All Unicode fonts should as a principle include the basic Windows ANSI Western style character set in character codes 32 255 The International Unicode Consortium defines Unicode character codes On their web page www unicode org can be found character code charts for a large portion of the worlds character sets All easyGUI Unicode fonts conform to this standard as this ensures easy compatibility with other IT systems especially Windows and thereby allows easy entry of characters in easyGUI easyGUI supports 16 bit Unicode basic multilingual plane but not 24 bit 32 bit supplementary code planes UTF 8 and UTF 16 variable length character coding is not supported Only the UNICODE version supports the Unicode character mode This
338. teps assSii aul Screen Advanced Config 1 1 Background bitmap 2 Text 3 Panel 4 Paragraph 5 Radio button 6 Text 7 Check box 8 Structure call MessageBoxButton 1 1 Button MessageBoxButton 2 1 Button The important time savers here and memory savers too are the Paragraph Radio button pair and the structure calls to sub structures containing just one item the button One Radio button item creates a group of radio icons within the group only one or none of the icons can be selected at any one time With one simple item addition we have added in 3 evenly spaced circles within circles But the real beauty here is how it is controlled in the embedded code running on the target The Radio button is assigned a variable by the easyGUI developer in this case GuiVar RadioControl Set this value to 0 and next time GuiLib Refresh is called the selected icon will be the top one Set it to 1 and it moves to the second icon and so on A setting of GuiLib RADIOBUTTON OFF 1 clears all radio icons The target code can then use the same variable in the code logic to determine which option is currently the active one The check box and button items are equally as simple to control Checkboxes are set when the associated variable is set to GuiLib CHECKBOX ON and cleared when it is set to GuiLib CHECKBOX OFF Buttons in easyGUI are tri state controlled by an associated va
339. th a certain language set used The same language can be included in several language sets if desired The button LANGUAGE SET SETUP control the manipulation of language sets A window is then shown So eaSSiIGUI All languages English German French Spanish Chinese Japanese English Chinese Japanese English German French Spanish Any number of language sets can be created each including any desired sub set of languages The topmost language set is ALL languages which cannot be deleted The selected language set at C code generation time is stated in the fixed file header of the generated files To control which languages are actually present at run time a number of arrays and constants can be evaluated e The array GuiFont LanguageActive in GuiFont c contains the value 1 for included languages and 0 for absent languages e The array GuiFont LanguageIndex in GuiFont c contains indices to the active languages starting with index 0 for the first included language Absent languages have index 9999 e The constant GuiConst LANGUAGE CNT in GuiConst h tels how many languages are defined but not necessarily included in the build e The constant GuiConst LANGUAGE ACTIVE CNT in GuiConst h tells how many languages are actually included e The constant GuiConst LANGUAGE FIRST in GuiConst h contains the index of the first language included If all languages are included the index will be ze
340. th the internally used color system in the easyGUI library and thus do not need conversion of color codes Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR RGB STANDARD GuiConst COLOR SIZE Purpose Color depth in bits per pixel 1 24 Full declaration define GuiConst COLOR SIZE XXX GuiConst COLORCODING B MASK Purpose Bit mask for blue bits in color values Indicated in hexadecimal value Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING B MASK XXX GuiConst COLORCODING B MAX Purpose Defines the highest allowed blue color index 1 255 Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING B MAX XXX GuiConst COLORCODING B SIZE Purpose No of bits with blue color information in palette RGB entries Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING B SIZE XXX GuiConst COLORCODING B START Purpose First bit with blue color information in palette RGB entries Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING B START XXX GuiConst COLORCODING G MASK Purpose Bit mask for green bits in color values Indicated in hexadecimal value Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING G MASK XXX GuiConst COLORCODING G MAX Purpose Defines the highest allowed green color index 1 255 Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING G MAX XXX assSii aul GuiConst COLORCODING G SIZE Purpose No of bits with green color information in palette RGB entries Full declaration define GuiConst COLORCODING G SIZE XXX GuiConst COLORCODING G
341. the Force Reduction line which was supposed to disappear in some instances perhaps for differently equipped systems The complete line is therefore moved to its own indexed structure ConfigForceReduction 1 Remark that the index is set to 1 not 0 No ConfigForceReduction 0 structure exists this is perfectly legal The variable controlling the index structure is ForceReductFlag and it is right now set to the value one Try changing it to zero and watch the indexed structure disappears CONFIGURATION Language English Display contrast 25 assSiiaul At this point it should be obvious what happens ConfigForceReduction 0 doesn t exist so nothing is shown On the target system all that needs to be done is making sure the ForceReductFlag variable has the correct value before showing Screen Config 1 Easy As a little bonus the third line Display Contrast moved up on the position of the Force Reduction line This only happens if the coordinates are carefully set so that the Force Reduction line can be removed without upsetting the relative Y coordinates It should be observed that the Y coordinate is placed inside the ConfigForceReduction 1 structure not in the calling item Otherwise removing the Force Reduction line would leave an empty space between the two remaining lines because the calling item is still there but by now don t call anything The indexed structure technique can be further refi
342. tive area Coordinates relative to active area upper left comer Clipping Project panel e Project name For informative purposes It will be stated in the file header of all easyGUI generated c and h files e File name Cannot be edited Display panel e Display width and height in pixels Sets the basic dimensions of the target display Only active pixels are counted not border or overscan pixels e Active area This function can be turned on and off using the checkbox Turning it on allows definition of a part of the display as the active area The rest is marked as inactive in the Structure editor but drawing is still possible in the inactive area The function is intended for target systems where part of the display is inaccessible e g because it is covered by cabinet parts Examples Ig GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 51 Solutions 4 eaSSiIQGUI 3 Normal mode active area unchecked 240x128 pixels color display Settings Display will look like Display controller Color l Simulated display Compiler Operation m Project F Project name Tutorial r File name EeasyGUINTutoriaNTutorial gui d Display N Il i Display width 240 raphics Proportional Au x5 Displey height V8 Underline 1 isplay height G exts wicuiguiGuiGuiGuiGUi Ul Active area Bi itmaps E B x2 s Y2 19 E Go es relative to act
343. tle red E for Edited to the left until the project is saved ng GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 79 Solutions 4 eaSSilIQGUI 3 For more information on exporting and importing see the easyTRANS chapter below At the upper right part of the panel there are four buttons for alternative types of export import e EXPORTTEXTS Exports all texts data of the left part of the panel to a text file txt e MPORTTEXIS Imports all texts data from a text file txt to the left part of the panel e EXPORT H FILES Exports all texts data found in structures at the right part of the panel A dialog box appears on the screen where you should select the destination folder for exported files A number of files with h extension will be generated The main Language h file containing all structures data Language h Microsoft Visual Studio Ele Edit view Unknown Scope Ejconst int LngConfigForceReductionCount 1 const int LngEditTimeCount 2 const int LngMessageBoxKeyCount 2 const int LngMessageBoxTextCount 3 const int LngMessageBoxTitleCount 3 const int LngPopupCleaningBoxCount 2 const int LngPreparationDosingCount 1 const int LngPreparationForceCount 2 const int LngPreparationParametersCount 14 const int LngPreparationTimeCount 4 const int LngPreparationTitleCount 4 const int LngScreenConfigCount 3 const i
344. to an ending position if anything has changed on that particular scan line The basic skeleton of the function should therefore not be altered only the actual display data writing The skeleton looks like void GuiDisplay Refresh void GuiConst INT16S X Y GuiConst INT16S LastByte GuiConst INT16U Address Lock GUI resources GuiDisplay Lock Walk through all lines for Y 0 Y lt GuiConst BYTE LINES Y if GuiLib DisplayRepaint Y ByteEnd gt 0 Something to redraw in this line Set address Pointer Address Y GuiConst BYTES PR LINE GuiLib DisplayRepaint Y ByteBegin I Some display controller specific code Write display data Some display controller specific code Reset repaint parameters GuiLib DisplayRepaint Y ByteEnd 1 Free GUI resources GuiDisplay Unlock Two parts of the routine are display controller specific one that sets up the correct display controller RAM address and one that writes display data to the display controller RAM Some displays uses more than one display controller a very widespread example is 128x64 pixels displays using the HD61202 display controller or similar a large number of variants exists This display controller type can handle 64x64 pixels and two display controllers are therefore employed The GuiDisplay Refresh function then looks like void GuiDisplay Refresh void GuiConst_INT16S Line
345. ts which together comprises the visual part of a user interface STRUCTURES A complete screen picture on the target machine is made up of one or more screen structures shown successively on top of one another Typically there could be separate structures for headline menu commands and main functionality of the screen or one big structure covering the complete display that is entirely up to the programmer to determine Each structure is identified by a name and an index number 1 to 65534 An index of 1 is intended to be the default version of that structure when creating a new structure the index is set by default to 1 The index number is used when calling indexed structures These are structure calls based on a variable value that determines which structure of several with identical names should be called i e displayed An example could be Two structures are made each containing just one text where the first structure has the name index No TempUnitStr 0 index number always shown in x brackets after the name and contains a text C while the second has the name No TempUnitStr 1 same name but differing index number and contains the text F A structure wanting to display a temperature could display the numerical value itself followed by an indexed structure call to one of the C and F structures based on the value of a variable called e g TempUnit The call would specify structure name Temp
346. ts the default operation of scroll box items Scroll box items are only included in the OK v E CASYCOMP add on module co e Stops at top bottom When navigating scroll boxes on the target system it is not possible to jump from the last scroll line to the first when issuing the scroll down command and vice versa In the Structure editor the selected scroll line always wraps around when testing the visual behavior e Wraps around The opposite setting when navigating scroll boxes on the target system it is possible to jump from the last scroll line to the first when issuing the scroll down command and vice versa T This setting can be overridden by changing the settings of each scroll box independently Module selection panel Various parts of the easyGUI target library can be disabled out by un checking these checkboxes in order to save code and memory space Standard setup is all modules enabled The modules and the consequences of deselecting them are e Cursor support Cursor fields cannot be used in the target code Saves approximately 2kB of code e Scroll support Scroll boxes cannot be used in the target code Saves approximately 5Y2kB of code Scroll box items are only included in the OK y ASYCOMP add on module ctm e Blink support Blinking boxes for e g blinking cursors cannot be used in the target code Saves approximately kB of code assSii aul e Clipp
347. ts to bits Blue bits Tip Just drag to first and last bits of a color the rest will fill in automatically Unused bits This particular display controller uses three bytes for each color despite the fact that the color depth is only 12 bits three each of red green and blue In reality the display controller only has 4 bit registers for each color but they are accessed as bytes on distinct addresses and therefore are considered individual bytes by the microprocessor A third example is I RGB byte 1 RGB byte 0 PE 111541413 112 11 10 978 7 6 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 R2 RI Ro G5 G4 G3 G2 Gt Go B4 B3 E2 B1 BO R Red bits 2 bytes in use Drag colors unused from legend at left to relevant bits above Green bits Or just drag colors unused from bits to bits Blue bits Tip Just drag to first and last bits of a color the rest will fill in automatically Unused bits This display controller requires two bytes for the 16 bpp display depth shown but the blue color is placed on the lowest bits followed by the green and the red colors How the colors are arranged in a particular display controller operating at a particular color mode and color depth must be found in the documentation for the display controller Do not despair if your particular display controller is impossible to configure in easyGUI The display industry is in continuous development and it is ther
348. tton and the X axis assSiiaul identifiers of any following X axes will be decremented accordingly If only one X axis is defined the DELETE button is disabled X axis offset from origin This X axis can be moved up or down the chart by changing the offset from origin X axis scale Minimum value at origin The value of the axis where it starts determined by Origin offset above Maximum value at axis end The value of the axis at its end Major step Distance between major tick marks on the axis Major tick mark properties are defined below Minor step Distance between minor tick marks on the axis Minor tick mark properties are defined below Scaling factor Data values are inherently integers but can be presented as any type of integer or floating number The scaling factor is applied to the integer data values before presenting Example Data value is 23 scaling factor is 10 data will be presented as 2 3 Show X axis line Display the axis as a horizontal line If not checked the line is not displayed Show X axis between Y axes If checked will continue the line between Y axes Has no effect if only a single Y axis is used Show X axis left of Y axes If checked will continue the line to the left of all Y axes Show X axis arrow At the end of the axis display an arrow pointing right If selected the size of the arrow can be customized using the Length and Width controls provided Sh
349. two bit planes Graphical library for 2 bpp grayscale displays with vertical display bytes and two bit planes Graphical library for 4 bpp grayscale color displays with horizontal display bytes Graphical library for 4 bpp grayscale color displays with vertical display bytes assSii aul e GuiGraph5 c Graphical library for 5 bpp grayscale displays e GuiGraph8 c Graphical library for 8 bpp grayscale color displays e GuiGraphl6 c Graphical library for 12 15 16 bpp color displays e GuiGraph24 c Graphical library for 18 24 bpp color displays I MONOCHROME version Only the monochrome graphical library files GuiGraphlH c and GuiGraph1V c are part of the installation not the 2 bpp and higher GuiGraphxx c files OBS Do not make the above include files part of your project setup These files are automatically included into GuiLib c Trying to compile them as separate C units will result in multiple compiler error messages GuiConst unit This unit is only an h file containing definitions set up in easyGUI in the Parameters window The constants unit should not be edited directly instead the values are set from inside easyGUI The following constants are defined in easyGUI in alphabetical order Constants GuiConst ADV FONTS ON Purpose At least one anti aliased font is included If no anti aliased fonts are present this directive will not be present either and some library code related to font rendering will be
350. uateRgbColor GuiLib BrightenPixelColor GuiLib DarkenPixelColor GuiLib DarkenRgbColor Draws a filled or framed circle with single pixel width border void GuiLib Circle GuiConst INT16S X GuiConst INT16S Y GuiConst INT16U Radius GuiConst INT32S BorderColor GuiConst INT32S FillColor Center coordinate Radius Border color GuiLib NO COLOR means same color as fill color Fill color GuiLib NO COLOR means no filling None GuiLib Ellipse assSii auti GuiLib Clear Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Clears the screen Clears flags for cursors auto redraw items and scrolling void GuiLib Clear void None None GuiLib ClearDisplay GuiLib ClearDisplay Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiLib CosDeg Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiLib CosRad Purpose Full declaration Input Output Related functions Clears the screen void GuiLib ClearDisplay void None None GuiLib Clear Calculates Cos angle where angle is in radians factored GuiConst INT328 GuiLib CosDeg GuiConst INT32S Angle Angle in degrees 10 1 10 Cosine of angle in 1 4096 units GuiLib DegToRad GuiLib RadToDeg GuiLib CosRad GuiLib SinDeg GuiLib SinRad Calculates Cos angle where angle is in radians factored GuiConst_INT32S GuiLib CosRad GuiConst INT32S Angle
351. uct Test scroll box None Language Force Reduction OFF Display contrast 29 Pane d de 3X 014 412 0 2 A e Azero appears in the middle box e The English text is shown in inverted colors Pressing Next twice more shows the next cursor fields assSiioaul CONF IGURATION CONF IGURATION Language Enalish Language English Force Reduction Force Reduction OFF Display contrast 25 and Display contrast ES Repeated clicks on NEXT just wraps around to the first cursor field Clicks on Prev will of course traverse the cursor fields the other way around Pressing None clears cursor field displaying while clicking on ALL shows all cursor fields at once A specific cursor field index can also be entered directly in the centre box Another way to show cursor fields at a glance is to select the Cursor fields under Highlight options select the Show tab page n 1 Show Test Show options Displ border Undrawn CO N F IG U R AT IO H Active area ighli i val MAE CHE TO arcad item Language P English cursor fiel Force Reduction HEE Display contrast i Fanm e u S2 au a RS Purple indicators are drawn around all cursor fields and their indices are shown This is a quick way to spot if the correct items are marked as cursor fields and that their numbering is as desired easyGUI doesn t check for numbering inconsistencies like e g gaps in
352. used in the target code The _ button is enabled when the color types Color or Table are selected e f the type selected is Color then a color selection window is shown when clicking on this button The color selection window format depends on the currently selected color mode and color depth in Project parameters Information about how to use the color selection window is also explained there e f the type selected is Table a table selection window is opened depending on the color mode currently in use The number of table entries depends on the number of bits per pixel in use Grayscale including monochrome Predefined gray colors can t be edited Palette Palette index 0 15 or 0 255 Palette can be edited as usual RGB User defined colors table window is displayed with 256 entries The EDIT TABLE coLORS button at the button opens the color selection window and allows the user to modify the colors in the table If the Variable color type is selected only variables of type color can be selected This is a special variable type that changes depending on the color mode and color depth set in the Project parameters When setting the value of the variable the user must take into consideration the color mode and color depth to work out the value required The bar foreground color is used for cursor fields and scroll lines when these are active i e selected If the item in question is not used in cursor fields sc
353. value defined in the Origin box located in the top left panel torial file C easyGUI Tutorial Tutorial gu Structure name Index No tems LanguageText O Ne Structure class Sub assemblies EE Cop Info Rf Dele E Item typ Prev name Next name Prev stt M Nest dit History Origin Ps Cul Poem xo aj Screen Config 1 Cop O New Screen Splash 1 yj20 i Item demo 1 jug Fas Screen Main 0 exw moe IDIOC Calittinne 41 The values for this structure are X Y 20 20 which is a nice value because it displays the item properly for view but doesn t use up more display area than necessary a bonus if the text is long This coordinate value 20 20 is only used by the easyGUI PC program it is not used by the target system If the target system is forced to show a structure starting with relative coordinates not a sensible thing to do it uses 0 0 as the starting point The structure is not shown at the 176 45 position specified by the calling structure Screen Config 1 because easyGUI cannot know exactly which structure is calling LanguageText 0 It could theoretically be any structure in the system That was a little off topic the main reason for looking at the LanguageText 0 structure was to inspect what it contains To make the dynamic language text work another four structures LanguageText 1 to LanguageText 4 have been defined each similarly containing a si
354. ver application User C source code e The easyGUI PC application is explained in detail in this manual The major part of the work regarding the user interface takes place here contrary to standard development work where everything is done in the target system c code e The easyGUI data files are generated by easyGUI at the command of a button Each time something has been changed in the user interface and it is desirable to test it on the target system or the PC simulation toolkit the files must be re generated e An easyGUI library is delivered with the easyGUI package in plain c code This library must be linked into the target system application just like the other modules making up the final system e An easyGUI display driver must also be linked into the target system application easyGUI is delivered with a number of display drivers A suitable driver must be selected and it s code adjusted for the target system hardware EasvilliGUi e User c source code is the last part of the target system source code containing all the working code necessary for the finished system with calls to the easyGUI library and other code related to e g hardware in the target system This manual describes the various steps necessary to take in order to use easyGUI as an efficiently tool for generating high quality user interfaces in embedded systems As easyGUI is complex there will of course be a learning curve as with all
355. visible scroll line Used only for Scroll box items Display only changes after subsequent GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw call If simultaneously setting line marker position make sure top line setting is last action before GuiLib ScrollBox Redraw call GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox SetIndicator GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex GuiConst INT16S TopLine Scroll box index Index of topmost visible scroll line 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib ScrollBox GetTopLine GuiLib ScrollBox To Line Purpose Remarks Full declaration Input Makes specified scroll line active and scrolls list if needed Used only for Scroll box items GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox To Line GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex GuiConst INT16U NewLine Scroll box index EasvilliGUIi New scroll line Output 0 No change list already at specified line 1 Active scroll line changed Related functions GuiLib ScrollBox Down GuiLib ScrollBox End GuiLib ScrollBox Home GuiLib ScrollBox Up GuiLib ScrollBox Up Purpose Makes previous scroll line active and scrolls list if needed Remarks Used only for Scroll box items Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib ScrollBox Up GuiConst INT8U ScrollBoxIndex Input Scroll box index Output 0 No change list already at top 1 Active scroll line changed Related functions GuiLib ScrollBox Down GuiLib ScrollBox End GuiLib ScrollBox Home GuiLib ScrollBox To Line
356. w continued use of the scroll box component type which was introduced in easyGUI version 5 EasyilliGUl 2 INSTALLATION easyGUI can be installed on standard PC s running Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 easyGUI will not function properly on Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me or similar older operating systems INSTALLATION Run the easyGUI installation program following the instructions on screen Several fonts are required e Arial Should be present in a standard Windows installation e Arial Narrow Is part of e g Microsoft Office e Arial Unicode MS The installation program installs these fonts if needed The fonts can also be found in the Fonts sub folder of the easyGUI installation folder Several different easyGUI versions can be installed on the same PC without conflicts This allows older versions to be kept for existing embedded projects and the newest version to be installed for new projects Just select different target folders during installation All easyGUI application information is kept in the installation folder no information is put in the Windows Registry easyGUI LICENSING easyGUl is licensed and protected through the use of a USB dongle You will initially be supplied with a temporary software license key in order to get started while waiting for the dongle to arrive When easyGUI is started for the first time it asks for license information Enter the user name and temporary licen
357. wn control to select whether the button will be displayed with Text and or a glyph Body Determines the appearance of the body of the button There are four options Flat A 2 dimensional shape determined by the settings of the positioning panels and the radius panel The button will have a border determined by the foreground color selected and be filled according to the selected background color 3D A 3 dimensional shape determined by the settings of the positioning panels and the radius panel The button will have a border determined by the foreground color selected and be filled according to the selected background color The border will be thicker to the top and left to provide the appearance of a 3 dimensional shape Icon The button appearance is displayed as the selected font character Options to select the font character only appear when the Icon body style is selected Bitmap The button is displayed as the selected bitmap image One color in the bitmap can be selected as transparent Options to select the bitmap file only appear when the Bitmap body style is selected Text This part of the panel is only enabled if the Button layout includes text It consists of a tab panel and a common panel The tab panel has 3 tabs so that the text can be set independently depending on which of the three possible button states the button is in The button states are Up not pressed Down pressed and Disabled For each of the states the followin
358. wo of them black and white the quality of the picture is not impressive The palette is fixed as EA e 4 bpp grayscale 16 shades 16 shades of gray result in a much nicer bitmap The palette is fixed as EBNNEBNEESESST L EasyiliGUi e 5 bpp grayscale 32 shades 32 shades of gray result make an even better bitmap The palette is fixed as ft 1711 BEEBE TY Tt tt e 8 bpp grayscale 256 shades 256 shades of gray produce a high quality black amp white bitmap The palette is fixed as 4 eaSSiliIQGUI 3 4 bpp palette 16 colors As only 16 colors are available for the entire color space the quality is not suited for continuous tone bitmaps The palette used here is the standard easyGUI 16 color palette ERR 558 The palette can be edited The quality can be substantially raised by employing a palette specially suited for the bitmap EERE This changes the picture to but this approach is seldom practical because a specialized palette is seldom useful for more than one image An exception is when employing company logo colors for various graphical elements 8 bpp palette 256 colors I GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 61 Solutions EasyiliGUi Still not a perfect bitmap but much better than the 4 bpp mode with standard palette The palette used here is the standard easyGUI 16 color palette Paes m NN ne
359. x number to the currently displayed structure Is initially set to 1 After a call to the GuiLib Clear function it is reset to 1 Full declaration GuiConst_INT16S GuiLib CurStructureNdx GuiLib DisplayUpsideDown Purpose Selects between normal display orientation and upside down display orientation Nothing happens until the display is redrawn Setting GuiLib DisplayUpsideDown 0 selects normal display orientation GuiLib DisplayUpsideDown 1 selects upside down display orientation Only relevant if the upside down display at runtime feature is enabled in easyGUI Parameters window Display controller tab page Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib DisplayUpsideDown GuiLib Languagelndex Purpose Contains the currently selected language index with index zero being the reference language To change the language use the GuiLib SetLanguage function Full declaration GuiConst INT16S GuiLib LanguageIndex assSii aul GuiLib RemoteDataReadBlock Purpose Full declaration easyGUI data in remote storage This buffer is used when retrieving data from remote storage The buffer has a size just big enough to contain the largest existing lump of data GuiLib RemoteDataReadBlock GuiConst INT32U SourceOffset GuiConst INT32U SourceSize GuiConst INT8U TargetAddr GuiLib RemoteTextReadBlock Purpose Full declaration Functions easyGUI data in remote storage with separate text data This buff
360. xt box contents to a specific text line Remarks Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll To Line GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex GuiConst INT16S NewLine Input Text box index Text line Output 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok Related functions GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down GuiLib TextBox Scroll End GuiLib TextBox Scroll Home GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up GuiLib TextBox Scroll To PixelLine Purpose Scrolls text box contents to a specific pixel position Remarks Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable Full declaration GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll To PixelLine GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex GuiConst INT16S NewPixelLine Input Text box index Pixel line Output 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok Related functions GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll GuiLib TextBox Scroll GuiLib TextBox Scroll End Pixel Home Pixel Up Pixel GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up Purpose Scrolls text box contents one text line up Remarks Used for Paragraph and Variable paragraph items marked as scrollable EasvilliGUIi Full declaration Input Output Related functions GuiConst INT8U GuiLib TextBox Scroll Up GuiConst INT8U TextBoxIndex Text box index 0 Error in parameters 1 Ok GuiLib TextBox Scroll Down GuiLib TextBox Scroll End GuiLib TextBox S
361. xts take up too much space Remember that texts in easyGUI are proportionally spaced unless otherwise instructed and it is therefore not possible to set specific assSiioaul maximum number of characters for the texts to ensure that they keep inside the allotted limits This method of visual feedback to the Translator has been proven in practice to produce translations with a very low number of errors The only condition that must be met is that the Translator must initially learn to use this visual way of translating When the Translator has finished the work the data file is returned to the developer and read back into easyGUI The Translator can only edit the working language texts not the master language texts or anything else HOW TO USE The procedure for using easyTRANS is as follows it is assumed that easyGUI and easyTRANS has been correctly installed 1 Make sure that all texts in the Structure window are marked unmarked correctly for translation The Highlight translation option in the lower left corner of the Structure window comes handy for this task In easyGUI go to the Language window Select the master language in the left text column usually the first language Select the language to be translated called the working language in the right text column Copy all non translated texts from the master language to the working language by pressing the Copy FROM LEFT TO RIGHT button and selecting the Copy onl
362. y easyGUI Full declaration define GuiConst GRAPH AXES MAX XXX GuiConst_GRAPH_DATASETS_MAX Purpose Max number of datasets used by graph items automatically calculated by easyGUI Full declaration define GuiConst GRAPH DATASETS MAX XXX GuiConst GRAPH MAX Purpose Max number of Graph items automatically calculated by easyGUI Full declaration define GuiConst GRAPH MAX XXX GuiConst GRAPHICS FILTER MAX Purpose Max number of Graphics filter field indices automatically calculated by easyGUI Full declaration define GuiConst GRAPHICS FILTER MAX XXX GuiConst GRAPHICS LAYER BUF BYTES Purpose Total number of bytes in all Graphics layer display buffers The buffers are automatically declared in GuiConst c Full declaration define GuiConst GRAPHICS LAYER BUF BYTES XXX GuiConst GRAPHICS LAYER MAX Purpose Max number of Graphics layer field indices automatically calculated by easyGUI Full declaration define GuiConst GRAPHICS LAYER MAX XXX GuiConst ICC COMPILER Purpose Special flag for Imagecraft compilers assSiiaul Full declaration define GuiConst ICC COMPILER GuiConst INT8S Purpose 8 bit signed definition Default signed char Full declaration define GuiConst INT8S XXX GuiConst INT8U Purpose 8 bit unsigned definition Default unsigned char Full declaration define GuiConst INT8U XXX GuiConst INT16S Purpose 16 bit signed definition Default signed shor
363. y if right column is empty option n Copy texts from left to right C Copy all texts C Copy only if right text is empty X coren This ensures that all texts to be translated are initially filled with a copy of the master language text in many instances making it easier for the Translator to edit the text because some texts will usually be quite alike in different languages Create a egt data file for easyTRANS by pressing the EXPORT T0 FILE button and selecting a suitable destination filename and folder The filename is as default the language name Send the egt file to the Translator The data file is compressed so that it is easier to e g mail Do NOT make major edits to the structures while the texts are exported to the Translator It is not an error to edit while text are out of town but it can obviously lead to some problems when importing texts back in 10 11 12 13 14 EasvilliGUIi The Translator uses easyTRANS to edit texts Texts are automatically saved when closing easyTRANS The egt file is returned from the Translator Read back the egt file into easyGUI by pressing the IMPORT FROM FILE button easyGUI automatically selects the correct language before importing starts Texts that were changed externally in easyTRANS are marked with a little red E to the left until the imported data is saved Select the translated language as the current language Check all structures in
364. yle As the displays used in embedded applications usually have limited resolution it is difficult to develop nice Serif fonts especially in monochrome mode The delivered fonts are therefore in Sans Serif style Serif Sans Serif This is a Serif font Serif Yes There are small attachments on the characters e g the windows font Times this is a Sans Serif font Serif No e g the windows font Arial If easyGUI is employed on a system with a bigger display resolution or only limited amounts of text should be displayed it is of course possible to use Serif fonts FONT COMPRESSION Fonts are saved in the target system C code in compressed form in order to save space For each character the individual scan lines horizontal rows of pixels are uncompressed but only scan lines differing from the previous scan line are stored in the C code Furthermore empty scan lines at the top and bottom of a character and empty space to the left and right of the character are not stored This system occupies a little more space for small fonts because of the scan line accounting but a lot less space for large fonts Another advantage is that decompression execution time is minimal actually shorter than uncompressed font writing in some cases assSiioaul CURRENT FONTS The following list of fonts shows what is currently in the easyGUI system First text fonts are shown then icon fonts Font name Size in Description pixels ANSI 7 6x11
365. yle characters in the same font All characters or icons in a font have the same basic parameters regarding height style etc Observe that bitmaps can also be displayed by using a bitmap item this is unrelated to the fonts and will be explained later Fonts are by definition either monochrome or anti aliased Monochrome font Each character pixel is either on or off If the character pixel is on easyGUI will paint it in the selected foreground text color If the character pixel is off easyGUI will either paint it in the selected background text color or if transparent writing is active leave it untouched An example of a monochrome text font is the ANSI 13 font Hello world Anti aliased font Each character pixel has one of 16 levels of grey If the character pixel level is 15 highest possible value easyGUI will paint it in the selected foreground text color If the character pixel level is in the range 1 14 easyGUI will combine the selected foreground text color with the selected background text color or if transparent writing is active combine it with the existing pixel color in a ratio determined by the 1 14 pixel level If the character pixel level is zero lowest possible value easyGUI will either paint it in the selected background text color or if transparent writing is active leave it untouched An example of an anti aliased text font is the ANSI 17AA font Hello world Anti aliased fonts looks much nicer on the
366. ything Only difference is that two buttons are present below the tree e DELETEOBJECT deletes the selected object e DELETE EVERYTHING deletes all objects These two buttons are only relevant for the temporary project They allow the temporary project to be cleaned for objects Observe that Parameters and C code setup cannot be deleted these types of objects are always present in a project The CLOSE PROJECT button at the top closes the project and returns to the initial display where selection between project temporary project can be made MIDDLE PANEL CONTROLS AND SETTINGS The middle panel controls the importing exporting A number of controls and settings are available e EXPORT OBJECT button starts exporting of objects marked in the left panel Objects marked in the right panel are irrelevant Ig GIBIS Copyright 1999 2015 IBIS Solutions ApS 152 Solutions assSiiaul Duplicates Determines how duplicates are treated They can be either overwritten or skipped This setting is irrelevant for Parameters and C code setup as these types of objects are always present in a project Font handling When importing exporting fonts either the complete font or only a subset of characters can be copied Structure handling When importing exporting structures it can be selected whether other structures used by the selected structures shall also be included in the copying Furthermore positions and variables us

easyGUI User manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents